A Publication of

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.

HILVERSUM, THE NETHERLANDS

Order No : 3522 009 11298

Date : September 2007

Great care has been taken to ensure that the information

contained in this handbook is accurate and complete.
Should any errors or omissions be discovered or should any users
wish to make suggestions for improving this handbook, they are
invited to send the relevant details to:

NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V.

P.O. BOX 32
1200 JD HILVERSUM
THE NETHERLANDS

© NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions Nederland B.V. 2007.

All rights are reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part is
prohibited without the written consent of the copyright owner. All
brand names and product names in this document are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
PREFACE

This manual is valid for the SOPHO 2000 IPS telephone system.

In this manual the term NEAX 2000 IPS or NEAX PBX telephone system represents the
SOPHO 2000 IPS system.
This book might refer to products not included in the SOPHO portfolio.
Certain items in this manual do not apply to the European market.

CE Notice (European Union)

This equipment is intended to be used for connection to the telephone network according
to the following standards :

ISDN interfaces : Analogue interfaces :

- ETS 300 011 (PRI) - ANSI/TIA/EIA-464-C (all interfaces)
- ETS 300 012 (BRI) - TBR15 (2-wire E&M)
- ETS 300 402 (PRI & BRI) - TBR17 (4-wire E&M)
- ETS 300 403 (PRI & BRI) - TBR21 (extension interface)
- TBR3 (BRI)
- TBR4 (PRI)

To take advantage of all features of this system and the connected equipment, the country
or network provider specific features should match the supported features of the IPS
system. For an overview of the supported features, refer to your local NEC Philips
representative or the support desk of NEC Philips Unified Solutions.

Hereby NEC Philips Unified Solutions declares that this product is in conformity with the
essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC.
A copy of the related Declaration of Conformity can be obtained via the address mentioned
on the inside cover.

Warning : This is a class A product.

In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

i
PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION

For countries in the European Union

The symbol depicted here has been affixed to your product in order to
inform you that electrical and electronic products should not be disposed
of as municipal waste.

Electrical and electronic products including the cables, plugs and accessories should be
disposed of separately in order to allow proper treatment, recovery and recycling. These
products should be taken to a designated facility where the best available treatment,
recovery and recycling techniques are available. Separate disposal has significant
advantages: valuable materials can be re-used and it prevents the dispersion of unwanted
substances into the municipal waste stream. This contributes to the protection of human
health and the environment.

Please be informed that a fine may be imposed for illegal disposal of electrical and
electronic products via the general municipal waste stream.

In order to facilitate separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling arrangements

have been made for local collection and recycling. In case your electrical and electronic
products need to be disposed of please refer to your supplier or the contractual
agreements that your company has made upon acquisition of these products.

At www.nec-philips.com/weee you can find information about separate disposal and

environmentally sound recycling.

For countries outside the European Union

Disposal of electrical and electronic products in countries outside the European Union
should be done in line with the local regulations. If no arrangement has been made with
your supplier, please contact the local authorities for further information.

ii
LIST OF TERMS
Abbr. NEC Description Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks
NEC PBC

(Trunk) Route Restriction Class TRFC Traffic Class

AIMWorX SMDR & CTI based management platform
Authorization Code PID code
Background music (feature) When phone is idle, user can have
background music on speaker
Boss/Secretary dialing Executive/Secretary
Broker's call Shuttle : alternate between 2 parties
occupying one line
Busy in/busy out - ACD Group - Absent/Present switching
Class of Service Facility Class Mark (sometimes traffic class)
Coin lines
Consecutive Speed Dialing Common number can be speed dial,
individual choice dialed manually
Consultation hold Enquiry
Development table Analysis tree : table within numbering plan
Dial conversion Conversion from pulse to DTMF
Dynamic Dial Pad Pressing numeric keys grabs a line as well.
Executive calling VIP status assigned to a station.
Ground Start Earth calling : analog trunk protocol
Hearing Aid Compatibility Voice volume control on terminals
Home side trunk User side For ISDN trunks
trunk
Legacy TDM based equipment (non IP)
Location number Division based on capabilities or priorities in
the IP system
Loop Start Subscriber signalling e.g. an ATU-SS
Mate side trunk Network For ISDN trunks
side trunk
MATWorX Operational Maintenance interface tool
Multi line terminal SOPHO Set / ErgoLine : digital terminal with
soft key assignment possible
Multiple Call Forwarding Multi hop (maximum 5 hops allowed)
My Line Users own station number.
Nailed down connection (data) Fixed connection between two data
adapters.
Night Connection - fixed PLE Permanent Line Extension
Night connection - fixed Permanent Line Extension
Night Connection - flexible CF on night extension
Office Code CLID Cluster Identity used for Open Numbering
Plans
One touch key Dterm keys, work (and programmed) like
speed dial function
OpenWorX CTI Application platform
Operator PSTN operator / provider
Party lines
Peer to peer Peer to peer : one to one relation on
functional level
Pilot number Group number
Preset dialing En-block dialing : prepare number and send
it in one go (versus overlap dialing)
Prime Line Seized line (trunk line or extension) when
going off-hook (or speaker)
Restriction Class TRFC Traffic Class
Route Advance Alternative routing when trunk(s) busy
Route Pattern Tree : part of the number analysis table
Save and Repeat LNR Last Number Redial
Secondary appearance park position / sub line

iii
Abbr. NEC Description Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks
NEC PBC

Single line terminal Analog Phone

Software Line Appearance Virtual Extension
Split Call Forwarding Separate CF for internal and external calls.
Stack Dial LNNR Last Number/Number Repetition
Outgoing calling list (5 entries)
Stack Dial Redial List : maximum 5 numbers
Station Extension /
DNR
Station Class FCM Facility Class Mark
Sub Line Lines on the stations, other then the prime
line
Tenant Analysis group : multi company on one PBX
Trunk Route Route
Voice Call
Whisper page Announcement without 3rd party hearing it.
AC Account Code (Client Billing Code) PID Password integrated dialing
ACF Authorization Code Facility OAI related.
ADF OAI related.
ALM DSPP (External) Alarm Display Panel
ANI Automatic Number Identification Caller subscriber number coming in with MF
signaling on T1 trunks
ANS Answer
AOC Advice of charge
AP Application Card
AP Analog Port
ATND Attendant
AttCon Attendant console Operator console
BATTM Battery Module
BGM Back Ground Music service
BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempts
BK Black
BSY Busy
BT Busy Tone
CAMA Centralized Message Accounting A standard related to 911 service
CAS Centralized Attendant Service
CAT Customer Administration terminal Dterm used as programming device for PBX
CCIS Common Channel Interoffice Comparable to IMP
Signalling
CCSA Common Control Switching Customer specific leased lines/network, US
arrangement only
CCT CCIS Trunk
CF-D Call Forwarding - Destination Call Forwarding – Destination : no
preparation on originator necessary.
CFT Conference trunk
CIC Circuit Identification Code Trunk channel ID for virtual IP trunk
channels (Line number)
CID Call ID Display
CIR Caller ID Receiver
CIS Call Information System
CM Command See Commands Manual
CNP Closed Numbering Plan
CO Central Office
COT Central Office Trunk
CPN Calling Party Number ISDN calling party number
CPN Calling Party Number
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRD Call Redirect
CS Cell Station
CSU
DAT Digital Announcement Trunk

iv
Abbr. NEC Description Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks
NEC PBC

DBM Commands Manual - AP00 card

DCH D-Channel Handler
DD key Do not Disturb Key
DDD Direct Distance Dialing
DDI Direct Digital interface T1/E1 interface to public network
DDOVR Do not Disturb Override
DeskCon Desk Console SV SuperVisor / Operator Console
DID calls Direct Inward Dialing calls DDI Direct dialing in : not for FX and WATS
trunk (USA only)
DISA Direct Inward System Access Remote access to system
DIT DID trunk / Direct Inward Termination PLE Permanent Line Extension(s) : for limited
direct inward dialing: 1/more trunk(s) related
to 1 station
DLC Digital Line Circuit For Dterm, Attendant and Desk Console.
DM Distributed Module
DMS Distributed Module Small
DNIS Dialed number Identification Service
DOD Direct Outward Dialing DDO Direct Dialing Out : setting up external calls
without attendant assistance
DP (Rotary) Dial Pulse Pulse dialing
DPC Data Port Controller
DPC Destination Point Code Kind of Cluster ID; for terminating office
DRS Device Registration Server Compare with Gatekeeper function:
registering endpoints
DS Differential Services (DiffServ)
DSS/BLF Direct Station Select / Busy Lamp
Field
DSW Device Server WorX For Dterm assistant software
DT Dial Tone
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
Dterm Digital (or IP) terminal Dterm Desktop Telephone (analog or digital)
DTG Digital Tone Generator
DTI Digital Trunk Interface
FAC Forced Account Code
FCC Federal Communications American regulation office
Commission
FD Floppy Disk
FDA Forwarded - All calls
FDB Forwarded - Busy
FDN Forwarded - No answer
FG Frame Ground
FGD Feature Group D format Signalling format for ANI.
FLF Free Location Facility OIA related, Desksharing look-a-like.
NOT available for IPS 2000
FP Firmware Processor Compare with PMC
FX Foreign Exchange Specific part of PSTN; US only
HDT Hold Tone
HWT howler tone Alarm tone
ICH ISDN channel handler
ICI Incoming Call Identification
ICM Intercom
IEC International Electro-technical
Commission
ILC ISDN line card
IP Internet Protocol IP Internet Protocol
IPM Indications per minute For flashing lamps / LEDs
IPS Internet Protocol Server
IPT IP trunk
IPX Internet Protocol eXchange
IVS Integrated Voice Server

v
Abbr. NEC Description Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks
NEC PBC

KF Key Feauture (registration) Key systems are operating directly on

outside lines.
KTF Key Transfer Facility OAI related.
LAN Local Area Network LAN Local Area Network
LCR Least Cost Routing LCCR Least cost call routing : number analysis
development manner
LDN Listed Directory Number
LDT Loop Dial trunk
LEN Line Equipment Number EHWA Equipment hardware Address : PIM nbr (0 ~
7)+ Port nbr (00 ~ 63) LEN = (000 ~ 763)
LT Line/Trunk
MAT Maintenance Administration Terminal OMM Operation Maintenance module : PC
needed in terminals mode
MB Make Busy SETOUT Set to Out Of Service : Out of Service / Not
installed situation for reset or maintenance
MCI Message Center Interface Interface for Voice Mail system
MEM Main Memory
MFG
MFR MF receiver / MFC receiver/sender
MIB management Information Base
MIC Microphone Microphone or its key
MIS management Information System
MJ Major (alarm)
MLDT Melody Trunk
MN Minor (alarm)
MOC OM terminal window, part of MATWorX
MP Main Processor Compare with CPU
MRF Mode Reset Facility OAI related.
MSF Mode Set Feature OAI related.
MSG Message
NEAX NEC PBX SOPHO
NS Network Station
NTF Number Transfer Facility OAI related.
NTS Night Transfer Station Night Extension
OAI Open Application Interface CTI interface
ODT OD Trunk 2/4 wire E&M
ODT Outband Dialing Trunk
ONP Open Numbering Plan
OPC Origional Point Code Kind of Cluster ID; for originating office
OPR Operator Attendant
PAD (IP) Packet Assembler / Used for TDM / IP translation
Disassembler
PBR Push Button Receiver DTMF receiver
PBSND Push Button Sender DTMF sender
PC Point Code
PCK Pickup
PFT Power Failure Transfer
PIM Port Interface Module Shelf : comparable with CSM and PM
shelves
PLO Phase Locked Oscillator
PMS Property Management System PMS Property Management System (in hotel
environments)
PN Part Number For example PN-8DLCC board
PNA Phone line Network Alliance
PPS Pulses per second Used in pulse dialing
PROTIMS Proprietary protocol, used for building CCIS
PRT ISDN primary rate interface trunk
PS Personal Station
PS Portable Station NEC wireless system
QoS Quality of Service

vi
Abbr. NEC Description Abbr. PBC Description / Remarks
NEC PBC

RAS Registration Admission Status Registration Admission Status

RBT Ringback Tone
RC Room Cutoff
REN Ring Equivalence Number
RLS Release
ROT Reorder Tone
RPIM Remote PIM
RSC Route restriction Class
RST Restricted
RTP Real Time Protocol
SCF Switch Control Facility OAI related.
SDT Special Dial Tone
SLT Single Line Telephone Analog telephone
SMDR Station Message Detail Recording FDCR Full Detailed Call Recording
SMFN Status Monitor Facility (Notification) OAI related.
SMFR Status Monitor Facility (Request)
SOC System on chip
SP Soft Phone
SPID Service Profile ID (ISDN) BSP-ID Basic Service Profile ID (ISDN)
SPN Special Part Number
SSFM Service Set facility Monitor OAI related.
SSFR Service Set Facility Request OAI related.
SST Service Set Tone
STA Station
STN Station
TAH Trunk Appearance Hold
TAS Trunk Answer Any Station Pickup incoming calls in night mode
TCF Terminal Control Facility OAI related.
TCM (Deluxe) Travelling Class Mark
TDM Time division multiplexing
TDS Time division switching
TDSW Time Division Switch
TIC (Individual) Trunk identification Code Line numbers of trunk lines
TMF Terminal Multi-information transfer OAI related.
Facility
TMSF (Terminal) Mode Set Facility OAI related.
TNT Tone/Music source interface
TRF Transfer
TSW Time Switched
UAP User Application Processor
UCD Uniform Call Distribution Basic ACD. Distribution of calls based on
longest idle.
UNP Uniform Numbering Plan (Network) numbering plan
USOC User Service Order Code Other word for REN
VC Voice Compression
VCT Voice CODEC circuit card
VDSL Very high data rate Digital Subscriber
Line
VM Voice Mail
VOIP Voice over IP VOIP Voice over IP
WAN Wide Area Network WAN Wide Area Network
WATS Wide Area Telephone Service Specific part of PSTN, US only
WCS Wireless Communication System "Analog DECT"
WH White
WU Wake up
ZT Zone Transceiver For Wireless system

vii
Dterm icon Meaning

Hold

Transfer

Speaker

Answer

Redial

Conf(erence)

Recall

Feature

MIC

Message

Directory

-/+

Help

Exit

viii
ix
 NEAX 2000 IPS
Installation Procedure Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................... 1

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................. 6
PURPOSE .................................................................................................................... 6
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL ...................................................................................... 6
REFERENCE MANUAL ............................................................................................... 7
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ........................................................................................... 7

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ......................................................................... 9

TRUNKING DIAGRAM ................................................................................................ 10
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ..................................................................................... 12
Floor Standing Installation ................................................................................................ 12
Wall Mounting Installation ................................................................................................. 15
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation .................................................................................. 16
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION ........................................................................ 17
Module/Installation Hardware ............................................................................................ 17
Control Card ........................................................................................................................ 20
Application Processor Card .............................................................................................. 23
Line/Trunk Card .................................................................................................................. 30
LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL ................................................................. 42
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS ....................................................... 45
Circuit Card Mounting Slots .............................................................................................. 45
Mountable Slots According to Number of Ports .............................................................. 47
Control Card Mounting Conditions ................................................................................... 48
Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions ......................................................... 50
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions ............................................................................. 53

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 61

PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................... 62
Grounding Requirements .................................................................................................. 62
Static Electricity Guard ...................................................................................................... 63
Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards ......................................................... 65
Turning Power ON .............................................................................................................. 69
Turning Power OFF ............................................................................................................ 71
System Data Backup .......................................................................................................... 71
PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................... 72
Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin America, Australia) .......................... 74

–i– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90toc001.fm
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin America, Australia) ................................ 74

Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe, Middle East) ........................................... 74
UNPACKING ................................................................................................................ 75
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS ................................................................ 76
AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System .............................................................................. 76
–48 V DC Power Supply System ........................................................................................ 80
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT ..................................................................... 82
Floor Standing Installation ................................................................................................ 82
Wall Mounting Installation ................................................................................................. 100
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation .................................................................................. 103
BUS Cable Connection ....................................................................................................... 110
POWER CABLE CONNECTION ................................................................................. 111
AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System .............................................................................. 111
–48 V DC Power Supply System ........................................................................................ 118
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST ................................................. 121
AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System .............................................................................. 121
–48 V DC Power Supply System ........................................................................................ 125
BATTERY CONNECTION ........................................................................................... 129
Internal Battery Connection ............................................................................................... 131
External / BATTM Battery Connection .............................................................................. 134
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF ......................................................................................... 137
Installation of External MDF .............................................................................................. 137
MDF Cable ........................................................................................................................... 138
Cable Running to External MDF ........................................................................................ 141
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF ........................................................................ 144
Cable Connection to MDF .................................................................................................. 144
Location of Each LEN ......................................................................................................... 145
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement ...................................................................................... 150
MDF Cross Connections .................................................................................................... 167
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT ....................................................... 173
Peripheral Equipment and Card List ................................................................................. 173
Analog C.O. Trunk (COT) ................................................................................................... 175
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT) .................................................................................................. 176
DID Trunk (DIT) ................................................................................................................... 185
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) ............................................................................................... 186
Optical Fiber Interface (M10) ............................................................................................. 193
POTS Splitter (M13) ............................................................................................................ 197
In-Skin HUB ......................................................................................................................... 201
Single Line Telephone (LC/LLC) ....................................................................................... 203
Dterm/DSS Console (DLC) ................................................................................................... 205
SN716 DESKCON (DLC) ..................................................................................................... 207

– ii – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC) ................................................................................... 237

Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP) ......................................................... 245
External TAS Indicator (DK) ............................................................................................... 246
Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP) ............................................................................... 249
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP) ....................................... 252
External BGM Source (COT/TNT) ...................................................................................... 257
Power Failure Transfer (PFT) ............................................................................................. 259
Alarm Display Panel (MP) .................................................................................................. 264
Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP) ................................................................................ 265
Built-in SMDR/PMS on IP (MP) .......................................................................................... 268
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00) ............................................................ 269
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS ..................................................................................... 275
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ........................................................................................... 277
All Clear, Except LEN000 CAT ........................................................................................... 277
Resident System Program ................................................................................................. 277
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY ............................................................................................... 278
CAT ...................................................................................................................................... 278
MAT ...................................................................................................................................... 279
Confirming Lamp Indication .............................................................................................. 279
OPERATION TEST ...................................................................................................... 280
SYSTEM DATA SAVE ................................................................................................. 281
CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK .............................................................................. 281
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................... 281
Visual Check ....................................................................................................................... 281
MOUNTING FRONT COVER ....................................................................................... 282
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 283
Required Equipment ........................................................................................................... 283
Service Conditions ............................................................................................................. 284
Installation Procedure ........................................................................................................ 285
Mounting Locations of MP Cards ...................................................................................... 286
MP System Changeover ..................................................................................................... 287
Office Data Copy ................................................................................................................. 288

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS ....................................... 289

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ................................................................................ 290
CONTROL CARD ........................................................................................................ 291
PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP) ...................................................... 292
PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP) .............................................................................................. 298
PN-CP15 (FP) ....................................................................................................................... 303
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR) ........................................................................................................... 305
PZ-M606-A (ETHER) ............................................................................................................ 307

– iii – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90toc001.fm
JULY/15/2007
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR) .................................................................................................... 309

PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR) .................................................................................................... 312
PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) .................................................................................................... 315
PZ-PW135 (PWR) ................................................................................................................ 317
APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD .......................................................................... 319
PN-AP00-B (AP00) .............................................................................................................. 321
PN-AP00-D (AP00) .............................................................................................................. 327
PN-AP00-B (DBM) ............................................................................................................... 333
PN-BRTA (BRT) ................................................................................................................... 336
PN-2BRTC (BRT) ................................................................................................................. 341
PN-2BRTK (BRT) ................................................................................................................. 346
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT) ............................................................................................................. 351
PN-24CCTA (CCT) ............................................................................................................... 359
PN-30CCTA (CCT) ............................................................................................................... 365
PN-CFTC (CFT) .................................................................................................................... 372
PN-CFTC-A (CFT) ................................................................................................................ 374
PN-DAIA-A (DAIA) ............................................................................................................... 376
PN-DAIB (DAIB) ................................................................................................................... 381
PN-DAIC (DAIC) ................................................................................................................... 385
PN-DAID-A (DAID) ............................................................................................................... 388
PN-DAIE (DAIE) ................................................................................................................... 394
PN-DAIF (DAIF) ................................................................................................................... 398
PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH) ...................................................................................................... 402
PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT) ...................................................................................................... 407
PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT) ...................................................................................................... 414
PN-24DTA-C (DTI) ............................................................................................................... 421
PN-30DTC-C (DTI) ............................................................................................................... 427
PN-8ETIA (HUB) .................................................................................................................. 433
PN-2ILCC (ILC) .................................................................................................................... 435
PN-8IPTA (SIP) .................................................................................................................... 440
PN-IPTB (IPT) ...................................................................................................................... 444
PN-24PRTA (PRT) ............................................................................................................... 448
PN-30PRTA (PRT) ............................................................................................................... 456
PN-4RSTB (MFR) ................................................................................................................. 463
PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A (CIR) ........................................................................................... 465
PN-SC00 (CCH) ................................................................................................................... 467
PN-SC01 (DCH) ................................................................................................................... 470
PN-SC03-B/PN-SC03-C (CSH) ............................................................................................ 473
PN-SC03-B (ICH) ................................................................................................................. 475
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM) ............................................................................................................ 477

– iv – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
JULY/15/2007
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PZ-M542 (CONN) ................................................................................................................. 480

PZ-M557 (CONN) ................................................................................................................. 482
LINE/TRUNK CARD .................................................................................................... 484
PN-2AMPA (AMP) ................................................................................................................ 488
PN-CFTA (CFT) .................................................................................................................... 489
PN-CFTB (CFT) .................................................................................................................... 490
PN-2COTD (COT) ................................................................................................................ 491
PN-2COTE (COT) ................................................................................................................. 492
PN-4COTA-A (COT) ............................................................................................................. 493
PN-4COTB (COT) ................................................................................................................ 494
PN-4COTE (COT) ................................................................................................................. 495
PN-4COTF (COT) ................................................................................................................. 496
PN-4COTG (COT) ................................................................................................................ 497
PN-6COTJ (COT) ................................................................................................................. 498
PN-8COTH (COT) ................................................................................................................ 499
PN-8COTQ (COT) ................................................................................................................ 500
PN-8COTR (COT) ................................................................................................................ 501
PN-8COTS (COT) ................................................................................................................. 502
PN-8COTT (COT) ................................................................................................................. 503
PN-8COTU (COT) ................................................................................................................ 504
PN-2CSIA (CSI) .................................................................................................................... 505
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI) ................................................................................................................ 508
PN-2CSIH (CSI) .................................................................................................................... 511
PN-4CSIA (CSI) .................................................................................................................... 514
PN-4CSIA-A (CSI) ................................................................................................................ 517
PN-4DATC (DAT) ................................................................................................................. 520
PN-4DIDA (DIT) .................................................................................................................... 521
PN-2DITA (DIT) .................................................................................................................... 522
PN-4DITB (DIT) .................................................................................................................... 523
PN-DK00 (DK) ...................................................................................................................... 524
PN-2DLCN (DLC) ................................................................................................................. 525
PN-4DLCM (DLC) ................................................................................................................ 526
PN-4DLCT (DLC) ................................................................................................................. 527
PN-4DLCQ (DLC) ................................................................................................................. 528
PN-8DLCL (DLC) ................................................................................................................. 529
PN-8DLCP (DLC) ................................................................................................................. 530
PN-2ILCA (ILC) .................................................................................................................... 531
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) .............................................................................................................. 534
PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD) ............................................................................................................ 537
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) ........................................................................................................ 541

–v– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90toc001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PN-4LCC (LC) ...................................................................................................................... 545

PN-4LCD-A (LC) .................................................................................................................. 546
PN-4LCE (LC) ...................................................................................................................... 547
PN-4LCF (LC) ...................................................................................................................... 548
PN-4LCK (LC) ...................................................................................................................... 549
PN-4LCL (LC) ...................................................................................................................... 550
PN-4LCV (LC) ...................................................................................................................... 551
PN-4LCW (LC) ..................................................................................................................... 552
PN-8LCAA (LC) ................................................................................................................... 553
PN-8LCAB (LC) ................................................................................................................... 554
PN-8LCAD (LC) ................................................................................................................... 555
PN-8LCAE (LC) .................................................................................................................... 556
PN-8LCAF (LC) .................................................................................................................... 557
PN-8LCAK (LC) ................................................................................................................... 558
PN-2LDTA (LDT) .................................................................................................................. 559
PN-4LDTA (LDT) .................................................................................................................. 560
PN-4LLCB (LLC) .................................................................................................................. 561
PN-M10 (M10) ...................................................................................................................... 563
PN-M13 (M13) ...................................................................................................................... 565
PN-2ODTA (ODT) ................................................................................................................ 566
PN-2ODTB (ODT) ................................................................................................................ 567
PN-4ODTA (ODT) ................................................................................................................ 568
PN-4RSTF/PN-4RSTF-A (SDT) ........................................................................................... 570
PN-4RSTH (SDT) ................................................................................................................. 571
PN-8RSTG (PBR) ................................................................................................................. 572
PN-RTA (RTA) ..................................................................................................................... 573
PN-TNTA (TNT) .................................................................................................................... 576
PN-4VCTI (4VCT) ................................................................................................................. 578
PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT) .................................................................................. 580
PZ-8PFTB (PFT) .................................................................................................................. 582
PZ-M623 (ETHER) ............................................................................................................... 583
PZ-M649 (DTI) ...................................................................................................................... 584
PZ-M650 (DTI) ...................................................................................................................... 587
PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10) ............................................................ 590
PZ-VM01 (VM01) .................................................................................................................. 593
PZ-VM02 (VM02) .................................................................................................................. 594
PZ-VM03-M (VM03) .............................................................................................................. 597
PZ-VM04 (VM04) .................................................................................................................. 602
PZ-VM05 (VM05)/PZ-VM06 (VM06) ..................................................................................... 603

– vi – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90toc001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(1) Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

(2) Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.

(3) Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.

(4) Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

(5) Read and understand all instructions.

(6) Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

(7) Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol
cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

(8) Do not use this product near water; for example, under water pipes near a bath tub, sink, or laundry
tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

(9) Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious
damage to the product.

(10) Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect it
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be
blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never
be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a built-in
installation unless proper ventilation is provided.

(11) This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label.
If you are not sure of the type of power source available, consult with your local power company.

(12) This product is normally connected with a three wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety feature.
If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete
outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug.

–1– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch0001.fm
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(13) Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be
abused by persons walking on it.

(14) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.

(15) Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous
voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid
of any kind on the product.

(16) To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualified
serviceman when some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose
you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the
appliance is subsequently used.

(17) Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:

(a) When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

(b) If liquid has been spilled into the product.
(c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
(d) If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls, that are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of
other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified
technician to restore the product to normal operation.
(e) If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
(f) If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.

(18) Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

(19) Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

–2– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch0001.fm
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(20) For Digital interfaces, a CSU/DSU may be required for proper operation. When choosing a CSU/
DSU, make sure that it is provided with suitable lightning protection. If this is not the case, gas tube
arresters as specified elsewhere in this manual (b) must be connected to the involved interface wiring.

NOTE: The Ethernet ports are not intended to be connected directly to outdoor cables.

PBX MDF
OFF-PREMISE
PRT/BRT/DTI/CCT
CSU/DSU RECEIVE
RA

RB
To Digital
TRANSMIT
Network
TA

TB

CSU : Customer Service Unit

G DSU : Digital Service Unit
MDF : Main Distribution Frame

(21) When installing the LC card for providing the analog telephone interface that is connected to off-
premise site, use PN-4LLCB card.

(22) Do not install the PN-2ODTB/PN-4ODTA card for providing the analog trunk interface that is
connected to off-premise site.

–3– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch0001.fm
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(23) When installing the BRI/PRI/E1/CCIS/Q-SIG/Dterm interface designated by “SELV” that has the
possibility of being connected to off-premise site, gas tube arrester is required for proper operation.

(a) Installation
When installing the DLC card for providing the Dterm interface that is connected to off-premise
site, use PN-2DLCN/PN-4DLCT card and connect gas tube arrester across the line as shown in
Figure below.
PBX MDF
OFF-PREMISE
GAS TUBE
DLC ARRESTER

R
G
To Dterm
T

MDF : Main Distribution Frame

G

When installing the BRT/PRT/DTI/CCT card for providing the BRI/PRI/E1/CCIS/Q-SIG

interface that is connected to off-premise site, connect gas tube arresters across each transmit and
receive line as shown in Figure below.
PBX MDF
OFF-PREMISE
GAS TUBE
BRT/PRT/DTI/CCT
ARRESTER RECEIVE
RA
G

RB
To Digital
TRANSMIT Network
TA
G

TB

GAS TUBE
ARRESTER
MDF : Main Distribution Frame
G

–4– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch0001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(b) Specifications
Specifications of the gas tube arrester to be provided are as follows.

PARAMETER SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission bandwidth DC to 2MHz
Transmission loss Less than 0.5dB
Longitudinal balance More than 50dB
Nominal decoupling resistance 1ohm ± 0.5%
Operating voltage DC 60V Max.
Nominal DC spark-over voltage 90V
Impulse spark-over voltage (at 1.2/50µs 6kV) 1500V (at initial max. voltage; 0 to 10µs)
20V (at more than10µs)
Nominal discharge current 100 A (at 10/200µs)

(24) Warning for US and Canada only

WARNING
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

–5– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch0001.fm
 INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE/OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

INTRODUCTION

PURPOSE
This manual explains the installation procedure for the NEAX 2000 IPS system. This equipment can only
be serviced by a qualified service person. You should perform each installation step according to the pro-
cedures described in CHAPTER 2.

OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

This manual consists of three chapters. The following paragraphs summarize Chapters 1 through 3.

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

This chapter explains the outline of system configuration, the name and functions
of equipment, the line conditions of each terminal, and the mounting conditions of
circuit cards used in the system.

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
This chapter explains how to install the PBX and the peripheral equipment, system
initialization and data entry, and operation test procedures you should follow after
completing the installation.

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS

This chapter explains the meaning of lamp indications and the switch settings of
each circuit card used in the system.

–6– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch0001.fm
 INTRODUCTION
REFERENCE MANUAL/TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

REFERENCE MANUAL
During installation, refer also to the NEAX 2000 IPS manuals below:

System Manual:
Contains the system description, hardware installation procedure, the programming procedure for the
NEAX 2000 IPS System.

Command Manual:
Contains Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) operation, command function and data required
for programming the system, and Resident System Program.

Office Data Programming Manual:

Contains the Customer Specifications Sheets and the Office Data Programming Sheets.

Feature Programming Manual:

Contains procedure for programming each business and hotel feature.

Maintenance Manual:
Contains the maintenance service features and the recommended troubleshooting procedure.

MATWorX User Guide:

Provides information to use the MATWorX program, including highlights about features of the
program.
This guide is a supplement to the MATWorX online Help system, which provides context-sensitive
information and procedures to perform tasks using MATWorX.

TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

In this manual, PBX system is designated as “PBX” usually. And the following is used if the type of the
PBX system need to be identified.

• NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER: NEAX 2000 IPS

NOTE: In regard to China market, we have not released NEAX 2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL
SERVER but NEAX2000 is released.

–7– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch0001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

–8– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch0001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL INFORMATION

This chapter explains the outline of system configuration, the name and func-
tions of equipment, the line conditions of each terminal, and the mounting
conditions of circuit cards used in the system.

TRUNKING DIAGRAM .............................................................. 10

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ................................................... 12
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION ...................................... 17
LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL ............................... 42
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS ..................... 45

–9– NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
TRUNKING DIAGRAM

TRUNKING DIAGRAM
This figure shows a typical trunking diagram for the system.

Trunking Diagram

NOTE: The equipment marked with (*) is provided by the customer.

PFT

COT C.O. LINE

SINGLE LINE TEL LC MP
AMP
LONG LINE STATION LLC INCLUDING
DIT DID LINE
SINGLE LINE TEL TDSW
WITH MESSAGE LC LD
DTG LDT
WAITING LAMP TIE LINE
PBSND 2W/4W E&M
16CFT ODT
ISDN TERMINAL ILC OPTICAL
MLDT
term PLO FIBER DTI/
D DLC M10 M10 REMOTE PIM
MEM
DSS CCIS
MODEM CCT NETWORK
LONG LINE Dterm DLC PBR
DTI DIGITAL
DAT LINK
DSS DK
ATTCON/DESKCON TNT BRT
DLC ISDN
SMDR NETWORK
PRT
CSI PMS
PS CS/ZT DRS CCH
FP
HomePNA/ OAI CSH
VDSL LC/LLC IPT
ADAPTER CSH DCH
PC M13
CSI
ICH DIGITAL
POTS LINK
SPLITTER PBR (FOR M649/M650)
SINGLE LINE TEL RTA
DAT 4VCT ROUTER
HomePNA/ IPT
INTERNET HUB
VDSL MODEM 16VCT IP-PAD ROUTER IP
ROUTER
NETWORK
SMDR AP00
IP-PAD ROUTER
EXPMEM
PMS
24DSP
CIS/HOTEL AD-8/IM-16 VM
PRINTER/
MCI(VMS) ROUTER
DtermIP/IP-CS/ SIP SIP NETWORK
TCP/IP
PC FOR OAI/ ETHER 24DSP
MAT/ 10BASE-T/ CIR
SMDR/ ROUTER/HUB
100BASE-TX
PMS MFR
RS-232C CFT
MAT/SMDR
KEY(*)
ALARM DK
DISPLAY
PANEL DK
PoE ANNOUNCEMENT
IP TERMINAL HUB COT
10BASE-T/ MACHINE(*)
100BASE-TX EXTERNAL HOLD
COT TONE(*)
PSTN AMPLIFIER
MAT COT
COT
(FOR REMOTE MAINTENANCE) SPEAKER(*)
COT/TNT BGM (*)
FP
TNT EXTERNAL HOLD
TONE(*)

– 10 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
TRUNKING DIAGRAM

Description of Symbols in Trunking Diagram

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

AMP Amplifier Trunk Card KEY External Key
AP00 SMDR/Hotel Application Card LC Line Circuit Card
BGM External Music Source for Dterm (for Single Line Telephone)
Back Ground Music Service LDT LD Trunk Card
BRT Basic Rate Interface Trunk Card LLC Long Line Circuit Card
CCH Common Channel Handler Card M10 Optical Fiber Interface Card
CCT CCIS Trunk Card M13 POTS Splitter Card
16CFT 16 Circuit Four Party Conference MAT Maintenance Administration Termi-
Trunk on MP nal
CFT Conference Trunk Card MDF Main Distribution Frame
CIS Call Information System MEM Main Memory on MP
CIR CALLER ID Receiver Trunk Card MFR MF Receiver/
COT C.O. Trunk Card MFC Receiver/Sender Card
CSH CS/ZT Handler Card/Virtual CSH for MLDT Melody Trunk on MP
IP-CS on MP MODEM Modem on MP
CSI CS/ZT Interface Card MP Main Processor Card
CS/ZT Cell Station (for PHS) OAI Open Application Interface/Built-in
Zone Transceiver (for PCS) OAI on MP
DAT 4-line Digital Announcement Trunk ODT OD Trunk Card (2/4 wire E&M)
Card/2-line Built-in DAT on MP PBR 8-line PB Receiver Card/4-line PB
DCH D-channel Handler Card Receiver on MP
DIT DID Trunk Card PBSND PB Sender on MP
DK External Relay/Key Interface Card/ PFT Power Failure Transfer
Built-in DK on MP PLO Phase Locked Oscillator on MP
DLC Digital Line Circuit Card (for Dterm, PMS Property Management System/Built-
ATTCON, DESKCON) in PMS on MP
DRS Device Registration Server on MP PRT ISDN Primary Rate Interface Trunk
24DSP 24-channel DSP Card Card
DSS DSS Console PS Personal Station
DTI Digital Trunk Interface Card RTA In-Skin Router Card
DTG Digital Tone Generator on MP SIP SIP Trunk Card
ETHER Ethernet Control Card SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
EXPMEM Memory Expansion Card SMDR Station Message Detail Recording/
FP Firmware Processor Card/Built-in FP Built-in SMDR on MP
on MP/Virtual FP on MP TDSW Time Division Switch on MP
ICH ISDN-channel Handler Card TNT Tone/Music Source Interface Card/
ILC ISDN Line Circuit Card Built-in TNT on MP
IP-CS Cell Station on IP (for PHS) 4VCT 4-channel CODEC Card
IP-PAD 8-channel IP-PAD Card 16VCT 16-channel CODEC Card
32-channel IP-PAD Card VM Voice Mail Card
IPT IP Trunk Card/Virtual IPT on MP

– 11 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
The system provides three installation methods as follows:

• Floor Standing Installation

• Wall Mounting Installation
• 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation

Example of system configurations for each installation method are shown below.

Floor Standing Installation

1-PIM Configuration for Floor Standing Installation

223 (8.8)
430 (16.9)

PIM

417 (16.4)
NOTE

UNIT : mm (inch)

FRONT BASE

NOTE: Height (65 mm (2.6)) of the BASE is included.

– 12 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

2-PIM Configuration for Floor Standing Installation

223 (8.8)
430 (16.9)

PIM

769 (30.2)
NOTE
PIM/BATTM

FRONT BASE
UNIT : mm (inch)

NOTE: Height (65 mm (2.6)) of the BASE is included.

– 13 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

Maximum Configuration for Floor Standing Installation

223 (8.8)

860 (33.9)

PIM3

PIM2 PIM7

PIM1 1473
PIM6 (58.0)

1825
(71.8)
NOTE

PIM0 PIM5

PIM4
BATTM

BATTM

BASE
FRONT UNIT : mm (inch)

NOTE: Height (65 mm (2.6)) of the BASE is included.

– 14 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

Wall Mounting Installation

1-PIM Configuration for Wall-Mounting Installation

PIM

BASE

– 15 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

19-inch Rack Mounting Installation

1-PIM Configuration for 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation

PIM

19″BRACKET

BASE

19-inch RACK

– 16 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

This section explains the names and functions of the equipment (modules, installation hardware, circuit
cards) used in the system.

Module/Installation Hardware
This table shows the names and functions of the modules.

Module Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
SN1617 PIM Port Interface Module (PIM)
PIMMD Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of eight PIMs,
and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports × 8).
SN1663 PIM Port Interface Module (PIM)
PIMMG Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
[For EU] Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of eight PIMs,
and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports × 8).
SN1658 PIM Port Interface Module (PIM) for Backup CPU System
PIMMF Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
One PIM is required per Backup CPU System.
SN1664 PIM Port Interface Module (PIM) for Backup CPU System
PIMMH Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
[For EU] Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
One PIM is required per Backup CPU System.
Continued on next page

– 17 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Module Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
COVER COVER PARTS Cover Parts Assembly
PARTS ASSEM One cover parts assembly is required for each PIM.
ASSEM-A
SN1545 BASE/TOP Base/Top Cover Assembly
BASERE ASSEM One base and top cover assembly is required for each stack.
TOP COVER
ASSEM
SN1685 BASE Base for DC–48 V Power Input System
BASEUC Installation Cable to Terminal Blocks from this Base is to be local
provided.
SN1619 BATTM Battery Module for housing PIM or CS (ZT) backup batteries
BATTMB Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power inter-
ruption (for 3 hours).
SN1671 BATTM Battery Module for housing PIM backup batteries
BATTMG Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power inter-
[For EU] ruption (for 3 hours).

– 18 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

This table shows the names and functions of installation hardware.

Installation Hardware Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
HANGER ASSEM (B) Wall Hanger Assembly
One HANGER ASSEM is required per PIM for Wall Mounting
Installation.
MOUNTING BRACKET Safety Mounting Bracket
Used as an overhead hanger for Floor Standing Installation. Wire,
chain or eyebolts are to be locally provided, to secure the bracket.
To be installed on the top PIM in four or more modules of stack. It
provides 1.1G shockproof construction.
19″ RACK BRACKET (A) 19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type A
One bracket is required for one PIM configuration.
One bracket is required for the top PIM of multiple module con-
figuration.
19″ RACK BRACKET (B) 19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type B
One bracket is required for the bottom module of multiple module
configuration.
I/F BRACKET ASSEM Inter Frame Bracket Assembly
Used to joint the frames in two-frame configuration, for Floor
Standing Installation.
BASE TRAY ASSEM Base Tray Assembly
One BASE TRAY is required per one frame for Floor Standing
Installation of Stationary Equipment.

– 19 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Control Card
This table shows the names and functions of each control card.

NOTE: PZ-M537 (EXPMEM) card is not required for the MP (PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/

PN-CP24-D/PN-CP26-A/PN-CP26-B) card.

Control Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-CP24-A/ MP Main Processor Card
PN-CP24-B Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), built-in FP, Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR
on RS-232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*, Virtual
IPT, Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB,
Flash ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH × 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB
sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode), two RS-
232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 128 sec-
onds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance
(33.6 Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface. BUS interface
functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay
timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
One card is required per system.
*: Series 3400 software enhancement
PN-CP24-C/ MP Main Processor Card
PN-CP24-D Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), built-in FP, Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR
on RS-232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*, Virtual
IPT, Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB,
Flash ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH × 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB
sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode), two RS-
232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 128 sec-
onds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance
(33.6 Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface. BUS interface
functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay
timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
Supports MP Program Download (FTP)**.
Once card is required per system.
* : Series 3400 software enhancement
** : Series 3500 software enhancement
Continued on next page

– 20 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Control Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-CP27-A/ MP Main Processor Card for Backup CPU system
PN-CP27-B Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR on RS-
232C, built-in SMDR on IP*, built-in PMS on IP*, Virtual IPT,
Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB, Flash
ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH × 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB
sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode), two RS-
232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 128 sec-
onds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance
(33.6 Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface. BUS interface
functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay
timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
Two cards are required per Backup CPU system.
One card for active MP [MP0] and another card for stand by MP
[MP1].
*: Series 3400 software enhancement
PN-CP15 FP Firmware Processor Card
Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768 KB), and
inter-module BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/
receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable
delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS. When the system
consists of three PIMs or more, one each of this card is mounted
respectively in PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
PZ-M606-A ETHER Ethernet Control Card
Mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet and transmit/
receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol.
Provides Auto Negotiation function.
• Always set to ON
[For Series 3300 software or before]
• Set to ON/OFF by the office data setting
[For Series 3400 software or later]
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly
to this card.
Continued on next page

– 21 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Control Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-PW00 EXTPWR Power Supply Card for DESKCON
Provides –48 V DC power.
Maximum 4 cards per frame (4PIMs). Maximum 3 cards per PIM.
Occupies two physical slots width per card.
PZ-PW121 AC/DC PWR Main Power Supply Card
Input: AC120 V/240 V (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Output: –27 V (4.4 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA), +90 V (80 mA)
One card is pre-installed per PIM.
PZ-PW126 AC/DC PWR Main Power Supply Card
[For UK/EU] Input: AC240 V (60 Hz)
Output: –27 V (4.4 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA), +90 V (80 mA)
One card is pre-installed per PIM.
PZ-PW122 DC/DC PWR –48 V DC Power Supply Card
Input: –24 V DC
Output: –48 V DC (1.7 A)
One card per PIM.
Used as main power supply from PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A/PN-
4DLCT/PN-4LDTA/PN-4LLCB/PN-4ODAT card to terminals.
PZ-PW135 PWR Main Power Supply Card for –48 V DC
Input: DC–48 V
Output: DC–27 V (4.5 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA),
+90 V (80 mA), –48 V (1.8 A)
Mounted in A361 PIM-DC (One card per 1 PIM)

– 22 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card

This table shows the names and functions of each application processor card.

NOTE: PN-AP01 (AP01) card and PN-CC01 (ETHER) card cannot be mounted in NEAX 2000 IPS.

Application Processor Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-AP00-B DBM Data Base Module Card for WCS Roaming function
[For PCS] One card per system.
Supports number extension of PS.
[Series 3400 software required]
PN-AP00-B AP00 Application Processor Card
Provides four RS-232C ports, and is used for SMDR, Hotel
Printer, CIS, PMS, MCI functions.
(For PMS function, PN-AP00-B with MRCA program is not
available.)
One card per system.
PN-AP00-D AP00 Application Processor Card
Provides four RS-232C ports, and is used for SMDR, Hotel
Printer, CIS, MCI functions.
One card per system.
PN-BRTA BRT 1-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card
Accommodates one 2-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-2BRTC BRT 2-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card
Accommodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-2BRTK BRT 2-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card
[For UK] Accommodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-4BRTA-A BRT 4-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card
Accommodates four 2-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-24CCTA CCT CCIS (1.5 Mbps) Trunk Card
Provides a built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH) of No.7
CCIS.
Continued on next page

– 23 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-30CCTA CCT CCIS (2 Mbps) Trunk Card
Provides a built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH) of No.7
CCIS.
PN-CFTC CFT 32 Party Conference Trunk Card
Maximum eight cards per system.
PN-CFTC-A CFT 8/32 Party Conference Trunk Card
Maximum eight cards per system.
PN-DAIA-A DAIA T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM
Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firm-
ware Processor and BUS interface.
One through six cards must be provided at Main Site, which corre-
sponds to the number of Remote Site.
PN-DAIB DAIB T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM
Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firm-
ware Processor.
One card is required per Remote PIM at Remote Site.
PN-DAIC DAIC T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Channel Expansion Card
Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.
One through twelve cards can be provided at Main Site.
Two cards can be provided at Remote Site.
PN-DAID-A DAID E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM
Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firm-
ware Processor and BUS interface.
One through six cards must be provided at Main Site, which corre-
sponds to the number of Remote Site.
PN-DAIE DAIE E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM
Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firm-
ware Processor.
One card is required per Remote PIM at Remote Site.
Continued on next page

– 24 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-DAIF DAIF E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Channel Expansion Card
Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines.
One through six cards can be provided at Main Site.
One card can be provided at Remote Site.
PN-DTA CCH Common Channel Handler for Event Based CCIS
Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
Event Based CCIS.
PN-DTA CCT CCIS (1.5 Mbps/2 Mbps) Trunk Card
Provides a built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH) of No.7
CCIS.
PN-DTA DTI T1 (1.5 Mbps)/E1 (2 Mbps) Digital Trunk Interface Card
Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-DTA PRT ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D/30B+D) Interface Card
Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).
PN-DTB CCH Common Channel Handler for Event Based CCIS
Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
Event Based CCIS.
PN-DTB CCT CCIS (1.5 Mbps/2 Mbps) Trunk Card
Provides a built-in Common Channel Handler (CCH) of No.7
CCIS.
PN-DTB DTI T1 (1.5 Mbps)/E1 (2 Mbps) Digital Trunk Interface Card
Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-DTB PRT ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D/30B+D) Interface Card
Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).
PN-24DTA-C DTI T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card
Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-30DTC-C DTI E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card
Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines.
Continued on next page

– 25 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-8ETIA HUB In-Skin HUB Card
PN-8ETIA: Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic change
MDI/MDI-X automatic change
L2 Switch function (Auto-Negotiation fixed)
PZ-M675: PZ-M675 card is mounted on PN-8ETIA card.
Power over Ethernet (PoE) : All Ethernet port
NOTE: Power over Ethernet (PoE) function is based on IEEE
802.3af and the NEC standard.
PN-2ILCC ILC 2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card
Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
This card does not require PN-SC03-B (ICH) card.
PN-8IPTA SIP 8 channel SIP Trunk Card
When mounting 24DSP (PZ-24IPLA) card, this card provides up
to 32-channel of SIP
By the office data setting, changes the setting of the card in 8
channel units.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly
to this card.
Provides Auto Negotiation function. NOTE
• Always set to OFF
• Set to ON/OFF by the switch setting
[Series 3600 software required]

NOTE: When using the firmware program of SC-3591 IPS IPTT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPTA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firm-
ware program of SC-3249 IPS IPTT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPTA card, Auto Negotiation func-
tion is always set to ON.
Continued on next page

– 26 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-IPTB IPT IP Trunk Card
Provides LAN Interface, transmitting/receiving compressed voice
or signals over IP network.
Provides Auto Negotiation function (Set to ON/OFF by the switch
setting).
Used together with maximum of four 4VCT (PN-4VCTI) cards
(16-channels).
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly
to this card.
PN-24PRTA PRT ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D) Interface Card
Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).
PN-30PRTA PRT ISDN Primary Rate (30B+D) Interface Card
Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).
PN-4RSTB MFR 4-line MF Receiver, MFC Receiver/Sender Card
Used for MF/MFC-R2 Signaling on DID/DOD trunks.
Maximum four cards can be provided per system, including the
PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A card.
PN-4RSTC CIR 4-line Caller ID Receiver Trunk Card
Used for Caller ID (CLASS SM) on analog trunks.
Maximum four cards per system, including the PN-4RSTB card.
PN-4RSTC-A CIR 4-line Caller ID Receiver Trunk Card
Used for Caller ID (CLASS SM) on analog trunks.
Maximum four cards per system, including the PN-4RSTB card.
PN-SC00 CCH Common Channel Handler Card
Transmits/receives signals on the common signaling channel of
No. 7 CCIS.
PN-SC01 DCH D-channel Handler Card
Transmits/receives signals on the D-channel of ISDN Primary
Rate (23B+D) interface or WCS Roaming interface.
PN-SC03-B ICH ISDN-channel Handler Card
Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls maximum
four ILC cards (Layer 2 and 3).
Continued on next page

– 27 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-SC03-B CSH CS (ZT) Handler Card for S-interface/U-interface
Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls maximum
four CSI cards, eight CS (ZT)s.
Supports number extension of PS.
[Series 3400 software required]
PN-SC03-C CSH CS (ZT) Handler Card for S-interface/U-interface
Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls maximum
four CSI cards, eight CS (ZT)s.
Supports number extension of PS.
PZ-M537 EXPMEM Memory Expansion Card for AP00 Card
The system capacity is expanded when PZ-M537 is mounted on
PN-AP00-B (AP00) card.
This card is not required for PN-AP00-D (AP00) card.
Memory Expansion for AP00 is shown in the table below.
PZ-M542 CONN Coaxial Cable Connection Card
Used to connect a coaxial cable for the Digital Trunk Interface.
Maximum two cards can be connected to LTC connector of each
PIM.
PZ-M557 CONN Coaxial Cable Connection Card
[For Used to connect a coaxial cable for the Digital Trunk Interface.
Australia] Maximum two cards can be connected to LTC connector of each
PIM.

– 28 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Memory Expansion for AP00 (SMDR Call Record)

No EXPMEM With EXPMEM

Local Office of Local Office of
Center Office Center Office
Type of Centralized Centralized
of Centralized of Centralized
PN-AP00-B Billing-CCIS Billing-CCIS
Billing-CCIS is Billing-CCIS is
/Stand-alone is /Stand-alone is
provided. provided.
provided. provided.
PN-AP00-B 1600 800 27000: Call Record for CIS is not pro-
with AP00 vided.
program 26000: Call Record for CIS is provided.
PN-AP00-B 2620 1965 23580 22925
with MRCA
program
PN-AP00-D 23580 22925
with MRCA
program

– 29 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card
This table shows the names and functions of each line/trunk card.

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-2AMPA AMP 2-line Amplifier Trunk Card
Provides Echo Canceller (EC), Automatic Gain Controller (AGC)
and Tone Disabler (TD) functions.
PN-CFTA CFT 6/10 Party Conference Trunk Card
Use of one card: Can control a conference of up to six partici-
pants.
Use of two cards: Can control a conference of up to ten partici-
pants.
PN-CFTB CFT 6/10 Party Conference Trunk Card
Use of one card: Can control a conference of up to six partici-
pants.
Use of two cards: Can control a conference of up to ten partici-
pants.
PN-2COTD COT 2-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
Provides metering pulse detection function.
PN-2COTE COT 2-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
[For Provides metering pulse detection function.
Australia/
Asia/
Middle East]
PN-4COTA-A COT 4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
PN-4COTB COT 4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start/Ground Start Trunk)
Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on Tip/Ring
wire.
PN-4COTE COT 4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
[For Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
Australia]
Continued on next page

– 30 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-4COTF COT 4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start/Ground Start Trunk)
[For Provides loop holding, pulse sender, and a detector for groundsig-
New Zealand] nals.
PN-4COTG COT 4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start trunk)
Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller ID (CLASS
SM) signal.
µ-law/A-law.
PN-6COTJ COT 6-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
[For Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
Australia]
PN-8COTH COT 8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
[For Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
Philippine] Loop resistance: Maximum 900 Ω
PN-8COTQ COT 8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller ID (CLASS
SM) signal.
µ-law only.
PN-8COTR COT 8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
PN-8COTS COT 8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start/Ground Start Trunk)
Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on Tip/Ring
wire.
PN-8COTT COT 8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
[For Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
Australia]
PN-8COTU COT 8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
[For UK/EU] Provides loop detection.
PN-2CSIA CSI 2-line Zone Transceiver Interface Card
[For PCS] Used to interface with the ZT, based on ISDN S-interface.
Maximum two ZTs can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
Continued on next page

– 31 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-2CSIA-A CSI 2-line Cell Station Interface Card
[For PHS] Used to interface with the CS, based on ISDN S-interface.
Maximum two CSs can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
PN-2CSIH CSI 2-line Cell Station (Zone Transceiver) Interface Card
Used to interface with the CS (ZT), based on U-interface.
Maximum two CSs (ZTs) can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
PN-4CSIA CSI 4-line Cell Station Interface Card
[For PHS] Used to interface with the CS, based on U-interface.
Maximum four CSs can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 16 time slots per one card.
PN-4CSIA-A CSI 4-line Zone Transceiver Interface Card
[For PCS] Used to interface with the ZT, based on U-interface.
Maximum four ZTs can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 16 time slots per one card.
PN-4DATC DAT 4-line Digital Announcement Trunk Card
Recording duration: Maximum 120 seconds
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
PN-4DIDA DIT 4-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card
[For North Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to DP sig-
America/ nal conversion.
Australia/ Equipped with –48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
New Zealand/
Asia]
PN-2DITA DIT 2-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card
[For Hong Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to DP sig-
Kong] nal conversion.
Equipped with –48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4DITB DIT 4-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card
Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to DP sig-
nal conversion.
Equipped with –48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
Continued on next page

– 32 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-DK00 DK 8-circuit External Relay Control/External Key Scan Card
Provides the above-mentioned control functions on a per circuit
basis.
PN-2DLCN DLC 2-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65
(Series E/III), Dterm Series i/70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Con-
sole, ATTCON, DESKCON
[–48 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.
Equipped with –48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4DLCM DLC 4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65 (Series E/
III), Dterm Series i/70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console,
ATTCON, DESKCON
[–27 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.
PN-4DLCT DLC 4-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65
(Series E/III), Dterm Series i, DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
NOTE
[–48 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.
PZ-PW122 is required.
PN-4DLCQ DLC 4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65 (Series E/
III), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[–27 V version, 2-wire type]
Provides Line Test function.
PN-8DLCL DLC 8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65 (Series E/
III), Dterm Series i/70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console,
ATTCON, DESKCON
[–27 V version, 2-wire type]

NOTE: PN-4DLCT card is not used fot Dterm 70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro).
Continued on next page

– 33 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-8DLCP DLC 8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/75/65 (Series E/
III), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[–27 V version, 2-wire type]
PN-2ILCA ILC 2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card
Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
PN-8IPLA IP-PAD 8-channel IP-PAD Card
Provides LAN Interface, Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommo-
date Legacy Line/Trunk interface. And provides voice compression
DSP control functions such as voice compression control, DTMF relay
and FAX relay.
• Voice compression protocols:
G.711 (64 Kbps), G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps), G.729a
(8 Kbps) NOTE 1
• FAX protocol: Pass-through (G.711, G.726)
Provides Auto Negotiation function. NOTE 2
• Always set to ON
• Set to ON/OFF by the switch setting
When mounting 24DSP (PZ-24IPLA) card, this card provides up to 32-
channel of IP-PAD (When using G.723.1, provides up to 24-channel of
IP-PAD).
Two cards can be accommodated per built-in FP/FP card, maximum 8
per system.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to
this card.

NOTE 1: When using G.723.1, 5.3Kbps is available for the receiving bit rate.
NOTE 2: When using the firmware program of SC-3330 IPS IPADT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPLA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firm-
ware program of SC-3213 IPS IPADT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPLA card, Auto Negotiation
function is always set to ON.
Continued on next page

– 34 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-32IPLA/ IP-PAD 32-channel IP-PAD Card
PN-32IPLA-A Provides LAN Interface, Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accom-
modate Legacy Line/Trunk interface.
Provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice
compression control, DTMF relay and FAX relay.
• Voice compression protocol: G.711 (64Kbps)
• FAX protocol: Pass-through (G.711) NOTE
Used together with maximum two 16VCT cards.
Provides Auto Negotiation function (Set to ON/OFF by the switch
setting).
Two cards can be accommodated per built-in FP/FP card, maxi-
mum 8 per system.
100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card.
PN-4LCC LC 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Line Test function.
PN-4LCD-A LC 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides momentary open and Message Waiting Lamp control,
Line Test functions for each circuit.
Equipped with +80 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4LCE LC 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
[For Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Australia] Provides Line Test function.
PN-4LCF LC 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
[For Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Australia] Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, Line Test functions for
each circuit, and reverse function for only No.3 circuit.
Equipped with +80 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4LCK LC 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
[For China] Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Line Test function.

NOTE: IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA) card does not support FAX relay.

Continued on next page

– 35 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-4LCL LC 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
[For China] Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, Line Test functions for
each circuit, and reverse function for only No.3 circuit.
Equipped with +80 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4LCV LC 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
[For Brazil] Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Line Test function.
PN-4LCW LC 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
[For Brazil] Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, Line Test functions for
each circuit, and reverse function for only No.3 circuit.
Equipped with +80 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-8LCAA LC 8-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open, Line
Test functions for each circuit.
PN-8LCAB LC 8-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
[For China] Loop resistance : Maximum 1200 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open, Line
Test functions for each circuit.
PN-8LCAD LC 8-line Analog Line Circuit for Single Line Telephones Provides
Caller ID Display on analog station.
Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open for
each circuit.
PN-8LCAE LC 8-line Analog Line Circuit for Single Line Telephones Provides
[For China] Caller ID Display on analog station.
Loop resistance : Maximum 1000 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open for
each circuit.
PN-8LCAF LC 8-line Analog Line Circuit for Single Line Telephones Provides
[For EU] Caller ID Display on analog station.
Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open for
each circuit.
[Series 3800 software or later required]
Continued on next page

– 36 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JANUARY/26/2007
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-8LCAK LC 8-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open, Line
Test functions for each circuit.
[Series 3800 software (ver.3.0) or later required]
PN-2LDTA LDT 2-line Loop Dial Trunk Card
Loop resistance : Maximum 2500 Ω (including internal resistance
of the distant office equipment)
Equipped with –48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4LDTA LDT 4-line Loop Dial Trunk Card
Loop resistance : Maximum 3000 Ω (including internal resistance
of the distant office equipment)
PZ-PW122 is required.
PN-4LLCB LLC 4-line Analog Long Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Provides Caller ID Display on analog station.
Loop resistance for PB/DP type:
PB : Maximum 1200 Ω
DP (20 PPS) : Maximum 1700 Ω
DP (10 PPS) : Maximum 2500 Ω
Including the internal resistance of the distant office equipment
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open/
reverse functions for each circuit.
PZ-PW122 is required.
PN-M10 M10 Optical Fiber Interface Card
Provides optical fiber interface for T1/E1 Digital Trunk Interface
(1.5 M/2 Mbps) or Remote PIM.
Line length : 10 km (6.2 miles) or less
Line coding : CMI
PN-M13 M13 24-line Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) Splitter Card
Used to provide data communications for HomePNA (Phoneline Net-
work Alliance)/VDSL (Very-high-data-rate Digital Subscriber Line).
PN-2ODTA ODT 2-line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card
Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk.
Equipped with –48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose (2-
wire or 4-wire) in one card.
Continued on next page

– 37 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JANUARY/26/2007
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PN-2ODTB ODT 2-line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card
[For Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk.
New Zealand/ Equipped with –48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
UK/EU] Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose
(2-wire or 4-wire) in one card.
PN-4ODTA ODT 4-Line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card
Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk.
–48 V DC power (PZ-PW122 card) is required when using the sig-
naling type I.
When it accommodates in the LT08 to LT11 slots of the PIM, connect speech
line circuits 2 and 3 with the CN1 connector on the front side of the card.
PN-4RSTF SDT 4-line Sender Card for Caller ID Display on analog Single Line
[For North Telephones
America/ PN-4LLCB is required.
Asia exclud-
ing China]
PN-4RSTF-A SDT 4-line Sender Card for Caller ID Display on analog Single Line
[For North Telephones
America/ PN-4LLCB is required.
Asia includ-
ing China]
PN-4RSTH SDT 4-line Sender Card for Caller ID Display on analog Single Line
[For Europe] Telephones
PN-8LCAD is required.
PN-8RSTG PBR 8-line PB Receiver Card
Used for a PB station line, DID or tie line.
PN-RTA RTA In-Skin Router Card
10/100BASE-TX: 1, 10BASE-T: 1, RS-232C (D-sub 9pin)
Maximum 8 cards per PIM
PZ-M649 DTI T1 Digital Trunk Interface (1.5 Mbps) Card
Mounted on PN-RTA Card
T1 Digital Trunk Interface: 1
Built-in CSU
Continued on next page

– 38 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PZ-M650 DTI E1 Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card
Mounted on PN-RTA Card.
E1 Digital Trunk Interface: 1
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card.
PZ-M623 ETHER Ether Control Card
Mounted on PN-RTA Card
10BASE-T: 1
PN-TNTA TNT 2-line Tone/Music Source Interface Card
Used for BGM or Music on Hold.
Provides two jacks for an external tone/music source.
PN-4VCTI 4VCT 4-channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk Card
Provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice
compression control, DTMF relay and FAX relay. NOTE 1
• Voice compression protocols:
G.711 (64 Kbps), G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps), G.729a
(8 Kbps)
• FAX protocol: T.30
Used together with IP Trunk (PN-IPTB) card.
Four cards can be accommodated per IP Trunk (PN-IPTB) card,
maximum 32 per system.
PN-16VCTA/ 16VCT 16-channel CODEC Card for 32-channel IP-PAD Card
PN-16VCTA-A Provides voice compression DSP control functions such as voice
compression control, DTMF relay and FAX relay.
• Voice compression protocols:
G.711 (64 Kbps), G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps), G.729a
(8 Kbps) NOTE 2
• FAX protocol: T.30, Pass-through (G.711, G.726) NOTE 3
Used together with IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A) card.
Two cards can be accommodated per IP-PAD (PN-32IPLA/PN-
32IPLA-A) card, maximum 16 per system.

NOTE 1: When using 4VCT card for H.323, FAX relay is not available.
NOTE 2: When using G.723.1, 5.3 Kbps is available for the receiving bit rate.
NOTE 3: 16VCT (PN-16VCTA) card does not support FAX relay.
Continued on next page

– 39 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PZ-24IPLA 24DSP 24-channel DSP Card for 8-channel IP-PAD Card
Provides Packet Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy
Line/Trunk Interface. And Provides voice compression DSP control
functions such as voice compression control, DTMF relay same as
IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card.
Used to expand the IP-PAD channel up to 32-channels.
PZ-8PFTB PFT 8-line Power Failure Transfer Card
To be mounted in PFT slot of PIM.
One card per PIM.
PZ-VM00/ VM00 4-port Voice Mail Card (NEAXMail AD-8)
PZ-VM00-M One card per system.
Number of ports : 4 ports (Up to 8 ports when PZ-VM01 is
mounted)
Occupies three physical slots width per card.
To be mounted in LT00 slot of PIM.
PZ-VM10-M VM10 4-port Voice Mail Card (NEAXMail AD-8)
One card per system.
Number of ports : 4 ports (Up to 8 ports when PZ-VM01 is
mounted)
Occupies three physical slots width per card.
To be mounted in LT00 slot of PIM.
PZ-VM01 VM01 4-port Voice Mail Extension Card
To be mounted on PZ-VM00/VM00-M.
PZ-VM02 VM02 This card consists of a digital signal processor for port interface
[For North (4 ports), central processor unit for controlling various data, hard
America/Aus- disk unit to read/write the application software, and an internal
tralia] modem (14.4 Kbps) for remote maintenance. Moreover, mounted
into the LT00 slot (for CPU card) of the PIM0. One card per PBX
is available.
Continued on next page

– 40 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function

EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
FUNCTION
NAME NAME
PZ-VM03-M VM03 This card consists of a digital signal processor for port interface
[For North (4 ports), central processor unit for controlling various data, hard
America] disk unit to read/write the voice mail application program and
voice mail information, and an internal modem (14.4 Kbps) for
remote maintenance. Moreover, this card can provide 16 ports
digital line circuit interface, and is mounted into the LT00 slot
(for CPU card) and LT01 slot (for DSP card) of the PIM0. One
card per PBX is available.
PZ-VM04 VM04 This card provides additional 4 ports for transmitting/receiving
[For North the voice information, and is used for expanding the port interface
America] up to 12 ports. It is mounted on the VM03 card.
PZ-VM05 VM05 This card provides additional 4 ports for transmitting/receiving
[For North the voice information, and is used for expanding the port interface
America] up to 8/16 ports. Moreover, this card is used for expanding the fax
port interface up to 4 ports. It is mounted on the VM03/VM04
card.
PZ-VM06 VM06 This card provides additional 4 ports for transmitting/receiving
[For North the voice information, and is used for expanding the port interface
America] up to 8/16 ports. It is mounted on the VM03/VM04 card.

– 41 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

The cable length between the DLC card and terminal varies depending on the type of terminal.
This table shows the line conditions of each Dterm, DSS/BLF Console, and Attendant Console.

Line Conditions of Each Terminal

CABLE LENGTH
TERMINAL TYPE CARD TYPE REMARKS
(Cable 0.5 φ/24 AWG)
Dterm Series i PN-8DLCL/8DLCP 300 m (984 ft.) NOTE 2
(8 button)/ (STANDARD)
Dterm Series i PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ 300 m (984 ft.)
(16 button)/ (STANDARD) [1200 m (3937 ft.)]
Dterm75 (Series E) PN-2DLCN/4DLCT 850 m (2788 ft.)
(8 button) (LONG) [1200 m (3937 ft.)]
Dterm Series i PN-8DLCL/8DLCP 200 m (656 ft.) NOTE 2
(32 button)/ (STANDARD)
Dterm75 (Series E) PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ 200 m (656 ft.)
(16 button)/ (STANDARD) [1200 m (3937 ft.)]
Dterm75 (Series E) PN-2DLCN/4DLCT 850 m (2788 ft.)
(32 button) (LONG) [1200 m (3937 ft.)]
Continued on next page

– 42 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

Line Conditions of Each Terminal

CABLE LENGTH
TERMINAL TYPE CARD TYPE REMARKS
(Cable 0.5 φ/24 AWG)
Dterm65 (Series III) PN-8DLCL/8DLCP 300 m (984 ft.) NOTE 2
(8 button) (STANDARD)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ 300 m (984 ft.)
(STANDARD) [1200 m (3937 ft.)]
PN-2DLCN/4DLCT 850 m (2788 ft.)
(LONG) [1200 m (3937 ft.)]
Dterm65 (Series III) PN-8DLCL/8DLCP 150 m (492 ft.) NOTE 2
(24 button) (STANDARD)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ 150 m (492 ft.)
(STANDARD) [1200 m (3937 ft.)]
PN-2DLCN/4DLCT 850 m (2788 ft.)
(LONG) [1200 m (3937 ft.)]
DSS/BLF Console PN-8DLCL/8DLCP 300 m (984 ft.) NOTE 2
NOTE 3 (STANDARD)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ 1200 m (3937 ft.)
(STANDARD)
PN-2DLCN/4DLCT 1200 m (3937 ft.)
(LONG)

NOTE 1: The value in the [ ] shows the cable length when local power is supplied.
NOTE 2: When using PN-8DLCL or PN-8DLCP card, it is not available for long line function, even if it
is equipped with Long Line Adapter.
NOTE 3: The DSS/BLF Console requires local AC/DC power supply.
Continued on next page

– 43 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

Line Conditions of Each Terminal

CABLE LENGTH
TERMINAL TYPE CARD TYPE REMARKS
(Cable 0.5 φ/24 AWG)
SN708/709/712/741 PN-8DLCL/8DLCP 150 m (492 ft.)
ATTCON (STANDARD)
(2-wire type ATTCON) PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ 150 m (492 ft.)
(STANDARD)
PN-2DLCN/4DLCT 600 m (1968 ft.)
(LONG)
SN716 DESKCON PN-8DLCL/8DLCP and 300 m (984 ft.)
PN-PW00 or
AC Adapter
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ 350 m (1148 ft.)
and
PN-PW00
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ 1200 m (3937 ft.)
and
AC Adapter

– 44 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

This section explains the conditions for mounting circuit cards used in the system.

Circuit Card Mounting Slots

(1) Regular PIM

Circuit Card Mounting Slots

LT11/AP11
LT01/AP01

LT02/AP02

LT03/AP03

LT04/AP04

LT05/AP05

LT06/AP06

LT07/AP07

LT08/AP08

LT09/AP09

LT10/AP10

MP12/FP12

PFT
VM

LT00/AP00

AC/DC
PIM PWR
0-7 *3
*2 *1

LTC1 LTC3
LTC0 LTC2

BWB
DC/DC
PWR

FRONT

LT00-LT11 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots VM : PZ-VM00/VM00-M/VM03-M/VM10-M mounting slot

AP00-AP11 : Application Processor card PFT : PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
mounting slots AC/DC PWR : PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot
MP12 : PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D When using the A361 PIM-DC (PIM for –48 V
mounting slot DC power supply system), this slot is used for
FP12 : PN-CP15 mounting slot DC/DC PWR (PZ-PW135 mounting slot).
DC/DC PWR : PZ-PW122 mounting slot
When using the A361 PIM-DC (PIM for –48 V
DC power supply system), this slot is not used.

*1 PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D (MP) card is to be mounted in the MP12 slot of PIM0.

PZ-M606-A (ETHER) card is to be mounted on the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D (MP)
card.
PN-CP15 (FP) card is to be mounted in the FP12 slot of PIM2, 4, 6 according to the system con-
figuration.

– 45 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

Continued on next page

*2 Either line/trunk cards or application processor cards can be mounted in the LT00/AP00-LT11/
AP11 slots of PIM0-7.
For mounting condition of PN-RTA (RTA), refer to the “In-Skin Router Installation Guide”.
*3 When using PIM for –48 V DC power supply system, the AC/DC PWR slot is used for the DC/DC
PWR slot. And the DC/DC PWR slot is not used. The other slots can accommodate the same cards
as a usual PIM.

(2) PIM for Backup CPU System

Circuit Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)

MP01
LT01/AP01

LT02/AP02

LT03/AP03

LT04/AP04

LT05/AP05

LT06/AP06

LT07/AP07

LT08/AP08

LT09/AP09

LT10/AP10

MP00

PFT
VM

LT00/AP00

AC/DC
PIM PWR
(For
Backup
CPU) *2 *1

LTC1 LTC3
LTC0 LTC2

BWB
DC/DC
PWR

FRONT

LT00-LT10 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots VM : PZ-VM00/VM00-M/VM03-M/VM10-M

AP00-AP10 : Application Processor card mounting slot
mounting slots PFT : PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
MP00/MP01 : PN-CP27-A /CP27-B mounting slots AC/DC PWR : PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot
DC/DC PWR : PZ-PW122 mounting slot

*1 PN-CP27-A/CP27-B (MP1) card is to be mounted in the MP01 slot.

*2 PN-CP27-A/CP27-B (MP0) card is to be mounted in the MP00 slot.
*3 Either line/trunk cards or application processor cards can be mounted in the LT00/AP00-LT10/
AP10 slots.
For mounting condition of PN-RTA (RTA), refer to the “In-Skin Router Installation Guide”.

– 46 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

Mountable Slots According to Number of Ports

The PIM can mount 8-port or 16-port circuit cards.

Available slots are defined by the number of ports of the circuit card.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12

V P
M F
T

8-port or 16-port circuit cards are mountable See below.*

4-port circuit cards are mountable

* In slot 08-11, 8-port circuit cards are not mountable. The number of physical ports which can be
provided by slot 08-11 depends on the number of ports of the circuit cards mounted in slot 04-07.

MOUNTING CIRCUIT
MOUNTABLE CIRCUIT CARDS IN SLOT08-11 NOTE 1
CARDS IN SLOT04-07
8-port circuit cards such as; Any application processor cards
PN-8COT, PN-8DLC,
PN-8LC, PN-4DAT,
PN-CFTB, PN-2CSI
16-port circuit card;
PN-4CSI
4-port circuit cards NOTE 2 4-port line/trunk cards or any application processor cards

NOTE 1: For Backup CPU system, the circuit cards are mounted in slot 08 to 10.
NOTE 2: When PN-4LLCB (LLC) is used for controlling message waiting lamp, the card is to be mounted
in the LT00-LT07 (When PN-4LLCB is not used for controlling message waiting lamp, the card
can be mounted in the LT00-LT11.).

– 47 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

Control Card Mounting Conditions

(1) Single CPU System

• PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)
Mount the PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D card in the MP slot (slot 12) of PIM0.

• PN-CP15 (FP)
When the system is configured with three PIMs or more, mount one PN-CP15 card in the FP slot
(slot 12) of PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
When the system is configured with one or two PIMs, the PN-CP15 card needs not to be mounted.

MP/FP Card Mounting Slots

PIM3 PIM7

F F
PIM2 PIM6
P P
12 12

PIM1 PIM5

M F
PIM0 P P PIM4
12 12

– 48 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(2) Backup CPU System

• PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)
Mount the PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B cards in the MP00 slot (slot 12) and MP01 slot (slot 11) of PIM0
for Backup CPU system.

• PN-CP15 (FP)
When the system is configured with three PIMs or more, mount one PN-CP15 card in the FP slot
(slot 12) of PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
When the system is configured with one or two PIMs, the PN-CP15 card needs not to be mounted.

MP/FP Card Mounting Slots

PIM3 PIM7

F F
PIM2 PIM6
P P
12 12

PIM1 PIM5

PIM0
M M F
for
P P P PIM4
Backup
01 00 12
CPU

– 49 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions

(1) System Capacity for Application Processor Card

Maximum 24 cards per system
Maximum 256 ports per system

(2) Mounting Application Processor Cards in PIM0-7

Use slots AP00 to AP11 to mount application processor cards in PIM0 through 7.

Application Processor Card Mounting Slots

AP01

AP02

AP03

AP04

AP05

AP06

AP07

AP08

AP09

AP10

AP11

MP12/FP12

PFT
VM

AP00

AC/DC
PWR
PIM
0-7
*

LTC1 LTC3
LTC0 LTC2

BWB
DC/DC
PWR

FRONT

* Application processor cards can be mounted in AP00 to AP11 slots.

NOTE: Refer to the “IP System Manual” for the mounting condition of PN-24PRTA/PN-30PRTA/PN-
DTA/PN-DTB/PN-4RSTC-A card when building Remote PIM over IP.

– 50 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(3) Mounting Application Processor Cards in PIM0 for Backup CPU System
Use slots AP00 to AP10 to mount application processor cards in PIM0.

Application Processor Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)

AP01

AP02

AP03

AP04

AP05

AP06

AP07

AP08

AP09

AP10

MP01

MP00

PFT
VM

AP00

AC/DC
PIM0
PWR
(For
Backup
CPU) *1

LTC1 LTC3
LTC0 LTC2

BWB
DC/DC
PWR

FRONT

* Application processor cards can be mounted in AP00 to AP10 slots.

NOTE: Refer to the “IP System Manual” for the mounting condition of PN-24PRTA/PN-30PRTA/PN-
DTA/PN-DTB/PN-4RSTC-A card when building Remote PIM over IP.

– 51 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(4) Mounting Conditions of Each Card

CARD NAME MOUNTING CONDITIONS

PN-PW00 No circuit card can be mounted in the adjoining left side slot because
one card occupies two physical slots width.
PN-BRTA Mount at least one card in PIM0 to receive source clock signals.
PN-2BRTC
PN-2BRTK
PN-4BRTA-A
PN-24CCTA
PN-30CCTA
PN-24DTA-C
PN-30DTC-C
PN-24PRTA
PN-30PRTA
PN-DTA
PN-DTB
PZ-M542 Mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card into any LTC connector of PIM
PZ-M557 BWB.
Maximum of two cards can be mounted per PIM as follows:
LTC0 and LTC2
LTC0 and LTC3
LTC1 and LTC3
PN-4BRTA-A Maximum of six cards can be mounted per PIM, maximum of 24 cards
per system. For the same number of slots as PN-4BRTA-A cards, only
line/trunk cards can be mounted in any slot of LT00-LT11 slots of each
PIM.
PN-8ETIA No circuit card can be mounted in the adjoining left side slot because
[For North America/ one card occupies two physical slots width.
Australia]

– 52 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/15/2007
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions

(1) System Capacity for Line/Trunk Card

Maximum 128 ports per FP
Maximum 512 ports per system

(2) Mounting Line/Trunk Cards in PIM0-7

Use slots LT00 to LT11 to mount line/trunk cards in PIM0 through 7.

Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots

LT01

LT02

LT03

LT04

LT05

LT06

LT07

LT08

LT09

LT10

LT11

MP12/FP12

PFT
VM

LT00

AC/DC
PWR
PIM
0-7
*1
*2
LTC1 LTC3
LTC0 LTC2

BWB
DC/DC
PWR

FRONT

*1 8-port or 16-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT07 slots.

*2 4-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT11 slots.

– 53 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(3) Mounting Line/Trunk Cards in PIM0 for Backup CPU System

Use slots LT00 to LT10 to mount line/trunk cards in PIM0.

Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots (Backup CPU)

LT01

LT02

LT03

LT04

LT05

LT06

LT07

LT08

LT09

LT10

MP01

MP00

PFT
VM

LT00

PIM0 AC/DC
(For PWR
Backup
CPU)
*1
*2
LTC1 LTC3
LTC0 LTC2

BWB
DC/DC
PWR

FRONT

*1 8-port or 16-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT07 slots.

*2 4-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT10 slots.

– 54 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(4) Mounting Conditions of Each Card

CARD NAME MOUNTING CONDITIONS

PN-32IPLA PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card is to be mounted in the
PN-32IPLA-A LT01 and/or LT05 slots of PIM0-7.
PN-16VCTA PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT) card is to be mounted in the
PN-16VCTA-A LT02, LT03 and/or LT06, LT07 slots of PIM0-7, next to the PN-
[For Series 3200 R6.2/R7 32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card. However, PN-16VCTA and
or earlier] PN-16VCTA-A cards cannot be used together in a system.
One IP-PAD card requires two physical slots and two vacant slots.
• When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT01 slot, the LT00 physi-
cal slot is required.
The LT02 and LT03 slots must be vacant except the 16VCT card or
application processor cards.
• When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT05 slot, the LT04 physi-
cal slot is required.
The LT06 and LT07 slots must be vacant except the 16VCT card or
application processor cards.
When mounting the 16VCT card, use the vacant slot for the IP-PAD
card.
• When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT01 slot, the first 16VCT
(VCT0) card is mounted in the LT02 and the second 16VCT
(VCT1) card is mounted in the LT03.
• When the IP-PAD card is mounted in the LT05 slot, the first 16VCT
(VCT0) card is mounted in the LT06 and the second 16VCT
(VCT1) card is mounted in the LT07.
Do not mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT11 slots when you
mount the IP-PAD and 16VCT cards in the LT05-LT07 slots.
Continued on next page

– 55 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

CARD NAME MOUNTING CONDITIONS

PN-32IPLA PN-32IPLA/PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD) card is to be mounted in the
PN-32IPLA-A LT01 and/or LT05 slots of PIM0-7.
PN-16VCTA • In the following cases, other L/T card and/or AP card can be
PN-16VCTA-A mounted in the adjoining left side slot of IP-PAD card.
[For Series 3300 or later]
×: ALLOWED -: NOT ALLOWED
IP-PAD
CARD OTHER LINE/TRUNK APPLICATION PROCESSOR
16VCT
CARDS CARDS
CARD
CHANNEL SLOT
LT02 LT03 LT06 LT07 LT02 LT03 LT06 LT07
NO. NO.
LT01 × × × ×
16 CH NONE
LT05 × × × ×
LT01 - × × ×
24 CH NONE
LT05 - × × ×
LT01 - - × ×
32 CH NONE
LT05 - - × ×
LT01 ONE - × - ×
16 CH
LT05 CARD - × - ×
24/32 LT01 TWO - - - -
CH LT05 CARDS - - - -

• In the following cases, according as number of channels, do not

mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT11 slots when you mount
the IP-PAD card in the LT05 slot.

×: ALLOWED -: NOT ALLOWED

IP-PAD
CARD OTHER LINE/TRUNK APPLICATION PROCESSOR
CARDS CARDS
CHANNEL SLOT LT11 LT11
LT08 LT09 LT10 LT08 LT09 LT10
NO. NO. NOTE NOTE
16 CH - - × × × × × ×
24 CH LT05 - - - × × × × ×
32 CH - - - - × × × ×

NOTE: For Backup CPU system, do not mount in the LT08-LT10

slots.
Continued on next page

– 56 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

CARD NAME MOUNTING CONDITIONS

PN-8IPLA PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card is to be mounted in the LT00 and/or LT04
slots of PIM0-7.
• In the following cases, other L/T card and/or AP card can be
mounted in the adjoining left side slot of IP-PAD card.

×: ALLOWED -: NOT ALLOWED

IP-PAD 24DSP
CARD CARD OTHER LINE/TRUNK APPLICATION PROCESSOR
CARDS CARDS
CHANNEL SLOT CHANNEL LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT LT
NO. NO. NO. 01 02 03 05 06 07 01 02 03 05 06 07
LT00 × × × × × ×
8 CH NONE
LT04 × × × × × ×
LT00 - × × × × ×
16 CH 8 CH
LT04 - × × × × ×
LT00 - - × × × ×
24 CH 16 CH
LT04 - - × × × ×
LT00 - - - × × ×
32 CH 24 CH
LT04 - - - × × ×

• In the following cases, according as number of channels, do not

mount any other L/T cards in the LT08-LT11 slots when you mount
the IP-PAD card in the LT04 slot.

×: ALLOWED -: NOT ALLOWED

IP-PAD 24DSP
CARD CARD OTHER LINE/TRUNK APPLICATION PROCESSOR
CARDS CARDS
CHANNEL SLOT CHANNEL LT11 LT11
LT08 LT09 LT10 LT08 LT09 LT10
NO. NO. NO. NOTE NOTE
8 CH - × × × × × × ×
8 CH
16 CH - - × × × × × ×
LT04
24 CH 16 CH - - - × × × × ×
32 CH 24 CH - - - - × × × ×

NOTE: For Backup CPU system, do not mount in the LT08-LT10

slots.
Continued on next page

– 57 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

CARD NAME MOUNTING CONDITIONS

PN-4CSIA Maximum of four cards can be mounted per PIM, maximum of 32
PN-4CSIA-A cards per system. PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A card is to be mounted only
in the even number slot of LT00-LT07. When PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-
A card is mounted in the LT00, LT02, LT04, LT06 slots, only applica-
tion processor cards can be mounted in the LT01, LT03, LT05, LT07
slots which are the adjoining right side slots to the PN-4CSIA/PN-
4CSIA-A cards mounting slots. NOTE 1
PN-4LLCB When PN-4LLCB (LLC) is used for controlling message waiting
lamp, the card is to be mounted in the LT00-LT07 (When PN-4LLCB
is not used for controlling message waiting lamp, the card can be
mounted in the LT00-LT11.).
PN-4ODTA • When PN-4ODT card is mounted in the LT00-LT07 slots, allows all
speech lines to be accommodated from the BWB connector.
• When PN-4ODTA card is mounted in the LT08-LT11 slots, since
speech lines circuit 2 and 3 cannot be accommodated from the
BWB connector, connect with the CN1 connector on the front side
of the card.

NOTE 1: When mounting the PN-4CSIA-A card to the PIM that the PN-4LDTA or PN-4LLCB card is
mounted, the mountable number of cards are limited as shown below.

Number of Number of PN-4LDTA/

PN-4CSIA-A Card PN-4LLCB Card
0 12
1 9
2 6
3 3
4 0

– 58 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

NOTE 2: The maximum DC power output of PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) card is 1.7 A.
When LT card (PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A/PN-4DLCT/PN-4LDTA/PN-4LLCB/PN-4ODTA*
card) that require the PZ-PW122 card is mounted, the sum current from each card to terminals
should be set to less than 1.7 A.
PN-4CSIA/PN-4CSIA-A/PN-4DLCT/PN-4LDTA/PN-4LLCB/PN-4ODTA card should be
mounted in the same PIM which accommodates PZ-PW122.

The maximum
Accommodation
Current accommodation
Card conditions
(1 card) number of cards
(1 PIM)
(1 PIM)
(1) PN-4CSIA/ 400 mA 4
PN-4CSIA-A
(2) PN-4DLCT 180 mA 9 (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5) ≤
(3) PN-4LDTA 140 mA 12 1.7 A
(4) PN-4LLCB 140 mA 12
(5) PN-4ODTA* 500 mA 3
* When using the signaling type I.

– 59 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

– 60 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch1001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 2

INSTALLATION

This chapter explains how to install the PBX and the peripheral equipment,
system initialization and data entry, and operation test procedures you should
follow after completing the installation.

PRECAUTIONS ......................................................................... 62
PROCEDURE ............................................................................ 72
UNPACKING .............................................................................. 75
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS .............................. 76
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT .................................. 82
POWER CABLE CONNECTION ............................................... 111
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST .............. 121
BATTERY CONNECTION ......................................................... 129
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF ...................................................... 137
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF ..................................... 144
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT .................... 173
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS .................................................. 275
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ......................................................... 277
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY ............................................................ 278
OPERATION TEST .................................................................... 280
SYSTEM DATA SAVE ............................................................... 281
CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK ............................................ 281
MOUNTING FRONT COVER ..................................................... 282
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM ............................................................ 283

– 61 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS
Grounding Requirements
The system grounding must have a specific ground resistance and AC noise level, and is to be connected
to a predetermined terminal in the PBX. Standard grounding requirements are as shown below:

• Communication grounding: Less than 10 Ω

• Protective ground for PIM : Less than 10 Ω

NOTE: The AC ripple on these various grounds should be less than 1/2 Vp-p.

CAUTION
Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment.
Never operate this equipment with the grounding conductor disconnected.

The following specific requirements apply to ground wiring.

Install an equipment grounding conductor that is at least the same size as the ungrounded branch-
supply conductors as part of the circuit that supplies the PBX. The main grounding conductor shall
be green with one or more yellow stripes. Or the equipment grounding conductors shall have a
continuous outer finish that is green. The equipment grounding connector is to be connected to
ground at the service equipment. For details of wiring connections, see “WIRING POWER CABLE
TO TERMINALS”. Page 76

The attachment-plug receptacles near the PBX are all to be of a grounding type, and the equipment
grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service
equipment.

– 62 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
OCTOBER/19/2006
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Static Electricity Guard

You must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect circuit cards from static electricity.

Static Electricity Guard

• WHEN PLUGGING/UNPLUGGING A CIRCUIT CARD

PBX

FRAME GROUND SCREW

WRIST STRAP

• WHEN HOLDING A CIRCUIT CARD

NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR

SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.

CARD FRONT

Continued on next page

– 63 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Static Electricity Guard

• WHEN MAKING A SWITCH SETTING ON A CIRCUIT CARD

CIRCUIT
CARD

WEAR A WRIST STRAP AND PERFORM

THE WORK ON A GROUNDED
CONDUCTIVE WORK SURFACE.

• WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT CARD

CONDUCTIVE
CIRCUIT POLYETHYLENE
CARD BAG

WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT

CARD AROUND, KEEP THE
CARD IN A CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE BAG.

The mark shown below is attached to the sheet for the work in which circuit cards are handled. When
engaging in such work, the installer must be careful not to cause damage by static electricity.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

– 64 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards

CAUTION
• Turn ON the MB switch on the IP-PAD/IPT card before the following operations:
- Resetting the MP (MP built-in FP)/FP card controlling the IP-PAD/4VCT cards
- Inserting or extracting the 16VCT/4VCT cards during data transmission
- Plugging or unplugging the BUS cable (IPT TRK BUS CA) between the IP-PAD and 16VCT/
IPT and 4VCT cards
After the above operations, turn OFF the MB switch.
• Be sure to insert all of the 16VCT/4VCT cards firmly into their slots, which are connected to
the IP-PAD/IPT card by the BUS cable. Otherwise, the IP-PAD/IPT card connected to the
16VCT/4VCT card will not operate normally.

When removing a circuit card from the PIM or when mounting a circuit card in the PIM, follow the pro-
cedure given below.

– 65 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards

PROCEDURE
CIRCUIT CARD CONDITION
PLUG UNPLUG
• PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/ (1) Power off (1) Power off These circuit cards must be
PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP) plugged in or unplugged only with
• PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR) (2) Plug in (2) Unplug power off to prevent damage to the
• PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR) card or other system circuitry.
• PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) (3) Power on (3) Power on
• PZ-PW135 (PWR)
• PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
• PZ-M623 (M623)
• PZ-M649 (M649)
• PZ-PW650 (RTA)
• PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP) (1) Power off (1) Power off These circuit cards must be
• PN-CP15 (FP) or MB or MB plugged in or unplugged under
• PN-AP00-B (AP00/DBM) switch on switch on Make Busy condition or power off
• PN-AP00-D (AP00) to prevent damage to the card or
• PN-BRTA (BRT) (2) Plug in (2) Unplug other system circuitry.
• PN-2BRTC (BRT)
• PN-2BRTK (BRT) (3) Power on (3) Power on
• PN-4BRTA-A (BRT) or MB
• PN-24CCTA (CCT) switch off
• PN-30CCTA (CCT)
• PN-CFTC/PN-CFTC-A (CFT)
• PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)
• PN-DAIB (DAIB)
• PN-DAIC (DAIC)
• PN-DAID-A (DAID)
• PN-DAIE (DAIE)
• PN-DAIF (DAIF)
• PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
• PN-30DTC-C (DTI)
• PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)
• PN-8IPTA (SIP)
• PN-32IPLA/
PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)
• PN-IPTB (IPT)
• PN-24PRTA (PRT)
• PN-30PRTA (PRT)
Continued on next page

– 66 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards

PROCEDURE
CIRCUIT CARD CONDITION
PLUG UNPLUG
• PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH/ (1) Power off (1) Power off These circuit cards must be
CCT/DTI/PRT) or MB or MB plugged in or unplugged under
• PN-PW00 (EXTPWR) switch on switch on Make Busy condition or power off
• PN-4RSTB (MFR) to prevent damage to the card or
• PN-4RSTC/ (2) Plug in (2) Unplug other system circuitry.
PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)
• PN-2ILCC (ILC) (3) Power on (3) Power on
• PN-SC00 (CCH) or MB
• PN-SC01 (DCH) switch off
• PN-SC03-B (CSH/ICH)
• PN-SC03-C (CSH)
• PZ-M542 (CONN)
• PZ-M557 (CONN)
• PN-RTA (RTA) NOTE
• PZ-VM00/
PZ-VM00-M (VM00)
• PZ-VM10-M (VM10)
• PZ-VM01 (VM01)
• PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

NOTE: It is allowed to plugging/unplugging PN-RTA (RTA) card, after flip the PWRSW switch to UP
position (Operating power is off).

– 67 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/15/2007
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
1. You must hold the edge of a circuit card when plugging or unplugging the circuit card. If you
touch another area, you may be exposed to hazardous voltages.

PBX

NEVER TOUCH THE COMPO-

NENTS OR SOLDERED SUR-
FACE WITH BARE HANDS.

CARD FRONT

2. You must wait for 30 seconds before plugging the circuit card again when unplugging the cir-
cuit card while the operating power is being supplied.

– 68 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Turning Power ON
<AC 120 V/240 V Power Supply System>

CAUTION
1. When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, do not plug/
unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
2. When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang con-
trol for the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of
PIM0 is off, no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switch(es) of other
PIMs are left on. Note, however, that the battery charging is continuing even under these cir-
cumstances.
3. Do not turn off the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on PIM1 to PIM7 when the system is operat-
ing.

(1) Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card before turning power on.
• Make sure that the AC120 V/240 V selector switch is positioned to appropriate voltage for each
country (AC120 V or AC240 V).

NOTE: PZ-PW126 card does not have this switch.

SW2
100 V/120 V 240 V

• Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to match the kind of
battery being used:

SW101
OFF
1 : Not used
1

2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2)
2

OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)
ON

(2) Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards to ON. First, turn ON PIM1 to PIM7.
Then, turn ON PIM0.

– 69 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

<–48 V DC Power Supply System>

CAUTION
1. When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW135 card, do not plug/unplug this
circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
2. When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang con-
trol for the PZ-PW135 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is off,
no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switch(es) of other PIMs are
left on.
3. Do not turn off the PZ-PW135 card on PIM1 to PIM7 when the system is operating.

(1) Check the switch position of each PZ-PW135 card before turning power on.

(2) Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW135 cards to ON. First, turn ON PIM1 to PIM7. Then, turn
ON PIM0.

– 70 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Turning Power OFF

(1) Before turning power off, inspect all line/trunk cards’ busy lamps to verify that no cards are
operating.

(2) Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 or PZ-PW135 cards to OFF. First, turn OFF
PIM0. Then, turn OFF PIM1 to PIM7.

System Data Backup

CAUTION
• If you operate the following without system data backup after system data setting or service
memory setting (registration of the features such as “Call Forwarding” and “Speed Calling
[Speed Dialing]” from a station), the data has been set is invalid.
You must execute the system data backup before the following operations.
-Turning Off the system
-System Initial (reset of MP card)
-Changing the MP card to Off-Line Mode
-Changing the MP card to On-Line Mode after system data setting under Off-Line Mode
• You can execute the system data backup by the following two ways.
-Executing the system data backup once a day at the time set by CM43 Y=5>00
(If no data is set, the default setting is 3:00 a.m.)
-Executing the system data backup from MAT/CAT by CMEC Y=6>0:0
• Do not reset the MP card, while “SYSD” lamp on the MP card is flashing.

– 71 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE

PROCEDURE
This flowchart explains the procedures for installing the PBX system. You should follow the procedure
shown below.

Procedure Flowchart
START

UNPACKING Page 75

WIRING AC CABLE
TO Page 76
TERMINALS

INSTALLATION
OF Page 82
MAIN EQUIPMENT

POWER CABLE Page 111

CONNECTION

SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK

AND Page 121
HEAT RUN TEST

BATTERY
CONNECTION Page 129

CABLE RUNNING
TO MDF Page 137

TERMINATION OF
CABLES ON MDF Page 144

INSTALLATION
OF Page 173
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

SWITCH SETTINGS REFER TO “CHAPTER 3”

OF
CIRCUIT CARDS Page 289

Continued on next page

– 72 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE

Procedure Flowchart

MOUNTING
CIRCUIT CARDS Page 275

SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION Page 277

SYSTEM DATA ENTRY Page 278

OPERATION TEST Page 280

SYSTEM DATA SAVE Page 281

CLEANING
AND Page 281
VISUAL CHECK

MOUNTING FRONT COVER Page 282

END

For Floor Standing Installation, there are three kinds of method to install the equipment. It depends on the
country according to the UL/cUL/ACA.

NOTE: UL = Underwriters Laboratories (U.S.A.)

cUL = Canadian Underwriters Laboratories (Canada)
ACA = Australian Communication Authority (Australia)

“Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin America, Australia)”

“Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin America, Australia)”
“Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe, Middle East)”
See next page.

– 73 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE

Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin America, Australia)

The equipment is placed on the BASE TRAY which is fixed on the floor, and is connected to 120 V/240 V
AC Power Source using AC CORD-D cable.

For installation of Stationary Equipment, see the following pages.

WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using AC CORD-D Page 76
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE TRAY Page 86
- Installation of Module, For Stationary
Equipment Page 83

Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin America, Australia)

The equipment is fixed on the floor by BASE PLATE and anchor bolts, and is connected to AC Power
Distribution Board using installation cable.

For installation of this equipment, see the following pages.

WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using Installation Cable Page 78
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE PLATE Page 86
- Installation of Module, For Fixed Equipment
Page 83

Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe, Middle East)

The equipment is fixed on the floor by BASE PLATE and anchor bolts, and is connected to 120 V/240 V
AC Power Source using AC CORD-D cable.

For installation of this equipment, see the following pages.

WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using AC CORD-D Page 76
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE PLATE Page 86
- Installation of Module, For Fixed Equipment
Page 83

– 74 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
UNPACKING

UNPACKING

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(1) Check the received quantity of packages containing the PBX system with the description on the
shipping document.

(2) Check the packaging for external damage done by transportation and record it as necessary.

(3) Unpack the packaging.

• For unpacking the packages containing circuit cards, a grounded wrist strap should be worn.

(4) Check the quantity of equipment and materials unpacked with the shipping document.

(5) Perform visual inspection, checking for the following items.

• Modules Overall distortion.

Scratches and dents on the surface.

Scratches and cracks on the PIM Backplane.

Broken or bent pins on the PIM Backplane.

• Covers Scratches and dents.

• Circuit Cards Overall distortion

Scratches and cracks

Loss, or damage of parts on the circuit cards.

• Attendant Console Scratches and cracks on the keyboard

Overall distortion

Damage to Keys and lamps.

– 75 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System

There are two kinds of Power cable : AC CORD-D for Stationary Equipment (For North America, Latin
America, Australia)/Fixed Equipment 2 (For Asia, Africa, Europe,
Middle East)
: Installation Cable for Fixed Equipment 1 (For North America, Latin
America, Australia)
• Using AC CORD-D
(1) Take the AC CORD-D out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the code to the
BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: Cord bush is attached to the AC CORD-D.
(2) Wire the AC CORD-D and the FG cable to the FG, NEUTRAL, LINE and Ground terminals on the BASE.
(3) Wire the AC CORD-B to the FG, NEUTRAL and LINE terminals on the BASE.

Wiring AC CORD to Terminals when AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System

NOTE 1: For grounding requirements, refer to “PRECAUTIONS”. Page 62
NOTE 2: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia and Europe.
BASE

TO CN1 on
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 in PIM
FG CABLE AC CORD-B
(GREEN)

WHITE (BLUE) BLACK (BROWN)

GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW) TERMINAL
BLOCKS

FG NEUTRAL LINE

TO
120 V/240 V
AC POWER BLACK (BROWN)
SOURCE
GREEN WHITE (BLUE)
(GREEN/YELLOW)
AC CORD-D (3.5 m)

2 HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK

1
3 1 INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
2 PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE.
4
3 INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
4 REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.

FRONT

Continued on next page

– 76 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
JULY/15/2007
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

(4) When the system is two-frame configuration, the AC CORD-D of the right side frame can go
through the BASE of the left side frame.

AC CORD Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration when AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System

TO
120 V/240 V AC
AC CORD-D
POWER SOURCE

BASE
CORD BUSH

TERMINAL
BLOCKS

FG NEUTRAL LINE FG NEUTRAL LINE

– 77 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

• Using Installation Cable

(1) Take the Installation cable out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the cable to
the BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: The installer is to use minimum 16 AWG (1.3 Ω) size wire, maximum φ 9 mm size cable.
(2) Wire the Installation cable and the FG cable to the FG, NEUTRAL, LINE and Ground terminals
on the BASE.
(3) Wire the AC CORD-B to the FG, NEUTRAL and LINE terminals on the BASE.

Wiring Installation Cable to Terminals when AC120 V/ 240 V Power Supply System

NOTE: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.

BASE

TO CN1 on
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 in PIM
FG CABLE AC CORD-B
(GREEN)

WHITE (BLUE) BLACK (BROWN)

GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW) TERMINAL
BLOCKS

FG NEUTRAL LINE

TO AC
POWER
DISTRIBUTION BLACK (BROWN)
BOARD
GREEN WHITE (BLUE)
(GREEN/YELLOW)
INSTALLATION CABLE

2 HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK

1
3 1 INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
2 PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE.
4
3 INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
4 REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.

FRONT

Continued on next page

– 78 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

(4) When the system is two-frame configuration, the Installation cable of the right side frame can go
through the BASE of the left side frame.

Installation Cable Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration when AC120 V/ 240 V Power Supply System

TO
AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION INSTALLATION CABLE
BOARD

BASE
CORD BUSH

TERMINAL
BLOCKS

FG NEUTRAL LINE FG NEUTRAL LINE

– 79 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

–48 V DC Power Supply System

(1) Take the Installation cable out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the cable to the
BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: The installer is to use minimum 16 AWG (1.3 Ω) size wire, maximum φ 9 mm size cable.
(2) Wire the Installation cable and the FG cable to the –48 V, G, FG and Ground terminals on the BASE.
(3) Wire the AC CORD-B to the –48 V, G and FG terminals on the BASE.

Wiring AC CORD to Terminals when –48 V DC Power Supply System

NOTE: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.

BASE

TO DC INPUT on
PZ-PW135 in PIM
FG CABLE AC CORD-B
(GREEN)

GREEN BLACK (BROWN) GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW)

(GREEN/YELLOW)

WHITE
(BLUE) TERMINAL
BLOCKS

-48 V G FG

TO
–48 V DC
POWER
SOURCE
BLACK WHITE (BLUE)
(BROWN)
INSTALLATION
CABLE NOTE

2 HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK

1
3 1 INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
2 PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE.
4
OUTSIDE 3 INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
HOLE 4 REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.

FRONT

NOTE: The installation cable fixes to the BASE using a tie wrap so that it may not escape from outside
hole of terminal block, even if an installation cable is pulled.
Continued on next page

– 80 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING POWER CABLE TO TERMINALS

(4) When the system is two-frame configuration, the Installation cable of the right side frame can go
through the BASE of the left side frame.

Installation Cable Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration when –48 V DC Power Supply System

TO
–48 V DC
INSTALLATION CABLE
POWER SOURCE

BASE
CORD BUSH

TERMINAL
BLOCKS

–48 V G FG –48 V G FG

– 81 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Floor Standing Installation
Start

Checkup • Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that the
before installation required floor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts for trunk/
extension cables, power cables and bus cables have been properly worked at
correct positions. See “Floor Space” and “Cable Hole Location”.
Page 84, Page 85

• Mark positions for installation of the PBX main equipment.

Marking
For Fixed Equipment, detach the BASE PLATE from the BASE. See “Floor
Marking for BASE PLATE”. Page 86
For Stationary Equipment, see “Floor Marking for BASE TRAY”.
Page 86

Leveling NOTE: Measure the level of the floor surface before installing the PBX main
equipment.
• Check the level of the floor. If necessary, adjust the level by inserting spacers
beneath the equipment.

Drilling • First open necessary number of preliminary prepared holes using the drill bit
for small-diameter holes, then use the finishing drill bit for finishing drill holes.
See “Drilling”. Page 87

Detaching Front Cover • Detach the front cover of each Module. See “Detaching FRONT COVER”.
Page 88

A Continued on next page

– 82 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• For Fixed Equipment

Installation of Module
(1) Fix the BASE PLATE to the floor with anchor bolts.
(2) Fix the BASE to the BASE PLATE with screws. See “Connection of BASE
and BASE PLATE”. Page 91
(3) Fix the Module onto the BASE with screws. See “Connection of Module
and BASE”. Page 92
• For Stationary Equipment
(1) Fix the BASE TRAY to the floor with anchor bolts.
(2) Fix the Module onto the BASE with screws. See “Connection of Module
and BASE”. Page 92
(3) Place the Module and the BASE on the BASE TRAY. See “Placing Module
on BASE TRAY”. Page 93

Installation of • Connect Modules with screws. See “Connection of Modules”.

Multiple-Module
Page 94
• Install the I/F BRACKET to the top-stack PIMs if the equipment is stacked with
five or more Modules. See “Installation of I/F BRACKET”. Page 97

Installation of • Install the TOP COVER to the top-stack PIM. See “Installation of TOP COV-
Top Cover
ER”. Page 98

Installation of • Install the MOUNTING BRACKET to the top-stack PIM if the equipment is
Mounting Bracket
stacked with four or more Modules. See “Installation of MOUNTING
BRACKET”. Page 99

• Carefully review every step above to check that all necessary screws have been
Checking
properly placed and tightened.

End

– 83 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Floor Space

UNIT : mm (inch)

223 (8.8)

430 (16.9)
200 (7.9)

1000 (39.4)

MAINTENANCE
AREA
200 (7.9)

PIM/BATTM

BASE

FRONT

– 84 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Cable Hole Location

MODULE

BASE

FRONT

: CABLE HOLE

– 85 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Floor Marking for BASE PLATE

(for Fixed Equipment)
Using MOUNTING BRACKET : 10 (0.4)
Not Using MOUNTING BRACKET : 1.7 (0.1) UNIT : mm (inch)
(WALL)

3.2 Outline of
(0.2)
40.6 Module
(1.6)

128
202.6 (5.6) ANCHOR BOLT × 4
(7.9)

34
(1.3)
20.4
(0.8)
30 30
(1.2) 347.2 (13.7) (1.2)

407.2 (16.0)

412.4 (16.0)
8.8 8.8
(0.3) (0.3)

Floor Marking for BASE TRAY

(for Stationary Equipment)
UNIT : mm (inch) ANCHOR BOLT × 4
(1.8)
45
(5.0)
128

43.9 347.2
(1.7) (13.7)

– 86 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Drilling

(1) Make a preliminary hole in the concrete, using a drill bit for small-diameter holes.
(2) Drill a hole in the concrete with a drill suitable for a plug bolt a little deeper than the plug bolt
length.
Anchor Bolt Size :10 mm (0.39 inch) DIA for Fixed Equipment
6 mm (0.24 inch) DIA for Stationary Equipment
(3) Insert the anchor bolt into the hole.
(4) Push anchor bolt until the bolt stays permanently in place.
(5) Turn bolt counterclockwise and remove.
(6) Insert bolts correctly into the holes for equipment installation, then tighten them properly.

Drilling Instructions for Anchor Bolt

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

– 87 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Detaching FRONT COVER

(1) Push portion A of the COVER PARTS to release the LATCH.

(2) Pivot the COVER PARTS on its left side to remove it.
(3) Loosen its one screw.
(4) Lift up the STOPPER to unlock.
(5) Pivot the FRONT COVER on its bottom to remove it.

Detaching FRONT COVER

(1) PUSH COVER PARTS.

COVER PARTS PUSH

PORTION A

(2) REMOVE COVER PARTS.

Continued on next page

– 88 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

(3) LOOSEN A SCREW.

(4) LIFT UP STOPPER (UNLOCK).

Continued on next page

– 89 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

(5) REMOVE FRONT COVER.

– 90 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE for Fixed Equipment

(1) Mount the BASE on the BASE PLATE by placing it over the hooks.
(2) Slide the BASE into the inner end.
(3) Secure the BASE to the BASE PLATE with two screws.

NOTE: Screws are attached to the BASE PLATE.

Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE

BASE

FRONT HOOKS
BASE PLATE

BASE
SLIDE BASE INTO INNER END.

BASE PLATE

– 91 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Connection of Module and BASE for Fixed/Stationary Equipment

(1) Mount the Module on the BASE by placing it over the hooks.
(2) Slide the Module into the inner end.
NOTE: Pay attention to do not put the Module on Edging of the cable hole on BASE.
(3) Secure the Module to the BASE with three screws.

NOTE: Screws are attached to the Module.

Connection of Module and BASE

SCREWS

BASE

HOOKS

MODULE

SLIDE MODULE INTO

INNER END.
BASE

– 92 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Placing Module on BASE TRAY for Stationary Equipment

Place the Module and the BASE on the BASE TRAY.

Placing Module on BASE TRAY

BASE TRAY

– 93 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Connection of Modules

NOTE: The FRONT STOPPER, BUILD PLATES, and screws are attached to the Module.

(1) Insert the BUILD PLATES (R)/(L) into the slits of the SIDE FRAME, then slide them backward
and lock them.
(2) Place the FRONT STOPPER on the Module, then fix it with three screws.

Connection of BUILD PLATE

BUILD PLATE (R)

BUILD PLATE (L)

SIDE FRAME

Continued on next page

– 94 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of FRONT STOPPER

FRONT
STOPPER

PZ-PW121 SCREW PIM TOP FRAME SCREW

SCREW PIM SIDE FRAME

FRONT STOPPER

SCREWS

Continued on next page

– 95 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

(3) Hook the PIM onto the BUILD PLATE’s hooks.

(4) Slide the PIM backward until it comes to the back end.
(5) Fix the PIM with three screws.

Connection of Modules

SCREWS

– 96 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Installation of I/F BRACKET

Install the I/F BRACKET to the top-stack PIMs when the equipment is two frame stacks.

Secure the I/F BRACKET to rear side of top-stack PIMs with two screws from inside of PIMs.

NOTE: Screws are attached to the I/F BRACKET.

FRONT SIDE

SCREW

SCREW

I/F BRACKET

– 97 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Installation of TOP COVER

(1) Hang four hooks of the TOP COVER on the back board of PIM as shown below.
(2) Secure the TOP COVER to the front side of the PIM with two screws.

NOTE: Screws are attached to BASE/TOP ASSEM.

HOOK

– 98 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET

Install the MOUNTING BRACKET to the top-stack PIM if the equipment is stacked with four or
more Modules.

(1) Remove four screws located on the rear side of the top-stack PIM.
(2) Secure the MOUNTING BRACKET to the PIM with the removed screws.
(3) Secure the PIM to the wall or ceiling by using wires, chains and eyebolts (locally provided).

Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET

FRONT

PIM

SCREWS MOUNTING BRACKET

30
0(
11
.7)

37
8(
14
43 .7)
0(
16
.9)
47 (1.8)

UNIT : mm (inch)

– 99 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0
90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Wall Mounting Installation

Start

Checkup • Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that the
before installation required floor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts for trunk/
extension cables, power cables and grounding conductors have been properly
worked at correct positions. See “Floor Space” and “Cable Hole Location”.
Page 84, Page 85

Detaching • Detach the front cover of each Module. See “Detaching FRONT
Front Cover
COVER”. Page 88

• Mark hole positions for installation of the PBX main equipment. See “Wall
Marking
Marking for HANGER ASSEM”. Page 101

• Secure the HANGER ASSEM to the wall.

Installation of Module
• Hang the PIM to the HANGER ASSEM. See “Hanging PIM to HANGER AS-
SEM”. Page 102
NOTE: The BATTM cannot be installed on the wall.

Multiple-Module • After hanging each PIM to the respective HANGER ASSEMs, connect PIMs
Configuration
using screws. See “Connection of Modules”. Page 94

• Carefully review every step above to check that all necessary screws have been
Checking
properly placed and tightened.

End

– 100 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Wall Marking for HANGER ASSEM

167.5 167.5 UNIT : mm (inch)

(7.0) (7.0)

210.8
(8.3)

(13.9)
352
210.8
(8.3)

(13.9)
352
210.8
(8.3)

(13.9)
352
210.8
(8.3)

(13.9)

ANCHOR/
352

SCREW
(× 3/PIM)

HANGER ASSEM
210.8
(8.3)

(14.0)
356.5

BASE

– 101 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM

(1) Secure the HANGER ASSEM to the surface of a wall with three screws.
Select screws to match with the wall type as follows.

WALL TYPE RECOMMENDED SCREW

CONCRETE ANCHOR BOLT TYPE Recommended 4 mm (0.16 inch)
by 25 mm (0.98 inch)
WOOD WOOD TYPE SCREWS Minimum 3.5 mm (0.14 inch) DIA
Maximum 4.5 mm (0.17 inch) DIA
PLASTER BOARD MOLLY ANCHOR TYPE Minimum 3.5 mm (0.14 inch) DIA
[THICKNESS Minimum 9.6 mm (0.38 inch)] Maximum 4.5 mm (0.17 inch) DIA

A concrete wall is recommended because it is the most firm to mount the PBX of the three. The
plaster board is the most infirm wall of the three.

(2) Hang the slits of the rear of a PIM to the hooks of the HANGER ASSEM.
(3) Secure the PIM to the HANGER ASSEM with two screws.

NOTE: Screws are attached to the HANGER ASSEM.

Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM

HANGER ASSEM

HOOK

HOOK

PIM

BASE

SCREWS
FRONT

– 102 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

19-inch Rack Mounting Installation

Start

Checkup • Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that the
before installation required floor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts for trunk/
extension cables, power cables and grounding conductors have been properly
worked at correct positions. See “Floor Space” and “Cable Hole Location”.
Page 84, Page 85

Detaching • Detach the SIDE COVER and SIDE PANEL of the Module for 19″RACK
Side Cover/Side Panel BRACKET (A) mounting. For 19″RACK BRACKET (B), this procedure is not
required. See “Detaching SIDE COVER/SIDE PANEL”. Page 104

One PIM • Mount the 19″RACK BRACKET (A) to the PIM. See “Connection of
Configuration
19″RACK BRACKET (A)”. Page 106
• Mount the PIM with the 19″RACK BRACKET (A) to the 19-inch RACK. See
“Mounting PIM to 19-inch RACK”. Page 107

Multiple-Module • Mount the 19″RACK BRACKET (B) to the bottom-stack Module. See “Con-
Configuration
nection of 19″RACK BRACKET (B)”. Page 108
• Mount the 19″RACK BRACKET (A) to the top-stack PIM. See “Connection
of 19″RACK BRACKET (A)”. Page 106
• Mount the modules with the 19″ RACK BRACKET (A) and (B) to the 19-inch
RACK. See “Mounting Multiple-Module to 19-inch RACK”.
Page 109
NOTE: The BATTM cannot be installed in the 19-inch RACK.

• Carefully review every step above to check that all necessary screws have been
Checking
properly placed and tightened.

End

– 103 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Detaching SIDE COVER/SIDE PANEL

(1) Remove the two screws fixing the SIDE COVER.

(2) Pivot the SIDE COVER on its bottom to remove it.
(3) Remove the SIDE PANEL fixed by three screws, from the left side frame of the PIM.

Detaching SIDE COVER

SCREW

SIDE COVER

– 104 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Detaching SIDE PANEL

SCREWS

SIDE PANEL

– 105 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Connection of 19″RACK BRACKET (A)

(1) Insert the nails of the 19″RACK BRACKET (A) into the side frame of the Module.
(2) Secure them with four screws each.

NOTE: Screws are attached to the 19″RACK BRACKET (A).

Connection of 19″RACK BRACKET (A)

19″RACK BRACKET (A)

SCREWS

NAILS

– 106 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Mounting PIM to 19-inch RACK

(1) Mount the PIM with 19″RACK BRACKET (A) into the 19-inch RACK.
(2) Secure them with four screws (locally provided).

Mounting PIM to 19-inch Rack

SCREWS

19″RACK BRACKET (A)

NOTE

NOTE: The BATTM cannot be installed in the 19-inch RACK.

– 107 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

• Connection of 19″RACK BRACKET (B)

(1) Place the BASE PLATE on the 19″RACK BRACKET (B).

(2) Secure the BASE PLATE with four washer and nuts.
(3) Mount the BASE to the BASE PLATE.
(See “Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE”. Page 91)
(4) Mount the Module to the BASE.
(See “Connection of Module and BASE”. Page 92)

NOTE: Nuts and washers are attached to the 19″RACK BRACKET (B).

Connection of 19″RACK BRACKET (B)

NUT

WASHER
19″RACK BRACKET (B)

BASE PLATE

– 108 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Mounting Multiple-Module to 19-inch RACK

19″BRACKET (A)

19″BRACKET (B)

– 109 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

BUS Cable Connection

When the system is a multiple-PIM configuration, connect all the BUS Connector to each other using BUS
cables, as shown below.
Be sure to secure the BUS cables using tie wraps to avoid obstructing a PFT card.

BUS Cable
700 mm (27.6 inch)

48-TW-0.7 CONN CA

Connection of BUS Cables

BUS CABLE

P P PZ-8PFTB
PIM3 W W PIM7 CARD
R R
TIE WRAP

P P
PIM2 W W PIM6 FRONT
R R

P P
PIM1 W W PIM5
R R

P P
PIM0 W W PIM4
R R

48-TW-0.7 CONN CA

– 110 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

POWER CABLE CONNECTION

The cable connections on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card are shown below.

AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System

Cable Connection on PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

NOTE 1: Follow the Label on Front Plate of PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126.

NOTE 2: If GND (Signal GND) has to be separated from FG (Frame GND), remove the link between
GND and FG terminals.
NOTE 3: In Australia, GND and FG are bonded elsewhere, so are not to be linked here. The TRC Earth
connects to the “GND” terminal on every PIM.
NOTE 4: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.
NOTE 5: PZ-PW126 card does not have SW2.

SW101
OFF MJ PWR CNT CA-D (for PIM1 to PIM7)
MN PWR CNT CA-E (for PIM0)
12

NOTE 1
ON
ON SW101 CN103
1: OFF: NO CONNECTION
2: ON: SEAL/FLOAT2 TO PWR1 CONNECTOR ON BWB
OFF: OPEN/FLOAT1

–27 V TO PWR0A CONNECTOR ON BWB

TO AUXILIARY CN104 TO PWR0B CONNECTOR ON BWB
FG
EQUIPMENT
GND NOTE 2 POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, –27 V, E)

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)

CAUTION
PWR CA-A
Set the appropriate voltage
before turning on the SW1
switch.
TO OTHER PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

100 V /120 V 240 V

SW2

TO BATTERY OR OTHER PZ-PW121/

CN1 PZ-PW126
WHITE (BLUE)

BLACK (BROWN) PWR CA-A/BATT CA

O I

SW1

TO FRAME GROUND TERMINAL

GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW)
IN PIM
L NOMINAL TO TERMINAL
N
FG AC INPUT BLOCK ON BASE

AC CORD-B

– 111 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

• Connection of AC CORD-B

(1) Connect the AC CORD-B to the CN1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
(2) Screw the ground cable of the AC CORD-B to the frame ground terminal on the PIM.

Connection of AC CORD-B
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 TO 120 V/240 V AC POWER SOURCE
AC CORD-D
CN1
CORD BUSH

BASE

AC CORD-B
FRONT
TERMINAL BLOCKS

– 112 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

• Connection of DC Power Cable

(1) Confirm the connection of power output cables, as shown below (These cables are pre-installed).
(2) For PIM0, connect the PWR CNT CA-E to the CN103 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
card and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.
For PIM1 to PIM7, connect the PWR CNT CA-D to the CN103 connector on the PZ-PW121/
PZ-PW126 card and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.

PWR CNT CA-D/PWR CNT CA-E

250 mm (9.8 inch) 300 mm (11.8 inch)

550 mm (21.7 inch)

Cable Connection between PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 and BWB

PIM
PZ-PW121 BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)
/PZ-PW126

PWR1 PWR0A
CN103 PWR0B

CARD SLOT AREA

PWR0C
LTC CONNECTOR AREA

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, –27 V, E)

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)
PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0)
PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)

– 113 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

(3) When you need a –48 V DC power supply installed for a Cell Station (Zone Transceiver) in WCS
system or when PN-4LDT, PN-4LLC card is installed, do the following procedure. If not, skip
this procedure and go to (4). Page 116

STEP1: Attach four screws preliminary to the PZ-PW122 card.

STEP2: Mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the CSI, 4LDT, 4LLC
cards, and fasten the screws.

NOTE: Screws are attached to the PZ-PW122 card.

Mounting PZ-PW122 into PIM

PIM

PZ-PW122

– 114 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

STEP3: Connect the PWR CNT CA-E or PWR CNT CA-D, and POWER OUTPUT CABLE
(–48 V, E) as shown below.

Cable Connection between PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126/PZ-PW122 and BWB

PIM
PZ-PW121 BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)
/PZ-PW126
PWR1 PWR0A
CN103 PWR0B

CARD SLOT AREA

PWR0C

LTC CONNECTOR AREA

NOTE

PZ-PW122
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, -27 V, E)

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (-48 V, E)

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)

PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0)

PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)

NOTE: When the PN-4LLC card is used for OPS in North America, Ferrite Core must be attached
to the POWER OUTPUT CABLE (–48 V, E) between the PZ-PW122 card and the PWR0C
connector on BWB of the PIM, as shown below.

PZ-PW122 PWR0C

GRAY
RED FERRITE CORE
YELLOW

– 115 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

(4) When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
cards to each other using the PWR CA-A for power multi-connection.

PWR CA-A
550 mm (21.7 inch)

PWR CA-A

Connection of PWR CA-A Cables

(a) When using an Internal Battery

PWR PWR PWR PWR

CA-A CA-A
PIM3 PIM7

TO INTERNAL TO INTERNAL
BATTERY BATTERY

PWR PWR

PIM2 PIM6

TO INTERNAL TO INTERNAL
BATTERY BATTERY

PWR PWR PWR PWR

CA-A CA-A

PIM1 PIM5

TO INTERNAL TO INTERNAL
BATTERY BATTERY

PWR PWR

PIM0 PIM4

TO INTERNAL TO INTERNAL
BATTERY BATTERY

– 116 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

Connection of PWR CA-A Cables

(b) When using an External Battery

PWR PWR

PIM3 PIM7

PWR PWR
PWR CA-A PWR CA-A

PIM2 PIM6

PWR PWR

PIM1 PIM5

PWR PWR

PIM0 PIM4

TO EXTERNAL BATTERY

– 117 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

–48 V DC Power Supply System

Cable Connection on PZ-PW135

NOTE 1: Follow the Label on Front Plate of PZ-PW135.

NOTE 2: If GND (Signal GND) has to be separated from FG (Frame GND), remove the link between
GND and FG terminals.
NOTE 3: In Australia, GND and FG are bonded elsewhere, so are not to be linked here. The TRC Earth
connects to the “GND” terminal on every PIM.
NOTE 4: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.

MJ PWR CNT CA-D (for PIM1 to PIM7)

MN PWR CNT CA-E (for PIM0)
ON

SIG TO PWR1 CONNECTOR ON BWB

–27 V TO PWR0A CONNECTOR ON BWB

TO AUXILIARY FG TO PWR0B CONNECTOR ON BWB
EQUIPMENT GND
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, –27 V, E)

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)

PWR CA-A

TO PWR0C CONNECTOR (–48 V, E) ON BWB

WHITE (BLUE) –48 V

O I

DC INPUT
BLACK (BROWN) G

SW

TO FRAME GROUND TERMINAL

GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW)
IN PIM
–48 V TO TERMINAL
G
FG BLOCK ON BASE

AC CORD-B

– 118 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

• Connection of AC CORD-B

(1) Connect the AC CORD-B to the DC INPUT connector on the PZ-PW135 card.
(2) Screw the ground cable of the AC CORD-B to the frame ground terminal on the PIM.

Connection of AC CORD-B
PZ-PW135 TO –48 V DC POWER SOURCE
INSTALLATION CABLE
DC INPUT
CORD BUSH

BASE
(SN1685
BASEUC)
AC CORD-B
FRONT
TERMINAL BLOCKS

– 119 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

• Connection of DC Power Cable

(1) Confirm the connection of power output cables, as shown below (These cables are pre-installed).
(2) For PIM0, connect the PWR CNT CA-E to the SIG connector on the PZ-PW135 card and the
PWR1 connector on the BWB.
For PIM1 to PIM7, connect the PWR CNT CA-D to the SIG connector on the PZ-PW135 card
and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.

PWR CNT CA-D/PWR CNT CA-E

250 mm (9.8 inch) 300 mm (11.8 inch)

550 mm (21.7 inch)

Cable Connection between PZ-PW135 and BWB

PIM
PZ-PW135 BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)

PWR1 PWR0A
SIG PWR0B

CARD SLOT AREA

PWR0C

LTC CONNECTOR AREA

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5 V, –27 V, E)

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (–48 V, E)
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90 V, CR, E)
PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0)
PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)

– 120 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

AC120 V/240 V Power Supply System
• Precautions

(1) Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card before turning power on.
- Make sure that the AC120 V/240 V selector switch is positioned to appropriate voltage for
each country (AC120 V or AC240 V).

NOTE: PZ-PW126 card does not have this switch.

SW2
100 V/120 V 240 V

- Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to match the
kind of battery being used:

SW101
OFF
1 : Not used
1

2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2)
2

OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)
ON

(2) When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, do not plug/
unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.

(3) Immediately follow the instructions below if the MJ lamp on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 lights
up or smoke or a nasty smell is produced during the test:
a) Turn power off of all PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.
b) Unplug the AC code from the wall outlet.
c) Carefully check for causes of the failure occurring.

NOTE: Do not turn power on again until the cause is detected.

(4) When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control
for the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is
off, no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switches of other PIMs are
left on. Note, however, that the battery charging is continuing even under these circumstances.

– 121 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

• Power Routing

NOTE 1: PN-4LCD/4LCF/4LCL/4LCW card provides +80 V on-board power supply (+80 VOBP).
NOTE 2: PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN, PN-2LDTA, PN-2ODTA/2ODTB card provides –48 V on-board pow-
er supply (–48 VOBP).

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
TO PIM2

+5 V
PIM1
-27 V
-27 V
CR
AC +90 V

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
PWR CA-A
NOTE 1
+5 V
+5 V
+80 VOBP +80 V
PIM0
-27 V
BATTERY -27 V -27 V
CR
CR -5 V
AC
+90 V NOTE 2
-5 V
+5 V
AC CORD-B -48 VOBP -48 V

-27 V
CR

PN-8LCAA

+5 V
-27 V

-5 V
CR
+90 V

AC CORD-D
TERMINAL
BASE
BLOCKS
TO AC MAINS INPUT

– 122 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

• Checking for Supply Voltage

Start

Checking power cable • Before connecting AC Cord, verify:

and
grounding conductor - that the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card is positioned to OFF;
- that the AC Cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.

Testing for input power

• Use a tester to verify that the input power is AC120±10 V or AC240±10 V.

Connecting AC power
• Plug the AC cord into a wall outlet.

Turning power ON
• Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards on PIM1 to
PIM7 to ON. Then, turn the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on
PIM0 to ON last of all.

Verifying power • Verify that the ON lamp on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card lights up.
pilot lamp ON

Testing for • Measure the output voltage: –20 V should be observed at GND and
output voltage
–27 V terminals of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card. See “Confirming Output
Voltage”. Page 124

End

• Heat Run Test

Turn the SW1 switch ON. Keep it on for 5 minutes to check for no abnormal voltage. After complet-
ing the test, turn OFF the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on PIM0. Then, turn OFF
the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.

– 123 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Confirming Output Voltage

TESTER

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
DC100 V

MJ
MN
ON

-27 V
FG
GND

SW1
O I

TO FRAME GROUND
TERMINAL IN PIM

TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE

– 124 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

–48 V DC Power Supply System

• Precautions

(1) When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW135 card, do not plug/unplug this
circuit card into/from its mounting slot.

(2) Immediately follow the instructions below if the MJ lamp on the PZ-PW135 lights up or smoke
or a nasty smell is produced during the test:
a) Turn power off of all PZ-PW135 cards.
b) Unplug the DC code from the wall outlet.
c) Carefully check for causes of the failure occurring.

NOTE: Do not turn power on again until the cause is detected.

(3) When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control
for the PZ-PW135 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is off, no
power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switches of other PIMs are left on.

– 125 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

• Power Routing

NOTE 1: PN-4LCD/4LCF/4LCL/4LCW card provides +80 V on-board power supply (+80 VOBP).
NOTE 2: PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN, PN-2LDTA, PN-2ODTA/2ODTB card provides –48 V on-board pow-
er supply (–48 VOBP).

PZ-PW135
TO PIM2

+5 V
PIM1
-27 V

CR
DC IN -48 V

PZ-PW135

NOTE 1
+5 V
+5 V
+80 VOBP +80 V
PIM0
-27 V
-27 V
CR
CR -5 V
DC IN
-48 V NOTE 2
-5 V
+5 V
AC CORD-B -48 VOBP -48 V

-27 V
CR

INSTALLATION
CABLE TERMINAL
BASE
BLOCKS

– 126 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

• Checking for Supply Voltage

Start

Checking power cable • Before connecting DC Cord, verify:

and
grounding conductor - that the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW135 card is positioned to OFF;
- that the DC Cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.

Testing for input power

• Use a tester to verify that the input power is –48 V DC on the output of external
–48 V DC Power Supply (Rectificador), or the Power Supply Cable (Installa-
tion Cable).

• Connect the Power Supply Cable (Installation Cable) to Terminal Blocks on

Connecting DC power
BASE.

• Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW135 cards on PIM1 to PIM7 to ON.
Turning power ON
Then, turn the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW135 card on PIM0 to ON last of all.

Verifying power
• Verify that the ON lamp on the PZ-PW135 card lights up.
pilot lamp ON

Testing for
• Measure the output voltage: –20 V should be observed at GND and
output voltage –27 V terminals of the PZ-PW135 card. See “Confirming Output
Voltage”. Page 124

End

• Heat Run Test

Turn the SW1 switch ON. Keep it on for 5 minutes to check for no abnormal voltage. After complet-
ing the test, turn OFF the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW135 card on PIM0. Then, turn OFF the SW1
switches of all the PZ-PW135 cards.

– 127 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Confirming Output Voltage

TESTER

PZ-PW135
DC100 V

MJ
MN
ON

-27 V
FG
GND

SW
O I

TO FRAME GROUND
TERMINAL IN PIM

TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE

– 128 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

BATTERY CONNECTION

WARNING
TURN OFF AC POWER BEFORE CONNECTING BATTERIES.

CAUTION
1. 24 V batteries must be used in this system.
2. If battery terminals (+, –) come in contact with the module while connecting the battery cable
to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card or the BWB may be bro-
ken. Therefore, you must perform work in accordance with the following steps when mount-
ing or removing the batteries.
(1) When mounting batteries:
(a) Connect the battery cable to the batteries.
(b) Mount the batteries into the appointed position of the PIM or the BATTM.
(c) Connect the battery cable to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.

(2) When removing batteries:

(a) Disconnect the battery cable from the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
(b) Remove the batteries from the PIM or the BATTM.

Continued on next page

Recommended Battery
Internal Battery: YUASA type NPH-3.2-12
MATSUSHITA type LCR-12V3.4NE
External Battery: YUASA type NP-24-12B
(BATTM) MATSUSHITA type LCL-12V-24

– 129 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

CAUTION
3. Battery Replacement Table and Battery Warnings
The label which shows battery replacement table and battery warnings is attached to the
reverse side of Front Cover for PIM and BATTM.
During the battery installation process, the warning statements must be observed. When
replacing batteries, the battery replacement table should be observed in order to increase bat-
tery life and insure a safe operation.

FRONT COVER
LABEL

PIM/BATTM

TO PREVENT INJURY AND SKIN BURN,

BATTERY REPLACEMENT TABLE
CAUTION PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING. INSTALLATION DATE:

o DO NOT STRIKE A MATCH OR CAUSE A SPARK IN REPLACEMENT DATE:

VICINITY OF BATTERY. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
o PLACE THE EQUIPMENT WELL VENTILATED (SYSTEM)
AREA.
REPLACEMENT INTERVAL 3 YEARS 2 YEARS 1YEAR
o DO NOT SHORT.
o REPLACE BATTERY ONLY AFTER BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEAKAGE, FIRE, SMOKE, OR OTHER
GASES HAVE BEEN DISPERSED. HAZARDS MAY RESULT IF THE BATTERY IS NOT REPLACED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFIED INTERVALS.

– 130 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
JULY/15/2007
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

Internal Battery Connection

(1) Connect the BATT CA INT cable to the batteries as shown below.
(2) Mount the battery unit (24 V DC, 3.2-3.4 AH) into the PIM.
(3) Plug the BATT CA INT connector into the BATT1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card.
(4) Secure the batteries and battery cable using tie wraps.

Internal Battery Mounting

DIMENSION OF BATTERY
67 mm
(2.6 inch)

60 mm
(2.4 inch)

PIM

134 mm TO BATT1
(5.3 inch) CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121
Recommended Batteries /PZ-PW126
Yuasa NPH-3.2-12
Matsushita LCR-12V 3.4 NE

BATT CA INT

RED

+
- -
+
BLUE/BLACK

BLACK
INTERNAL BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 3.2 TO 3.4 AH)

Continued on next page

– 131 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

Internal Battery Mounting

TIE WRAP

+
- -
+

– 132 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

(5) When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the BATT CA INT and the PWR
CA-A as shown below.

Internal Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Configuration

NOTE 1: One Internal Battery unit (24 V DC, 3.2-3.4 AH) can be mounted in each PIM.
NOTE 2: Internal Batteries are multi-connected for each two PIMs.

PWR BATT CA INT PWR BATT CA INT

PIM3 PIM7

PWR CA-A PWR CA-A

BATT CA INT PWR BATT CA INT
PWR

PIM2 PIM6

PWR BATT CA INT PWR BATT CA INT

PIM1 PIM5

PWR CA-A PWR CA-A

PWR BATT CA INT PWR BATT CA INT

PIM0 PIM4

– 133 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

External / BATTM Battery Connection

(1) Connect the BATT CA EXT cable to the batteries as shown below.
(2) Mount the battery units (24 V DC, 24 AH per unit) into the Battery Module (BATTM), if the BATTM
required.
(3) Plug the BATT CA EXT connector into the BATT1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card in
PIM0 or PIM4.

NOTE: Screws are attached to the BATTM.

Battery Mounting into BATTM

DIMENSION OF BATTERY

175 mm
(6.9 inch) TO BATT1 CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
125 mm IN PIM0/PIM4
(4.9 inch)
BATT CA EXT

165 mm
(6.5 inch)

Recommended Batteries
Yuasa NP-24-12B
Matsushita LCL-12V-24

BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 24 AH)

BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 24 AH)

Continued on next page

– 134 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

(4) Hang the hooks of the BATTERY STOPPERs on the BATTM.

(5) Slide the BATTERY STOPPERs left and secure them with four screws.

NOTE: The BATTERY STOPPERs and screws are attached to the BATTM.

Battery Mounted into BATTM

TO BATT1 CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
IN PIM0/P

BATTERY STOPPER

BATTM

HOOK
BATTERY UNIT
(24 V DC, 24 AH)

SCREW

Continued on next page

– 135 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

(6) When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the BATT CA EXT and the PWR
CA-A as shown below.

External/BATTM Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Configuration

NOTE 1: One pair each of battery unit (24 V DC, 24 AH) can be housed in a BATTM, for each two PIMs.
NOTE 2: External Batteries are multi-connected for each four PIMs.

PWR PWR

PIM3 PIM7

PWR PWR PWR PWR

CA-A CA-A
PIM2 PIM6

PWR PWR

PIM1 PIM5

PWR PWR

PIM0 PIM4

BATT CA EXT BATT CA EXT

BATTM/ BATTM/
EXTERNAL BATT EXTERNAL BATT

– 136 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

Installation of External MDF

• Secure the external MDF onto the floor or the wall.

• Mount the required MDF components.

• If required, install the cable ducts for the cables to be laid between the MDF and the Main Equipment.
In this case, confirm the locations of the cable holes for the Main Equipment.

MDF Cable Hole Location

MODULE

BASE

FRONT

: CABLE HOLE

– 137 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

MDF Cable

To facilitate the termination of the 25 pair cables (MDF cables) from the system to the MDF shown below,
the length of each cable to be used should be predetermined according to the distance between the MDF
and the system. Each cable should be labeled at both ends using a cable number or cable designation as
shown below.

MDF Cable
CHAMP CONNECTOR

TO PIM

TWISTED 25 PAIR CABLES

TO MDF

– 138 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

MDF Cables for each PIM

FROM CABLE CABLE

TO
MODULE CONNECTION NUMBER DESIGNATION
PIM0 LTC0 1 MDF 0 LTC0
LTC1 2 0 LTC1
LTC2 3 0 LTC2
LTC3 4 0 LTC3
PIM1 LTC0 5 MDF 1 LTC0
LTC1 6 1 LTC1
LTC2 7 1 LTC2
LTC3 8 1 LTC3
PIM2 LTC0 9 MDF 2 LTC0
LTC1 10 2 LTC1
LTC2 11 2 LTC2
LTC3 12 2 LTC3
PIM3 LTC0 13 MDF 3 LTC0
LTC1 14 3 LTC1
LTC2 15 3 LTC2
LTC3 16 3 LTC3
PIM4 LTC0 17 MDF 4 LTC0
LTC1 18 4 LTC1
LTC2 19 4 LTC2
LTC3 20 4 LTC3
PIM5 LTC0 21 MDF 5 LTC0
LTC1 22 5 LTC1
LTC2 23 5 LTC2
LTC3 24 5 LTC3
Continued on next page

– 139 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

MDF Cables for each PIM

FROM CABLE CABLE

TO
MODULE CONNECTION NUMBER DESIGNATION
PIM6 LTC0 25 MDF 6 LTC0
LTC1 26 6 LTC1
LTC2 27 6 LTC2
LTC3 28 6 LTC3
PIM7 LTC0 29 MDF 7 LTC0
LTC1 30 7 LTC1
LTC2 31 7 LTC2
LTC3 32 7 LTC3

– 140 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

Cable Running to External MDF

(1) When using the cable hole of the BASE, bring the MDF cable up to the Main Equipment through the
cable hole of the BASE.

(2) When using the cable hole of the PIM, make the cable hole on the right side of PIM. Then, bring the
MDF cable up to PIM0 through the cable hole of the BASE, and bring the MDF cable up to the other
PIM through the cable hole (right side) of each PIM.

Making Cable Hole on PIM

FRONT

CUT OFF THE PLATE. FILE THE PROJECTIONS. PUT IN THE EDGINGS.

– 141 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

(3) Connect the champ connector of each MDF cable to the LTC connector located on the PIM using the
screws provided, as shown below.

(4) Secure the MDF cables to the PIM using tie wraps.

Cable Running to External MDF

(a) Using cable hole of BASE

PIM3

LTC CONNECTOR
PIM2

CHAMP CONNECTOR

PIM1

PIM0

BATTM

TO MDF
FRONT

Continued on next page

– 142 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

Cable Running to the External MDF

(b) Using cable hole of PIM

PIM3

LTC CONNECTOR TO MDF

PIM2

CHAMP CONNECTOR

TO MDF
PIM1

PIM0 TO MDF

TO MDF
BATTM

FRONT

– 143 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

Cable Connection to MDF

Connect the cables to the MDF referring to below.

Card Slots and the LTC Connectors

LT01/AP01

LT02/AP02

LT03/AP03

LT04/AP04

LT05/AP05

LT06/AP06

LT07/AP07

LT08/AP08

LT09/AP09

LT10/AP10

LT11/AP11

MP12/FP12

PFT
VM

LT00/AP00

AC/DC
PWR
PIM0 - 7

LTC1 LTC3
LTC0 LTC2

BWB
DC/DC
PWR

FRONT

LTC Connector Accommodation

LTC CONNECTOR CARD SLOT NUMBER REMARKS

LTC0 LT00 - LT02/AP00 - AP02
LTC1 LT03 - LT05/AP03 - AP05
LTC2 LT06 - LT08/AP06 - AP08
LTC3 LT09 - LT11/AP09 - AP11

– 144 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

Location of Each LEN

This figure shows the relationship between each Line Equipment Number (LEN) and each Card Slot Num-
ber (LT Number).

(1) LEN of CM14

• LEN 00000 - 01127 (PIM0 - 3) Page 146

• LEN 02000 - 03127 (PIM4 - 7) Page 147

(2) LEN of CM10

• LEN 000 - 363 (PIM0 - 3) Page 148

• LEN 400 - 763 (PIM4 - 7) Page 149

– 145 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• LEN 00000 - 01127 (PIM0 - 3)

Location of each LEN (CM14)

XXYYY
XXYYY
LEN of CM14
XXYYY
(LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER)
XXYYY
XXYYY XX : FP NUMBER (00-31)[For Series 3200 R6.2/R7 or earlier]
XXYYY FP NUMBER (00-63)[For Series 3300 or later]
XXYYY YYY : PORT NUMBER (000-127)
XXYYY
(LTXX) CARD SLOT NUMBER

01071 01079 01087 01095 01103 01111 01119 01127

01070 01078 01086 01094 01102 01110 01118 01126
01069 01077 01085 01093 01101 01109 01117 01125
01068 01076 01084 01092 01100 01108 01116 01124
PIM3 01067 01075 01083 01091 01099 01107 01115 01123 01103 01111 01119 01127
01066 01074 01082 01090 01098 01106 01114 01122 01102 01110 01118 01126
01065 01073 01081 01089 01097 01105 01113 01121 01101 01109 01117 01125
01064 01072 01080 01088 01096 01104 01112 01120 01100 01108 01116 01124
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

01007 01015 01023 01031 01039 01047 01055 01063

*
01006 01014 01022 01030 01038 01046 01054 01062
01005 01013 01021 01029 01037 01045 01053 01061
01004 01012 01020 01028 01036 01044 01052 01060
PIM2 01003 01011 01019 01027 01035 01043 01051 01059 01039 01047 01055 01063
01002 01010 01018 01026 01034 01042 01050 01058 01038 01046 01054 01062
01001 01009 01017 01025 01033 01041 01049 01057 01037 01045 01053 01061
01000 01008 01016 01024 01032 01040 01048 01056 01036 01044 01052 01060
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

00071 00079 00087 00095 00103 00111 00119 00127

*
00070 00078 00086 00094 00102 00110 00118 00126
00069 00077 00085 00093 00101 00109 00117 00125
00068 00076 00084 00092 00100 00108 00116 00124
PIM1 00067 00075 00083 00091 00099 00107 00115 00123 00103 00111 00119 00127
00066 00074 00082 00090 00098 00106 00114 00122 00102 00110 00118 00126
00065 00073 00081 00089 00097 00105 00113 00121 00101 00109 00117 00125
00064 00072 00080 00088 00096 00104 00112 00120 00100 00108 00116 00124
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

00007 00015 00023 00031 00039 00047 00055 00063

*
00006 00014 00022 00030 00038 00046 00054 00062
00005 00013 00021 00029 00037 00045 00053 00061
00004 00012 00020 00028 00036 00044 00052 00060
PIM0 00003 00011 00019 00027 00035 00043 00051 00059 00039 00047 00055 00063
00002 00010 00018 00026 00034 00042 00050 00058 00038 00046 00054 00062
00001 00009 00017 00025 00033 00041 00049 00057 00037 00045 00053 00061
00000 00008 00016 00024 00032 00040 00048 00056 00036 00044 00052 00060
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 146 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• LEN 02000 - 03127 (PIM4 - 7)

Location of each LEN (CM14)

03071 03079 03087 03095 03103 03111 03119 03127

03070 03078 03086 03094 03102 03110 03118 03126
03069 03077 03085 03093 03101 03109 03117 03125
03068 03076 03084 03092 03100 03108 03116 03124
PIM7 03067 03075 03083 03091 03099 03107 03115 03123 03103 03111 03119 03127
03066 03074 03082 03090 03098 03106 03114 03122 03102 03110 03118 03126
03065 03073 03081 03089 03097 03105 03113 03121 03101 03109 03117 03125
03064 03072 03080 03088 03096 03104 03112 03120 03100 03108 03116 03124
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

03007 03015 03023 03031 03039 03047 03055 03063

*
03006 03014 03022 03030 03038 03046 03054 03062
03005 03013 03021 03029 03037 03045 03053 03061
03004 03012 03020 03028 03036 03044 03052 03060
PIM6 03003 03011 03019 03027 03035 03043 03051 03059 03039 03047 03055 03063
03002 03010 03018 03026 03034 03042 03050 03058 03038 03046 03054 03062
03001 03009 03017 03025 03033 03041 03049 03057 03037 03045 03053 03061
03000 03008 03016 03024 03032 03040 03048 03056 03036 03044 03052 03060
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

02071 02079 02087 02095 02103 02111 02119 02127

*
02070 02078 02086 02094 02102 02110 02118 02126
02069 02077 02085 02093 02101 02109 02117 02125
02068 02076 02084 02092 02100 02108 02116 02124
PIM5 02067 02075 02083 02091 02099 02107 02115 02123 02103 02111 02119 02127
02066 02074 02082 02090 02098 02106 02114 02122 02102 02110 02118 02126
02065 02073 02081 02089 02097 02105 02113 02121 02101 02109 02117 02125
02064 02072 02080 02088 02096 02104 02112 02120 02100 02108 02116 02124
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

02007 02015 02023 02031 02039 02047 02055 02063

*
02006 02014 02022 02030 02038 02046 02054 02062
02005 02013 02021 02029 02037 02045 02053 02061
02004 02012 02020 02028 02036 02044 02052 02060
PIM4 02003 02011 02019 02027 02035 02043 02051 02059 02039 02047 02055 02063
02002 02010 02018 02026 02034 02042 02050 02058 02038 02046 02054 02062
02001 02009 02017 02025 02033 02041 02049 02057 02037 02045 02053 02061
02000 02008 02016 02024 02032 02040 02048 02056 02036 02044 02052 02060
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 147 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• LEN 000 - 363 (PIM0 - 3)

Location of each LEN (CM10)

XYY
XYY
LEN of CM10
XYY
(LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER)
XYY
XYY X : PIM NUMBER (0-7)
XYY YY : PORT NUMBER (00-63)
XYY
XYY
(LTXX) CARD SLOT NUMBER

307 315 323 331 339 347 355 363

306 314 322 330 338 346 354 362
305 313 321 329 337 345 353 361
304 312 320 328 336 344 352 360
PIM3 303 311 319 327 335 343 351 359 339 347 355 363
302 310 318 326 334 342 350 358 338 346 354 362
301 309 317 325 333 341 349 357 337 345 353 361
300 308 316 324 332 340 348 356 336 344 352 360
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

207 215 223 231 239 247 255 263

*
206 214 222 230 238 246 254 262
205 213 221 229 237 245 253 261
204 212 220 228 236 244 252 260
PIM2 203 211 219 227 235 243 251 259 239 247 255 263
202 210 218 226 234 242 250 258 238 246 254 262
201 209 217 225 233 241 249 257 237 245 253 261
200 208 216 224 232 240 248 256 236 244 252 260
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

107 115 123 131 139 147 155 163

*
106 114 122 130 138 146 154 162
105 113 121 129 137 145 153 161
104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160
PIM1 103 111 119 127 135 143 151 159 139 147 155 163
102 110 118 126 134 142 150 158 138 146 154 162
101 109 117 125 133 141 149 157 137 145 153 161
100 108 116 124 132 140 148 156 136 144 152 160
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

007 015 023 031 039 047 055 063

*
006 014 022 030 038 046 054 062
005 013 021 029 037 045 053 061
004 012 020 028 036 044 052 060
PIM0 003 011 019 027 035 043 051 059 039 047 055 063
002 010 018 026 034 042 050 058 038 046 054 062
001 009 017 025 033 041 049 057 037 045 053 061
000 008 016 024 032 040 048 056 036 044 052 060
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 148 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• LEN 400 - 763 (PIM4 - 7)

Location of each LEN (CM10)

707 715 723 731 739 747 755 763

706 714 722 730 738 746 754 762
705 713 721 729 737 745 753 761
704 712 720 728 736 744 752 760
PIM7 703 711 719 727 735 743 751 759 739 747 755 763
702 710 718 726 734 742 750 758 738 746 754 762
701 709 717 725 733 741 749 757 737 745 753 761
700 708 716 724 732 740 748 756 736 744 752 760
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

607 615 623 631 639 647 655 663

*
606 614 622 630 638 646 654 662
605 613 621 629 637 645 653 661
604 612 620 628 636 644 652 660
PIM6 603 611 619 627 635 643 651 659 639 647 655 663
602 610 618 626 634 642 650 658 638 646 654 662
601 609 617 625 633 641 649 657 637 645 653 661
600 608 616 624 632 640 648 656 636 644 652 660
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

507 515 523 531 539 547 555 563

*
506 514 522 530 538 546 554 562
505 513 521 529 537 545 553 561
504 512 520 528 536 544 552 560
PIM5 503 511 519 527 535 543 551 559 539 547 555 563
502 510 518 526 534 542 550 558 538 546 554 562
501 509 517 525 533 541 549 557 537 545 553 561
500 508 516 524 532 540 548 556 536 544 552 560
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

407 415 423 431 439 447 455 463

*
406 414 422 430 438 446 454 462
405 413 421 429 437 445 453 461
404 412 420 428 436 444 452 460
PIM4 403 411 419 427 435 443 451 459 439 447 455 463
402 410 418 426 434 442 450 458 438 446 454 462
401 409 417 425 433 441 449 457 437 445 453 461
400 408 416 424 432 440 448 456 436 444 452 460
(LT00) (LT01) (LT02) (LT03) (LT04) (LT05) (LT06) (LT07) (LT08) (LT09) (LT10) (LT11)

*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 149 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement

This figure shows the LTC Connector Pin Arrangement.

(1) LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)

• PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 151

• PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 152
• PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 153
• PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 154
• PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 155
• PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 156
• PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 157
• PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 158

(2) LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)

• PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 159

• PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 160
• PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 161
• PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 162
• PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 163
• PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 164
• PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 165
• PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3) Page 166

– 150 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN00000 1 26 LEN00024
2 27 00001 2 27 00025
LT03/AP03
3 28 00002 3 28 00026
4 29 00003 4 29 00027
LT00/AP00
5 30 00004 5 30 00028
6 31 00005 6 31 00029
7 32 00006 7 32 00030
8 33 00007 8 33 00031
9 34 00008 9 34 00032
10 35 00009 10 35 00033
LT04/AP04
11 36 00010 11 36 00034
12 37 00011 12 37 00035
LT01/AP01
13 38 00012 13 38 00036
14 39 00013 14 39 00037
15 40 00014 15 40 00038
16 41 00015 16 41 00039
17 42 00016 17 42 00040
18 43 00017 18 43 00041
LT05/AP05
19 44 00018 19 44 00042
20 45 00019 20 45 00043
LT02/AP02
21 46 00020 21 46 00044
22 47 00021 22 47 00045
23 48 00022 23 48 00046
24 49 LEN00023 24 49 LEN00047
25 MJ 50 MN 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN00048 1 26 LEN00044
2 27 00049 2 27 00045
LT09/AP09*
3 28 00050 3 28 00046
4 29 00051 4 29 00047
LT06/AP06
5 30 00052 5 30
6 31 00053 6 31
7 32 00054 7 32
8 33 00055 8 33
9 34 00056 9 34 00052
10 35 00057 10 35 00053
LT10/AP10*
11 36 00058 11 36 00054
12 37 00059 12 37 00055
LT07/AP07
13 38 00060 13 38
14 39 00061 14 39
15 40 00062 15 40
16 41 00063 16 41
17 42 00036 17 42 00060
18 43 00037 18 43 00061
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 00038 19 44 00062
20 45 LEN00039 20 45 LEN00063
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 151 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN00064 1 26 LEN00088
2 27 00065 2 27 00089
LT03/AP03
3 28 00066 3 28 00090
4 29 00067 4 29 00091
LT00/AP00
5 30 00068 5 30 00092
6 31 00069 6 31 00093
7 32 00070 7 32 00094
8 33 00071 8 33 00095
9 34 00072 9 34 00096
10 35 00073 10 35 00097
LT04/AP04
11 36 00074 11 36 00098
12 37 00075 12 37 00099
LT01/AP01
13 38 00076 13 38 00100
14 39 00077 14 39 00101
15 40 00078 15 40 00102
16 41 00079 16 41 00103
17 42 00080 17 42 00104
18 43 00081 18 43 00105
LT05/AP05
19 44 00082 19 44 00106
20 45 00083 20 45 00107
LT02/AP02
21 46 00084 21 46 00108
22 47 00085 22 47 00109
23 48 00086 23 48 00110
24 49 LEN00087 24 49 LEN00111
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN00112 1 26 LEN00108
2 27 00113 2 27 00109
LT09/AP09*
3 28 00114 3 28 00110
4 29 00115 4 29 00111
LT06/AP06
5 30 00116 5 30
6 31 00117 6 31
7 32 00118 7 32
8 33 00119 8 33
9 34 00120 9 34 00116
10 35 00121 10 35 00117
LT10/AP10*
11 36 00122 11 36 00118
12 37 00123 12 37 00119
LT07/AP07
13 38 00124 13 38
14 39 00125 14 39
15 40 00126 15 40
16 41 00127 16 41
17 42 00100 17 42 00124
18 43 00101 18 43 00125
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 00102 19 44 00126
20 45 LEN00103 20 45 LEN00127
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 152 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN01000 1 26 LEN01024
2 27 01001 2 27 01025
LT03/AP03
3 28 01002 3 28 01026
4 29 01003 4 29 01027
LT00/AP00
5 30 01004 5 30 01028
6 31 01005 6 31 01029
7 32 01006 7 32 01030
8 33 01007 8 33 01031
9 34 01008 9 34 01032
10 35 01009 10 35 01033
LT04/AP04
11 36 01010 11 36 01034
12 37 01011 12 37 01035
LT01/AP01
13 38 01012 13 38 01036
14 39 01013 14 39 01037
15 40 01014 15 40 01038
16 41 01015 16 41 01039
17 42 01016 17 42 01040
18 43 01017 18 43 01041
LT05/AP05
19 44 01018 19 44 01042
20 45 01019 20 45 01043
LT02/AP02
21 46 01020 21 46 01044
22 47 01021 22 47 01045
23 48 01022 23 48 01046
24 49 LEN01023 24 49 LEN01047
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN01048 1 26 LEN01044
2 27 01049 2 27 01045
LT09/AP09*
3 28 01050 3 28 01046
4 29 01051 4 29 01047
LT06/AP06
5 30 01052 5 30
6 31 01053 6 31
7 32 01054 7 32
8 33 01055 8 33
9 34 01056 9 34 01052
10 35 01057 10 35 01053
LT10/AP10*
11 36 01058 11 36 01054
12 37 01059 12 37 01055
LT07/AP07
13 38 01060 13 38
14 39 01061 14 39
15 40 01062 15 40
16 41 01063 16 41
17 42 01036 17 42 01060
18 43 01037 18 43 01061
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 01038 19 44 01062
20 45 LEN01039 20 45 LEN01063
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 153 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN01064 1 26 LEN01088
2 27 01065 2 27 01089
LT03/AP03
3 28 01066 3 28 01090
4 29 01067 4 29 01091
LT00/AP00
5 30 01068 5 30 01092
6 31 01069 6 31 01093
7 32 01070 7 32 01094
8 33 01071 8 33 01095
9 34 01072 9 34 01096
10 35 01073 10 35 01097
LT04/AP04
11 36 01074 11 36 01098
12 37 01075 12 37 01099
LT01/AP01
13 38 01076 13 38 01100
14 39 01077 14 39 01101
15 40 01078 15 40 01102
16 41 01079 16 41 01103
17 42 01080 17 42 01104
18 43 01081 18 43 01105
LT05/AP05
19 44 01082 19 44 01106
20 45 01083 20 45 01107
LT02/AP02
21 46 01084 21 46 01108
22 47 01085 22 47 01109
23 48 01086 23 48 01110
24 49 LEN01087 24 49 LEN01111
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN01112 1 26 LEN01108
2 27 01113 2 27 01109
LT09/AP09*
3 28 01114 3 28 01110
4 29 01115 4 29 01111
LT06/AP06
5 30 01116 5 30
6 31 01117 6 31
7 32 01118 7 32
8 33 01119 8 33
9 34 01120 9 34 01116
10 35 01121 10 35 01117
LT10/AP10*
11 36 01122 11 36 01118
12 37 01123 12 37 01119
LT07/AP07
13 38 01124 13 38
14 39 01125 14 39
15 40 01126 15 40
16 41 01127 16 41
17 42 01100 17 42 01124
18 43 01101 18 43 01125
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 01102 19 44 01126
20 45 LEN01103 20 45 LEN01127
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 154 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN02000 1 26 LEN02024
2 27 02001 2 27 02025
LT03/AP03
3 28 02002 3 28 02026
4 29 02003 4 29 02027
LT00/AP00
5 30 02004 5 30 02028
6 31 02005 6 31 02029
7 32 02006 7 32 02030
8 33 02007 8 33 02031
9 34 02008 9 34 02032
10 35 02009 10 35 02033
LT04/AP04
11 36 02010 11 36 02034
12 37 02011 12 37 02035
LT01/AP01
13 38 02012 13 38 02036
14 39 02013 14 39 02037
15 40 02014 15 40 02038
16 41 02015 16 41 02039
17 42 02016 17 42 02040
18 43 02017 18 43 02041
LT05/AP05
19 44 02018 19 44 02042
20 45 02019 20 45 02043
LT02/AP02
21 46 02020 21 46 02044
22 47 02021 22 47 02045
23 48 02022 23 48 02046
24 49 LEN02023 24 49 LEN02047
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN02048 1 26 LEN02044
2 27 02049 2 27 02045
LT09/AP09*
3 28 02050 3 28 02046
4 29 02051 4 29 02047
LT06/AP06
5 30 02052 5 30
6 31 02053 6 31
7 32 02054 7 32
8 33 02055 8 33
9 34 02056 9 34 02052
10 35 02057 10 35 02053
LT10/AP10*
11 36 02058 11 36 02054
12 37 02059 12 37 02055
LT07/AP07
13 38 02060 13 38
14 39 02061 14 39
15 40 02062 15 40
16 41 02063 16 41
17 42 02036 17 42 02060
18 43 02037 18 43 02061
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 02038 19 44 02062
20 45 LEN02039 20 45 LEN02063
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 155 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN02064 1 26 LEN02088
2 27 02065 2 27 02089
LT03/AP03
3 28 02066 3 28 02090
4 29 02067 4 29 02091
LT00/AP00
5 30 02068 5 30 02092
6 31 02069 6 31 02093
7 32 02070 7 32 02094
8 33 02071 8 33 02095
9 34 02072 9 34 02096
10 35 02073 10 35 02097
LT04/AP04
11 36 02074 11 36 02098
12 37 02075 12 37 02099
LT01/AP01
13 38 02076 13 38 02100
14 39 02077 14 39 02101
15 40 02078 15 40 02102
16 41 02079 16 41 02103
17 42 02080 17 42 02104
18 43 02081 18 43 02105
LT05/AP05
19 44 02082 19 44 02106
20 45 02083 20 45 02107
LT02/AP02
21 46 02084 21 46 02108
22 47 02085 22 47 02109
23 48 02086 23 48 02110
24 49 LEN02087 24 49 LEN02111
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN02112 1 26 LEN02108
2 27 02113 2 27 02109
LT09/AP09*
3 28 02114 3 28 02110
4 29 02115 4 29 02111
LT06/AP06
5 30 02116 5 30
6 31 02117 6 31
7 32 02118 7 32
8 33 02119 8 33
9 34 02120 9 34 02116
10 35 02121 10 35 02117
LT10/AP10*
11 36 02122 11 36 02118
12 37 02123 12 37 02119
LT07/AP07
13 38 02124 13 38
14 39 02125 14 39
15 40 02126 15 40
16 41 02127 16 41
17 42 02100 17 42 02124
18 43 02101 18 43 02125
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 02102 19 44 02126
20 45 LEN02103 20 45 LEN02127
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 156 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN03000 1 26 LEN03024
2 27 03001 2 27 03025
LT03/AP03
3 28 03002 3 28 03026
4 29 03003 4 29 03027
LT00/AP00
5 30 03004 5 30 03028
6 31 03005 6 31 03029
7 32 03006 7 32 03030
8 33 03007 8 33 03031
9 34 03008 9 34 03032
10 35 03009 10 35 03033
LT04/AP04
11 36 03010 11 36 03034
12 37 03011 12 37 03035
LT01/AP01
13 38 03012 13 38 03036
14 39 03013 14 39 03037
15 40 03014 15 40 03038
16 41 03015 16 41 03039
17 42 03016 17 42 03040
18 43 03017 18 43 03041
LT05/AP05
19 44 03018 19 44 03042
20 45 03019 20 45 03043
LT02/AP02
21 46 03020 21 46 03044
22 47 03021 22 47 03045
23 48 03022 23 48 03046
24 49 LEN03023 24 49 LEN03047
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN03048 1 26 LEN03044
2 27 03049 2 27 03045
LT09/AP09*
3 28 03050 3 28 03046
4 29 03051 4 29 03047
LT06/AP06
5 30 03052 5 30
6 31 03053 6 31
7 32 03054 7 32
8 33 03055 8 33
9 34 03056 9 34 03052
10 35 03057 10 35 03053
LT10/AP10*
11 36 03058 11 36 03054
12 37 03059 12 37 03055
LT07/AP07
13 38 03060 13 38
14 39 03061 14 39
15 40 03062 15 40
16 41 03063 16 41
17 42 03036 17 42 03060
18 43 03037 18 43 03061
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 03038 19 44 03062
20 45 LEN03039 20 45 LEN03063
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 157 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM14)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN03064 1 26 LEN03088
2 27 03065 2 27 03089
LT03/AP03
3 28 03066 3 28 03090
4 29 03067 4 29 03091
LT00/AP00
5 30 03068 5 30 03092
6 31 03069 6 31 03093
7 32 03070 7 32 03094
8 33 03071 8 33 03095
9 34 03072 9 34 03096
10 35 03073 10 35 03097
LT04/AP04
11 36 03074 11 36 03098
12 37 03075 12 37 03099
LT01/AP01
13 38 03076 13 38 03100
14 39 03077 14 39 03101
15 40 03078 15 40 03102
16 41 03079 16 41 03103
17 42 03080 17 42 03104
18 43 03081 18 43 03105
LT05/AP05
19 44 03082 19 44 03106
20 45 03083 20 45 03107
LT02/AP02
21 46 03084 21 46 03108
22 47 03085 22 47 03109
23 48 03086 23 48 03110
24 49 LEN03087 24 49 LEN03111
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN03112 1 26 LEN03108
2 27 03113 2 27 03109
LT09/AP09*
3 28 03114 3 28 03110
4 29 03115 4 29 03111
LT06/AP06
5 30 03116 5 30
6 31 03117 6 31
7 32 03118 7 32
8 33 03119 8 33
9 34 03120 9 34 03116
10 35 03121 10 35 03117
LT10/AP10*
11 36 03122 11 36 03118
12 37 03123 12 37 03119
LT07/AP07
13 38 03124 13 38
14 39 03125 14 39
15 40 03126 15 40
16 41 03127 16 41
17 42 03100 17 42 03124
18 43 03101 18 43 03125
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 03102 19 44 03126
20 45 LEN03103 20 45 LEN03127
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 158 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN000 1 26 LEN024
2 27 001 2 27 025
LT03/AP03
3 28 002 3 28 026
4 29 003 4 29 027
LT00/AP00
5 30 004 5 30 028
6 31 005 6 31 029
7 32 006 7 32 030
8 33 007 8 33 031
9 34 008 9 34 032
10 35 009 10 35 033
LT04/AP04
11 36 010 11 36 034
12 37 011 12 37 035
LT01/AP01
13 38 012 13 38 036
14 39 013 14 39 037
15 40 014 15 40 038
16 41 015 16 41 039
17 42 016 17 42 040
18 43 017 18 43 041
LT05/AP05
19 44 018 19 44 042
20 45 019 20 45 043
LT02/AP02
21 46 020 21 46 044
22 47 021 22 47 045
23 48 022 23 48 046
24 49 LEN023 24 49 LEN047
25 MJ 50 MN 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN048 1 26 LEN044
2 27 049 2 27 045
LT09/AP09*
3 28 050 3 28 046
4 29 051 4 29 047
LT06/AP06
5 30 052 5 30
6 31 053 6 31
7 32 054 7 32
8 33 055 8 33
9 34 056 9 34 052
10 35 057 10 35 053
LT10/AP10*
11 36 058 11 36 054
12 37 059 12 37 055
LT07/AP07
13 38 060 13 38
14 39 061 14 39
15 40 062 15 40
16 41 063 16 41
17 42 036 17 42 060
18 43 037 18 43 061
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 038 19 44 062
20 45 LEN039 20 45 LEN063
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 159 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN100 1 26 LEN124
2 27 101 2 27 125
LT03/AP03
3 28 102 3 28 126
4 29 103 4 29 127
LT00/AP00
5 30 104 5 30 128
6 31 105 6 31 129
7 32 106 7 32 130
8 33 107 8 33 131
9 34 108 9 34 132
10 35 109 10 35 133
LT04/AP04
11 36 110 11 36 134
12 37 111 12 37 135
LT01/AP01
13 38 112 13 38 136
14 39 113 14 39 137
15 40 114 15 40 138
16 41 115 16 41 139
17 42 116 17 42 140
18 43 117 18 43 141
LT05/AP05
19 44 118 19 44 142
20 45 119 20 45 143
LT02/AP02
21 46 120 21 46 144
22 47 121 22 47 145
23 48 122 23 48 146
24 49 LEN123 24 49 LEN147
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN148 1 26 LEN144
2 27 149 2 27 145
LT09/AP09*
3 28 150 3 28 146
4 29 151 4 29 147
LT06/AP06
5 30 152 5 30
6 31 153 6 31
7 32 154 7 32
8 33 155 8 33
9 34 156 9 34 152
10 35 157 10 35 153
LT10/AP10*
11 36 158 11 36 154
12 37 159 12 37 155
LT07/AP07
13 38 160 13 38
14 39 161 14 39
15 40 162 15 40
16 41 163 16 41
17 42 136 17 42 160
18 43 137 18 43 161
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 138 19 44 162
20 45 LEN139 20 45 LEN163
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 160 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN200 1 26 LEN224
2 27 201 2 27 225
LT03/AP03
3 28 202 3 28 226
4 29 203 4 29 227
LT00/AP00
5 30 204 5 30 228
6 31 205 6 31 229
7 32 206 7 32 230
8 33 207 8 33 231
9 34 208 9 34 232
10 35 209 10 35 233
LT04/AP04
11 36 210 11 36 234
12 37 211 12 37 235
LT01/AP01
13 38 212 13 38 236
14 39 213 14 39 237
15 40 214 15 40 238
16 41 215 16 41 239
17 42 216 17 42 240
18 43 217 18 43 241
LT05/AP05
19 44 218 19 44 242
20 45 219 20 45 243
LT02/AP02
21 46 220 21 46 244
22 47 221 22 47 245
23 48 222 23 48 246
24 49 LEN223 24 49 LEN247
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN248 1 26 LEN244
2 27 249 2 27 245
LT09/AP09*
3 28 250 3 28 246
4 29 251 4 29 247
LT06/AP06
5 30 252 5 30
6 31 253 6 31
7 32 254 7 32
8 33 255 8 33
9 34 256 9 34 252
10 35 257 10 35 253
LT10/AP10*
11 36 258 11 36 254
12 37 259 12 37 255
LT07/AP07
13 38 260 13 38
14 39 261 14 39
15 40 262 15 40
16 41 263 16 41
17 42 236 17 42 260
18 43 237 18 43 261
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 238 19 44 262
20 45 LEN239 20 45 LEN263
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 161 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN300 1 26 LEN324
2 27 301 2 27 325
LT03/AP03
3 28 302 3 28 326
4 29 303 4 29 327
LT00/AP00
5 30 304 5 30 328
6 31 305 6 31 329
7 32 306 7 32 330
8 33 307 8 33 331
9 34 308 9 34 332
10 35 309 10 35 333
LT04/AP04
11 36 310 11 36 334
12 37 311 12 37 335
LT01/AP01
13 38 312 13 38 336
14 39 313 14 39 337
15 40 314 15 40 338
16 41 315 16 41 339
17 42 316 17 42 340
18 43 317 18 43 341
LT05/AP05
19 44 318 19 44 342
20 45 319 20 45 343
LT02/AP02
21 46 320 21 46 344
22 47 321 22 47 345
23 48 322 23 48 346
24 49 LEN323 24 49 LEN347
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN348 1 26 LEN344
2 27 349 2 27 345
LT09/AP09*
3 28 350 3 28 346
4 29 351 4 29 347
LT06/AP06
5 30 352 5 30
6 31 353 6 31
7 32 354 7 32
8 33 355 8 33
9 34 356 9 34 352
10 35 357 10 35 353
LT10/AP10*
11 36 358 11 36 354
12 37 359 12 37 355
LT07/AP07
13 38 360 13 38
14 39 361 14 39
15 40 362 15 40
16 41 363 16 41
17 42 336 17 42 360
18 43 337 18 43 361
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 338 19 44 362
20 45 LEN339 20 45 LEN363
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 162 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN400 1 26 LEN424
2 27 401 2 27 425
LT03/AP03
3 28 402 3 28 426
4 29 403 4 29 427
LT00/AP00
5 30 404 5 30 428
6 31 405 6 31 429
7 32 406 7 32 430
8 33 407 8 33 431
9 34 408 9 34 432
10 35 409 10 35 433
LT04/AP04
11 36 410 11 36 434
12 37 411 12 37 435
LT01/AP01
13 38 412 13 38 436
14 39 413 14 39 437
15 40 414 15 40 438
16 41 415 16 41 439
17 42 416 17 42 440
18 43 417 18 43 441
LT05/AP05
19 44 418 19 44 442
20 45 419 20 45 443
LT02/AP02
21 46 420 21 46 444
22 47 421 22 47 445
23 48 422 23 48 446
24 49 LEN423 24 49 LEN447
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN448 1 26 LEN444
2 27 449 2 27 445
LT09/AP09*
3 28 450 3 28 446
4 29 451 4 29 447
LT06/AP06
5 30 452 5 30
6 31 453 6 31
7 32 454 7 32
8 33 455 8 33
9 34 456 9 34 452
10 35 457 10 35 453
LT10/AP10*
11 36 458 11 36 454
12 37 459 12 37 455
LT07/AP07
13 38 460 13 38
14 39 461 14 39
15 40 462 15 40
16 41 463 16 41
17 42 436 17 42 460
18 43 437 18 43 461
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 438 19 44 462
20 45 LEN439 20 45 LEN463
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 163 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN500 1 26 LEN524
2 27 501 2 27 525
LT03/AP03
3 28 502 3 28 526
4 29 503 4 29 527
LT00/AP00
5 30 504 5 30 528
6 31 505 6 31 529
7 32 506 7 32 530
8 33 507 8 33 531
9 34 508 9 34 532
10 35 509 10 35 533
LT04/AP04
11 36 510 11 36 534
12 37 511 12 37 535
LT01/AP01
13 38 512 13 38 536
14 39 513 14 39 537
15 40 514 15 40 538
16 41 515 16 41 539
17 42 516 17 42 540
18 43 517 18 43 541
LT05/AP05
19 44 518 19 44 542
20 45 519 20 45 543
LT02/AP02
21 46 520 21 46 544
22 47 521 22 47 545
23 48 522 23 48 546
24 49 LEN523 24 49 LEN547
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN548 1 26 LEN544
2 27 549 2 27 545
LT09/AP09*
3 28 550 3 28 546
4 29 551 4 29 547
LT06/AP06
5 30 552 5 30
6 31 553 6 31
7 32 554 7 32
8 33 555 8 33
9 34 556 9 34 552
10 35 557 10 35 553
LT10/AP10*
11 36 558 11 36 554
12 37 559 12 37 555
LT07/AP07
13 38 560 13 38
14 39 561 14 39
15 40 562 15 40
16 41 563 16 41
17 42 536 17 42 560
18 43 537 18 43 561
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 538 19 44 562
20 45 LEN539 20 45 LEN563
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 164 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN600 1 26 LEN624
2 27 601 2 27 625
LT03/AP03
3 28 602 3 28 626
4 29 603 4 29 627
LT00/AP00
5 30 604 5 30 628
6 31 605 6 31 629
7 32 606 7 32 630
8 33 607 8 33 631
9 34 608 9 34 632
10 35 609 10 35 633
LT04/AP04
11 36 610 11 36 634
12 37 611 12 37 635
LT01/AP01
13 38 612 13 38 636
14 39 613 14 39 637
15 40 614 15 40 638
16 41 615 16 41 639
17 42 616 17 42 640
18 43 617 18 43 641
LT05/AP05
19 44 618 19 44 642
20 45 619 20 45 643
LT02/AP02
21 46 620 21 46 644
22 47 621 22 47 645
23 48 622 23 48 646
24 49 LEN623 24 49 LEN647
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN648 1 26 LEN644
2 27 649 2 27 645
LT09/AP09*
3 28 650 3 28 646
4 29 651 4 29 647
LT06/AP06
5 30 652 5 30
6 31 653 6 31
7 32 654 7 32
8 33 655 8 33
9 34 656 9 34 652
10 35 657 10 35 653
LT10/AP10*
11 36 658 11 36 654
12 37 659 12 37 655
LT07/AP07
13 38 660 13 38
14 39 661 14 39
15 40 662 15 40
16 41 663 16 41
17 42 636 17 42 660
18 43 637 18 43 661
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 638 19 44 662
20 45 LEN639 20 45 LEN663
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 165 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

• PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement (CM10)

LTC0 LTC1
1 26 LEN700 1 26 LEN724
2 27 701 2 27 725
LT03/AP03
3 28 702 3 28 726
4 29 703 4 29 727
LT00/AP00
5 30 704 5 30 728
6 31 705 6 31 729
7 32 706 7 32 730
8 33 707 8 33 731
9 34 708 9 34 732
10 35 709 10 35 733
LT04/AP04
11 36 710 11 36 734
12 37 711 12 37 735
LT01/AP01
13 38 712 13 38 736
14 39 713 14 39 737
15 40 714 15 40 738
16 41 715 16 41 739
17 42 716 17 42 740
18 43 717 18 43 741
LT05/AP05
19 44 718 19 44 742
20 45 719 20 45 743
LT02/AP02
21 46 720 21 46 744
22 47 721 22 47 745
23 48 722 23 48 746
24 49 LEN723 24 49 LEN747
25 50 25 50

LTC2 LTC3
1 26 LEN748 1 26 LEN744
2 27 749 2 27 745
LT09/AP09*
3 28 750 3 28 746
4 29 751 4 29 747
LT06/AP06
5 30 752 5 30
6 31 753 6 31
7 32 754 7 32
8 33 755 8 33
9 34 756 9 34 752
10 35 757 10 35 753
LT10/AP10*
11 36 758 11 36 754
12 37 759 12 37 755
LT07/AP07
13 38 760 13 38
14 39 761 14 39
15 40 762 15 40
16 41 763 16 41
17 42 736 17 42 760
18 43 737 18 43 761
LT08/AP08* LT11/AP11*
19 44 738 19 44 762
20 45 LEN739 20 45 LEN763
21 46 21 46
22 47 22 47
23 48 23 48
24 49 24 49
25 50 25 50

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port or 16-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.

– 166 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

MDF Cross Connections

This table shows the cross connections on the MDF for LTC0 - LTC3.

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection

NOTE 1: PIN No.46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC3 cannot be used.

NOTE 2: PIN No.46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC2 and LTC3 cannot be used.
NOTE 3: For the Digital Trunk Interface card, use the different LTC connector from the analog line/trunk
card. The digital line should be separated from the analog line.

TYPE OF INTERFACE
RUNNING STATION 2-W 4-W
PIN SLOTS CO LDT DID SLT
CABLE CABLE E&M E&M
8COT 4COT 4LDT 2LDT 2ODT 4ODT 2ODT 4ODT 4DIT 2DIT 8LC 4LC LLC
26 WH-BL GN T0 T0 T0 T0 T0 T0 TxT0 TxT0 T0 T0 T0 T0 T0
1 BL-WH RD R0 R0 R0 R0 R0 R0 TxR0 TxR0 R0 R0 R0 R0 R0
27 WH-OR BK T1 T1 T1 T1 RcvT0 RcvT0 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
2 OR-WH YL R1 R1 R1 R1 RcvR0 RcvR0 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1
28 WH-GN GN T2 T2 T2 T2 T1 TxT1 TxT1 T2 T2 T2 T2
3 GN-WH RD R2 R2 R2 R2 R1 TxR1 TxR1 R2 R2 R2 R2
29 WH-BR BK T3 T3 T3 RcvT1 RcvT1 T3 T3 T3 T3
4 BR-WH YL R3 R3 R3 RcvR1 RcvR1 R3 R3 R3 R3
1
30 WH-SL GN T4 T2 TxT2 T4
5 SL-WH RD R4 R2 TxR2 R4
31 RD-BL BK T5 RcvT2 T5
6 BL-RD YL R5 RcvR2 R5
NOTE 1
32 RD-OR GN T6 T3 TxT3 T6
7 OR-RD RD R6 R3 TxR3 R6
33 RD-GN BK T7 RcvT3 T7
8 GN-RD YL R7 RcvR3 R7
Continued on next page

– 167 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information

TYPE OF INTERFACE
RUNNING STATION 2-W 4-W
PIN SLOTS CO LDT DID SLT
CABLE CABLE E&M E&M
8COT 4COT 4LDT 2LDT 2ODT 4ODT 2ODT 4ODT 4DIT 2DIT 8LC 4LC LLC
34 RD-BR GN T0 T0 T0 T0 T0 T0 TxT0 TxT0 T0 T0 T0 T0 T0
9 BR-RD RD R0 R0 R0 R0 R0 R0 TxR0 TxR0 R0 R0 R0 R0 R0
35 RD-SL BK T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 RcvT0 RcvT0 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
10 SL-RD YL R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 RcvR0 RcvR0 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1
36 BK-BL GN T2 T2 T2 T1 TxT1 TxT1 T2 T2 T2 T2
11 BL-BK RD R2 R2 R2 R1 TxR1 TxR1 R2 R2 R2 R2
37 BK-OR BK T3 T3 T3 RcvT1 RcvT1 T3 T3 T3 T3
12 OR-BK YL R3 R3 R3 RcvR1 RcvR1 R3 R3 R3 R3
2
38 BK-GN GN T4 T2 TxT2 T4
13 GN-BK RD R4 R2 TxR2 R4
39 BK-BR BK T5 RcvT2 T5
14 BR-BK YL R5 RcvR2 R5
NOTE 1
40 BK-SL GN T6 T3 TxT3 T6
15 SL-BK RD R6 R3 TxR3 R6
41 YL-BL BK T7 RcvT3 T7
16 BL-YL YL R7 RcvR3 R7
Continued on next page

– 168 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information

TYPE OF INTERFACE
RUNNING STATION 2-W 4-W
PIN SLOTS CO LDT DID SLT
CABLE CABLE E&M E&M
8COT 4COT 4LDT 2LDT 2ODT 4ODT 2ODT 4ODT 4DIT 2DIT 8LC 4LC LLC
42 YL-OR GN T0 T0 T0 T0 T0 T0 TxT0 TxT0 T0 T0 T0 T0 T0
17 OR-YL RD R0 R0 R0 R0 R0 R0 TxR0 TxR0 R0 R0 R0 R0 R0
43 YL-GN BK T1 T1 T1 T1 RcvT0 RcvT0 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
18 GN-YL YL R1 R1 R1 R1 RcvR0 RcvR0 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1
44 YL-BR GN T2 T2 T2 T2 T1 TxT1 TxT1 T2 T2 T2 T2
19 BR-YL RD R2 R2 R2 R2 R1 TxR1 TxR1 R2 R2 R2 R2
45 YL-SL BK T3 T3 T3 RcvT1 RcvT1 T3 T3 T3 T3
20 SL-YL YL R3 R3 R3 RcvR1 RcvR1 R3 R3 R3 R3
3
46 VI-BL GN T4 T2 TxT2 T4
21 BL-VI RD R4 R2 TxR2 R4
47 VI-OR BK T5 RcvT2 T5
22 OR-VI YL R5 RcvR2 R5
NOTE 2
48 VI-GN GN T6 T3 TxT3 T6
23 GN-VI RD R6 R3 TxR3 R6
49 VI-BR BK T7 RcvT3 T7
24 BR-VI YL R7 RcvR3 R7
50 VI-SL MN*
25 SL-VI MJ*
Continued on next page

* PIN No.50, 25 in PIM0 are connected to external indication equipment for major card minor alarm.

– 169 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information

TYPE OF INTERFACE
2wire Dterm/ EXT. EXT.
Digital
RUNNING STATION SMARTCON/ KEY/ PAGE/
PIN SLOTS TRK
CABLE CABLE DSSCON/ EXT. MOH/
NOTE 3
DESKCON RELAY BGM
8DLC 4DLC 2DLC DK00 4COT DTI
26 WH-BL GN T0 T0 T0 K1 T RA
1 BL-WH RD R0 R0 R0 K0 R RB
27 WH-OR BK T1 T1 T1 K3 T TA
2 OR-WH YL R1 R1 R1 K2 R TB
28 WH-GN GN T2 T2 K5 T
3 GN-WH RD R2 R2 K4 R
29 WH-BR BK T3 T3 K7 T
4 BR-WH YL R3 R3 K6 R
1
30 WH-SL GN T4
5 SL-WH RD R4
31 RD-BL BK T5
6 BL-RD YL R5
NOTE 1
32 RD-OR GN T6
7 OR-RD RD R6
33 RD-GN BK T7
8 GN-RD YL R7
Continued on next page

– 170 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information

TYPE OF INTERFACE
2wire Dterm/ EXT. EXT.
Digital
RUNNING STATION SMARTCON/ KEY/ PAGE/
PIN SLOTS TRK
CABLE CABLE DSSCON/ EXT. MOH/
NOTE 3
DESKCON RELAY BGM
8DLC 4DLC 2DLC DK00 4COT DTI
34 RD-BR GN T0 T0 T0 K1 T RA
9 BR-RD RD R0 R0 R0 K0 R RB
35 RD-SL BK T1 T1 T1 K3 T TA
10 SL-RD YL R1 R1 R1 K2 R TB
36 BK-BL GN T2 T2 K5 T
11 BL-BK RD R2 R2 K4 R
37 BK-OR BK T3 T3 K7 T
12 OR-BK YL R3 R3 K6 R
2
38 BK-GN GN T4
13 GN-BK RD R4
39 BK-BR BK T5
14 BR-BK YL R5
NOTE 1
40 BK-SL GN T6
15 SL-BK RD R6
41 YL-BL BK T7
16 BL-YL YL R7
Continued on next page

– 171 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information

TYPE OF INTERFACE
2wire Dterm/ EXT. EXT.
Digital
RUNNING STATION SMARTCON/ KEY/ PAGE/
PIN SLOTS TRK
CABLE CABLE DSSCON/ EXT. MOH/
NOTE 3
DESKCON RELAY BGM
8DLC 4DLC 2DLC DK00 4COT DTI
42 YL-OR GN T0 T0 T0 K1 T RA
17 OR-YL RD R0 R0 R0 K0 R RB
43 YL-GN BK T1 T1 T1 K3 T TA
18 GN-YL YL R1 R1 R1 K2 R TB
44 YL-BR GN T2 T2 K5 T
19 BR-YL RD R2 R2 K4 R
45 YL-SL BK T3 T3 K7 T
20 SL-YL YL R3 R3 K6 R
3
46 VI-BL GN T4
21 BL-VI RD R4
47 VI-OR BK T5
22 OR-VI YL R5
NOTE 2
48 VI-GN GN T6
23 GN-VI RD R6
49 VI-BR BK T7
24 BR-VI YL R7
50 VI-SL MN*
25 SL-VI MJ*

* PIN No.50, 25 in PIM0 are connected to external indication equipment for major card minor alarm.

– 172 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2001.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Peripheral Equipment and Card List

REFERENCE
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT CARD
Page
Analog C.O. Trunk PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT Page 175
Tie Line Trunk PN-2LDT/PN-4LDT Page 176
PN-2ODT/PN-4ODT
DID Trunk PN-2DIT/PN-4DIT Page 185
Digital Trunk Interface PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB Page 186
PZ-M542/PZ-M557
Optical Fiber Interface PN-M10 Page 193
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB
POTS Splitter PN-M13 Page 197
PN-4LLCB/PN-8LCAA
In-Skin HUB PN-8ETIA/PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C Page 201
/PN-CP24-D
PZ-M675
Single Line Telephone PN-4LC/PN-8LC Page 203
PN-4LLC
Dterm/DSS Console PN-2DLC Page 205
PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC
SN716 DESKCON PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC Page 207
SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON PN-2DLC/PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC Page 237
Day/Night Mode Change by PN-DK00/PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C Page 245
External Key /PN-CP24-D
External TAS Indicator PN-DK00 Page 246
Paging Equipment PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT Page 249
PN-DK00/PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
External Tone Source/ PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT Page 252
Announcement Machine PN-TNTA
PN-DK00/PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C
/PN-CP24-D
External BGM Source PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT Page 257
PN-TNTA
Continued on next page

– 173 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Peripheral Equipment and Card List

REFERENCE
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT CARD
Page
Power Failure Transfer PN-8PFTB Page 259
PN-8LC
PN-8COT
Alarm Display Panel PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C Page 264
/PN-CP24-D
Built-in SMDR/MCI PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C Page 265
/PN-CP24-D
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/ PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D Page 269
Hotel Printer

– 174 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 Analog C.O. Trunk (COT)

Analog C.O. Trunk (COT)

MDF Cross Connection for C.O. Trunk Card

PIM0
LTC0
PN-8COT J P MDF

R0 1 1
LEN000 (No. 0)
T0 26 26

R1 2 2
LEN001 (No. 1)
T1 27 27

• • • •
LT00 • • • • TO C.O. LINE
• • • •
R6 7 7
LEN006 (No. 6)
T6 32 32

R7 8 8
LEN007 (No. 7)
T7 33 33

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN001 2 R1 27 T1 27 T1 2 R1
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
LEN006 7 R6 32 T6 32 T6 7 R6
LEN007 8 R7 33 T7 33 T7 8 R7

– 175 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

• LD Trunk (PN-2LDT/PN-4LDT)

MDF Cross Connection for LD Trunk Card

NOTE: For PN-4LDT card, mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the 4LDT
card.
PIM0
LTC0
PN-4LDT J P MDF

R0 1 1
LEN000 (No. 0) TO TIE LINE
T0 26 26

R1 2 2
LEN001 (No. 1) TO TIE LINE
T1 27 27
LT00
R2 3 3
LEN002 (No. 2) TO TIE LINE
T2 28 28

R3 4 4
LEN003 (No. 3) TO TIE LINE
T3 29 29

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN001 2 R1 27 T1 27 T1 2 R1
LEN002 3 R2 28 T2 28 T2 3 R2
LEN003 4 R3 29 T3 29 T3 4 R3

– 176 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

• 4W E&M Trunk (PN-2ODT)

When connecting the E and M, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the
PN-2ODT card.

NOTE: Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one PN-2ODT
card.

MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card

PIM0
INSTALLATION CABLE

PN-2ODT MDF
CN1
2
08

07

06

05
J
04 M1
LEN001 (No. 1)
03 E1

02 M0 (M)
LEN000 (No. 0)
01 E0 (E)
LTC0
LT00
J P

TxR0 1 1 (Tx Ring)

TxT0 26 26 (Tx Tip) TO TIE LINE

LEN000 (No. 0)
RcvR0 2 2 (Rcv Ring)

RcvT0 27 27 (Rcv Tip)

TxR1 3 3

TxT1 28 28
LEN001 (No. 1)
RcvR1 4 4

RcvT1 29 29

Continued on next page

– 177 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card

1 LTC CONNECTOR 2 CN1 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)
CN1
1 TxR0 26 TxT0 26 TxT0 1 TxR0
LEN000
2 RcvR0 27 RcvT0 27 RcvT0 2 RcvR0
3 TxR1 28 TxT1 28 TxT1 3 TxR1
LEN001
4 RcvR1 29 RcvT1 29 RcvT1 4 RcvR1

M1
LEN001
E1
M0
LEN000
E0

– 178 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

• 2W E&M Trunk (PN-2ODT)

When connecting the E and M, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the
PN-2ODT card.

NOTE: Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one PN-2ODT
card.

MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card

PIM0
INSTALLATION CABLE

PN-2ODT MDF
CN1
2
08

07

06

05
J
04 M1
LEN001 (No. 1)
03 E1

02 M0 (M)
LEN000 (No. 0)
01 E0 (E)
LTC0
LT00
J P

R0 1 1 (Ring)

T0 26 26 (Tip)
TO TIE LINE
LEN000 (No. 0)

R2 3 3

T2 28 28
LEN001 (No. 1)

Continued on next page

– 179 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card

1 LTC CONNECTOR 2 CN1 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)
CN1
1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN000
2 27 27 2
3 R2 28 T2 28 T2 3 R2
LEN001
4 29 29 4

M1
LEN001
E1
M0
LEN000
E0

– 180 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

• 4W E&M Trunk (PN-4ODT)

When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT00 to LT07 slots, connect speech line circuits 0 to 3 to the BWB con-
nector. In addition, connect circuits 0 to 3 for E and M to the CN2 and CN3 connectors on the front side of the card.

NOTE 1: When connecting the speech line circuits or E and M, make the installation cable by using the
connector attached with the PN-4ODTA card.
NOTE 2: When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT08 to LT11 slots, connect speech line circuits
0 and 1 to the BWB connector. In addition, connect speech line circuit 2 and 3 to the CN1 con-
nector on the front side of the card.

MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card

PIM0 INSTALLATION CABLE

PN-4ODT MDF
CN3
08 M7
07
LEN003
06 E7 (No.3)
05
04 M6 (M1)
03 (E1)
LEN002
02 E6 (No.2) (M0)
01 (E0)
2
CN2
08 M5
LTC0
07 J P
LEN001
06 E5 (No.1) TxR0 1 1 (TxRing)
05 TxT0 26 26 (TxTip)
LEN000
LT00 04 M4 RcvR0 2 2 (Rcv Ring)
(No.0)
03 RcvT0 27 27 (Rcv Tip) TO TIE LINE
LEN000
02 E4 TxR1 3 3 (TxRing)
(No.0)
01 TxT1 28 28 (TxTip)
LEN001
CN1 (No.1) RcvR1 4 4 (Rcv Ring)
08 M3 RcvT1 29 29 (Rcv Tip)
07 E3 TxR2 5 5
LEN003
06 M2 TxT2 30 30
(No.3) LEN002
05 E2 (No.2) RcvR2 6 6
04 M1 RcvT2 31 31
03 E1 TxR3 7 7
LEN002
02 M0 TxT3 32 32
(No.2) LEN003
01 E0 (No.3) RcvR3 8 8
RcvT3 33 33

1
Continued on next page

– 181 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card

1 LTC CONNECTOR 2 CN2 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)
CN2
1 TxR0 26 TxT0 26 TxT0 1 TxR0
LEN000
2 RcvR0 27 RcvT0 27 RcvT0 2 RcvR0 M1
3 TxR1 28 TxT1 28 TxT1 3 TxR1
LEN001
4 RcvR1 29 RcvT1 29 RcvT1 4 RcvR1 LEN001
E1

M0

LEN000
E0

– 182 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

• 2W E&M Trunk (PN-4ODT)

When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT00 to LT07 slots, connect speech line circuits 0 to 3 to the BWB con-
nector. In addition, connect circuits 0 to 3 for E and M to the CN2 and CN3 connectors on the front side of the card.

NOTE 1: When connecting the speech line circuits or E and M, make the installation cable by using the
connector attached with the PN-4ODTA card.
NOTE 2: When PN-4ODTA cards are accommodated in LT08 to LT11 slots, connect speech line circuits
0 and 1 to the BWB connector. In addition, connect speech line circuit 2 and 3 to the CN1 con-
nector on the front side of the card.

MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card

PIM0 INSTALLATION CABLE

PN-4ODT MDF
CN3
08 M7
07
LEN003
06 E7 (No.3)
05
04 M6 (M1)
03 (E1)
LEN002
02 E6 (No.2) (M0)
01 (E0)
2
CN2
08 M5
LTC0
07 J P
LEN001
06 E5 (No.1) R0 1 1 (Ring)
05 T0 26 26 (Tip)
LEN000
LT00 04 M4
(No.0)
03 TO TIE LINE
LEN000
02 E4 R1 3 3
(No.0)
01 T1 28 28
LEN001
CN1 (No.1)
08 M3
07 E3 R2 5 5
LEN003
06 M2 T2 30 30
(No.3) LEN002
05 E2 (No.2)
04 M1
03 E1 R3 7 7
LEN002
02 M0 T3 32 32
(No.2) LEN003
01 E0 (No.3)

1
Continued on next page

– 183 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card

1 LTC CONNECTOR 2 CN2 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)
CN2
1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN000
2 27 27 2 M1
3 R2 28 T2 28 T2 3 R2
LEN001 LEN001
4 29 29 4
E1

M0

LEN000
E0

– 184 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 DID Trunk (DIT)

DID Trunk (DIT)

• DID Trunk (PN-4DIT/PN-2DIT)

MDF Cross Connection for DID Trunk Card

PIM0
LTC0
PN-4DIT J P MDF

R0 1 1
LEN000 (No. 0) TO DID LINE
T0 26 26

R1 2 2
LEN001 (No. 1)
TO DID LINE
T1 27 27
LT00
R2 3 3
LEN002 (No. 2) TO DID LINE
T2 28 28

R3 4 4
LEN003 (No. 3) TO DID LINE
T3 29 29

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN001 2 R1 27 T1 27 T1 2 R1
LEN002 3 R2 28 T2 28 T2 3 R2
LEN003 4 R3 29 T3 29 T3 4 R3

– 185 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

• DTI for using a twisted pair cable (PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB)

When using a twisted-pair cable, connect the cable to a CSU via the MDF as shown below.

DTI Cable Connection via MDF

PBX
BWB

MDF
CSU
DTI
TWISTED-PAIR
CABLE
(SHIELD TYPE)

LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR

MAXIMUM 200 m (655 ft.) ...... 24DTI

MAXIMUM 400 m (1310 ft.) .... 30DTI
DTI:PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB

– 186 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

MDF Cross Connection for DTI Card

PIM0
LTC1
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB J P MDF

RECEIVE
AP05
RA 17 17 RA

RB 42 42 RB
TO CSU
TA 18 18 TA
TB 43 43 TB

TRANSFER

LTC1 (J) LTC1 (P)

17 RA 42 RB 42 RB 17 RA
18 TA 43 TB 43 TB 18 TA
19 44 44 19
20 45 45 20

– 187 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

• DTI for using a coaxial cable (PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M542/PZ-M557)

When using an coaxial cable, connect the cable to a CSU via the CONN (PZ-M542/PZ-M557) card
as shown below.

DTI Cable Connection via CONN Card

PBX
BWB

PN-
30DTC/ CSU
PN-DTA/
PN-DTB COAXIAL CABLE

CONN (PZ-M542/PZ-M557)
LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR

MAXIMUM 6 dB loss at 1024 kHz

– 188 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

Coaxial Cable Connection for DTI Card

PIM0

LTC1 PZ-M542/PZ-M557
PN-30DTC/PN-DTA/PN-DTB J P

AP05 RECEIVE
RA 17 17
RCV
RB 42 42
TO CSU
TA 18 18
TB 43 43 TRS

SEND

2
1

1 LTC1 CONNECTOR 2 COAXIAL CONNECTOR

LTC1 (J) LTC1 (P)

17 RA 42 RB 42 RB 17 RA
18 TA 43 TB 43 TB 18 TA
19 44 44 19
20 45 45 20

– 189 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

• Mounting of CONN Card (PZ-M542/PZ-M557)

STEP1: When using LTC0 or LTC2 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, take off the
PLATE from the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card. Then, overturn the PLATE and secure it to the card
with screws.
When using LTC1 or LTC3 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, skip STEP1.
NOTE: The PLATE and screws are attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.

Connection of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 and PLATE

PLATE

PZ-M542/PZ-M557

SCREW

– 190 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

STEP2: Connect the LT connector on the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the LTC connector on BWB in
PIM.
NOTE: Two PZ-M542/PZ-M557 cards cannot be mounted on the adjoining LTC connectors. LTC0 and
LTC2, or LTC0 and LTC3, or LTC1 and LTC3 are mountable.

Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card

PIM
LTC CONNECTOR

LTC
1
LTC
3
LTC
0
LTC
2

When connecting to LTC1 or LTC3 When connecting to LTC0 or LTC2

LTC CONNECTOR

LT CONNECTOR

PZ-M542/PZ-M557

– 191 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

STEP3: Secure the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER with one screw.

NOTE 1: Screw is attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.

NOTE 2: Before securing the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER, all the cards should
be mounted on the card slots and the PIM CARD STOPPER should be secured with screws. See
“MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS”. Page 275

Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card

CARD STOPPER
PZ-M542/PZ-M557
SCREW

– 192 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Optical Fiber Interface (M10)

Optical Fiber Interface (M10)

(1) Connection Outline

The optical fiber interface card (PN-M10) is available for DTI to DTI connection between the NEAX
2000 IPS/Retrofit system.

When you use an optical fiber to connect between the 24-channel T1 or 30-channel E1 Digital Trunk
Interface (DTI) card, connect the fiber each other to the CN1 connector of the M10 cards in both
sites. Two 24DTI cards or two 30DTI cards are connected to one M10 card, via MDF through LTC
connector on the BWB.

Outline of Optical Fiber Connection

OFFICE A OFFICE B

MDF MDF

PN-24DTA/ PN-24DTA/
PN-30DTC/ PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/ OPTICAL PN-DTA/
PN-DTB FIBER PN-DTB
M10 M10
SEND SEND

PN-24DTA/ RECEIVE RECEIVE PN-24DTA/

CN1 CN1
PN-30DTC/ PN-30DTC/
PN-DTA/ PN-DTA/
PN-DTB PN-DTB
MAXIMUM 10 km
(6.25 miles)

NOTE 1: The PN-M10 card must be directly connected to the PN-M10 card in opposite office.
NOTE 2: Connect two optical fibers which are used for receive and send signals to CN1 connector of the
M10 card. The upside of CN1 connector is used for sending and the downside is used for re-
ceiving.

– 193 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 Optical Fiber Interface (M10)

(2) Fiber Requirement

Size of fiber : Any size of Single Mode fiber
Kind of fiber optic connector : SC connector
Maximum distance : 10 km (6.25 mile)

(3) System Capacity for DTI to DTI connection

M10 card : Maximum 4 (One M10 card per two 24DTI or two 30DTC)
24DTI card : Maximum 8
30DTI card : Maximum 8

– 194 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Optical Fiber Interface (M10)

(4) MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for Optical Fiber Interface

PIM0

PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/ LTC3
PN-DTA/PN-DTB J P MDF

RECEIVE
AP09
RA 1 1 RA
RB 26 26 RB
TA 2 2 TA
TB 27 27 TB

1 SEND

PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC/ LTC3
PN-DTA/PN-DTB J P

RECEIVE
AP10
RA 9 9 RA
RB 34 34 RB
TA 10 10 TA
TB 35 35 TB

2 SEND

LTC1
PN-M10 J P RECEIVE

RA 19 19 RA
RB 44 44 RB
No. 1 TA 20 20 TA
TB 45 45 TB

SEND
LT05
RECEIVE
RA 17 17 RA
RB 42 42 RB
CN1 No. 0 TA 18 18 TA
TB 43 43 TB

3 SEND

SEND
To upside of CN1 connector of PN-M10 card in opposite office
RECEIVE
To downside of CN1 connector of PN-M10 card in opposite office
Continued on next page

– 195 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 Optical Fiber Interface (M10)

MDF Cross Connection for Optical Fiber Interface

1 LTC3 CONNECTOR

1 RA 26 RB 26 RB 1 RA
2 TA 27 TB 27 TB 2 TA
3 28 28 3
4 29 29 4

LTC (J) (P)

2 LTC3 CONNECTOR

9 RA 34 RB 34 RB 9 RA
10 TA 35 TB 35 TB 10 TA
11 36 36 11
12 37 37 12

LTC (J) (P)

3 LTC1 CONNECTOR

17 RA 42 RB 42 RB 17 RA
18 TA 43 TB 43 TB 18 TA
19 RA 44 RB 44 RB 19 RA
20 TA 45 TB 45 TB 20 TA

LTC (J) (P)

– 196 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 POTS Splitter (M13)

POTS Splitter (M13)

(1) Connection Outline

The POTS Splitter*1 card (PN-M13) is used to accommodate HomePNA*2/VDSL*3 modem. PN-M13
has 24-line built-in POTS Splitters and accommodates a maximum of 24-line HomePNA/VDSL
modems per card.

*1 POTS Splitter:
Plain Old Telephone Service Splitter. A device that rejects the Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) sig-
nal and allows the POTS frequencies to pass through.

*2 HomePNA:
Home Phoneline Networking Alliance. An association of companies working toward the adoption
of a single, unified phone line networking standard and bringing to market a range of interoperable
home networking solutions using in-place phone wiring.

*3 VDSL:
Very-high-data-rate Digital Subscriber Line. A technology, which accomplishes very high-speed
communications using Twisted Pair cable.

The following illustration shows the outline of POTS splitter connection.

Outline of POTS Splitter Connection

PBX MDF

PN-4LLCB/
HomePNA/
PN-8LCAA
VDSL
Adapter
PC

PN- NOTE
M13 POTS
Splitter
TEL

SPL CABLE-A

HomePNA/
VDSL
Modem

Internet Router HUB

NOTE: Length of connection cable depends on the specifications of HomePNA/VDSL Adapter/Modem.

– 197 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 POTS Splitter (M13)

(2) MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for POTS Splitter

NOTE: Mount the PN-M13 card in LT00-LT11 slot.

PIM0
LTC0
PN-4LLC J P MDF

R0 1 1
LEN000 (No. 0)
T0 26 26

R1 2 2
LEN001 (No. 1)
T1 27 27
LT00
R2 3 3
LEN002 (No. 2)
T2 28 28

R3 4 4
LEN003 (No. 3)
T3 29 29
INSTALLATION CABLE
SPL CABLE-A

PN-M13 1

B B
• • • •

• • • •

HomePNA/
• • •
• • •

VDSL
Adapter
LC
A
• •

• •

PC
• • •
• • •

B B
• • • •

• • • •

POTS Splitter

POTS Splitter
TEL
A
• •

• •

A
TO SINGLE
LINE TELEPHONE
2
HomePNA/
VDSL
Modem

TO
HUB Router INTERNET
SPL CABLE-A

Continued on next page

– 198 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 POTS Splitter (M13)

MDF Cross Connection for POTS Splitter

2CHAMP CONNECTOR FOR

CIRCUIT 1 CHAMP CONNECTOR
TELEPHONE/xDSL
NO. FOR LINE CIRCUIT
TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT
0 26 TI00 01 RI00 01 TO00 26 RO00
1 27 TI01 02 RI01 02 TO01 27 RO01
2 28 TI02 03 RI02 03 TO02 28 RO02
3 29 TI03 04 RI03 04 TO03 29 RO03
4 30 TI04 05 RI04 05 TO04 30 RO04
5 31 TI05 06 RI05 06 TO05 31 RO05
6 32 TI06 07 RI06 07 TO06 32 RO06
7 33 TI07 08 RI07 08 TO07 33 RO07
8 34 TI08 09 RI08 09 TO08 34 RO08
9 35 TI09 10 RI09 10 TO09 35 RO09
10 36 TI10 11 RI10 11 TO10 36 RO10
11 37 TI11 12 RI11 12 TO11 37 RO11
12 38 TI12 13 RI12 13 TO12 38 RO12
13 39 TI13 14 RI13 14 TO13 39 RO13
14 40 TI14 15 RI14 15 TO14 40 RO14
15 41 TI15 16 RI15 16 TO15 41 RO15
16 42 TI16 17 RI16 17 TO16 42 RO16
17 43 TI17 18 RI17 18 TO17 43 RO17
18 44 TI18 19 RI18 19 TO18 44 RO18
19 45 TI19 20 RI19 20 TO19 45 RO19
20 46 TI20 21 RI20 21 TO20 46 RO20
21 47 TI21 22 RI21 22 TO21 47 RO21
22 48 TI22 23 RI22 23 TO22 48 RO22
23 49 TI23 24 RI23 24 TO23 49 RO23

– 199 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 POTS Splitter (M13)

SPL CABLE-A

Connector A (24-pin) Champ Connector (48-pin)

To LC/TEL
Connector A
of M13 Card

Connector B (24-pin) To Champ

Connector
To LC/TEL
Connector B
of M13 Card

0.55 m (1.8 ft)

– 200 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 In-Skin HUB

In-Skin HUB

(1) Connection Outline

The In-Skin HUB card (PN-8ETIA) is used to accommodate switching HUB. PN-8ETIA card has 8-
ports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Auto-negotiation fixed).
PZ-M675 card is mounted on PN-8ETIA card. PZ-M675 card is used to accommodate all 10BASE-
T/100BASE-TX ports on a PN-8ETIA card with Power over Ethernet (PoE).

Outline of Switching HUB Connection

PN-8ETIA card
PZ-M675 card
RJ45 Connector
LAN 7/8
PBX LAN 5/6
BWB
LAN 3/4
LAN 1/2

: To IP TERMINAL

MP
card
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Cable

MAXIMUM 100 m (327.5 ft.)

The number of IP terminal that can be connected to the In-Skin HUB is as follows.

Number of IP Terminal

No. of IP Terminal (MAXIMUM)

IP Terminal REMARKS
2000 IPS IPSDM
Inaset ITR-LC-1 5 2
ITR-240G-1 7 5
ITR-320C-1 5 2
DtermIP ITR-8D-2 7 4
ITR-8D-3 7 4
ITR-16D-2 7 4
ITR-16D-3 7 4
ITR-16LD-3 7 4
ITR-32D-3 7 4
ITR-4D-1 7 4

– 201 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 In-Skin HUB

(2) LAN Interface

PN-8ETIA card has 8-ports RJ45 type connector. Each connector has LINK/ACT LED and 10/
100(SPD) LED.

LAN Interface connectors

LINK/ACT
10/100

87654321
1 3 5 7
12345678
2 4 6 8

10/100
LINK/ACT

RJ-45 Connector Pin Assignment

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Data (MDI-X) RD+ RD- TD+ - - TD- - -
Signal pair PoE DC Pos DC Pos DC Neg. - - DC Neg. - -

NOTE 1: Cable connection should use the category 5 and UL standard 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable.
NOTE 2: Since other Switching HUB or MP card occupies 1Port of PN-8ETIA card, a terminal connect-
able to PN-8ETIA card is maximum 7.

– 202 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Single Line Telephone (LC/LLC)

Single Line Telephone (LC/LLC)

• Standard Line (PN-8LC/PN-4LC)

MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Standard Line)

PIM0
LTC0
TO SINGLE
PN-8LC J P MDF
LINE TELEPHONE
ROSETTE
R0 1 1
LEN000 (No. 0)
T0 26 26

R1 2 2
LEN001 (No. 1)
T1 27 27

• • • •
LT00 • • • •
• • • •
R6 7 7
LEN006 (No. 6)
T6 32 32

R7 8 8
LEN007 (No. 7)
T7 33 33

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN001 2 R1 27 T1 27 T1 2 R1
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
LEN006 7 R6 32 T6 32 T6 7 R6
LEN007 8 R7 33 T7 33 T7 8 R7

– 203 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Single Line Telephone (LC/LLC)

• Long Line (PN-4LLC)

MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Long Line)

NOTE: For PN-4LLC card, mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the 4LLC
card.

PIM0
LTC0
PN-4LLC J P MDF

R0 1 1 TO SINGLE LINE
LEN000 (No. 0) TELEPHONE
T0 26 26
(FOR LONG LINE)
R1 2 2 TO SINGLE LINE
LEN001 (No. 1) TELEPHONE
T1 27 27
LT00 (FOR LONG LINE)
R2 3 3 TO SINGLE LINE
LEN002 (No. 2) TELEPHONE
T2 28 28
(FOR LONG LINE)
R3 4 4 TO SINGLE LINE
LEN003 (No. 3) TELEPHONE
T3 29 29
(FOR LONG LINE)

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN001 2 R1 27 T1 27 T1 2 R1
LEN002 3 R2 28 T2 28 T2 3 R2
LEN003 4 R3 29 T3 29 T3 4 R3

– 204 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)

Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)

• Standard Line (PN-8DLC/PN-4DLC)

MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Standard Line)

PIM0
LTC0
TO Dterm /
PN-8DLC J P MDF
ROSETTE DSS CONSOLE

R0 1 1 Exi
t

LEN000 (No. 0)
N
... E
C
... ...

... ... ...

T0 26 26
... ... ... Hel
...
p

11 ... ... ... ...

2 ... ... ...

GH
44 AB
ABC
C
GH
II DE
3 ... ...

55 DEF
F
77 JK
JK
LL Fea
...
PQ
PQ
RS
RS 66 ture

88
TU
TU
MN
MN
OO
VV Re
WX
WX
99 cal
l
OP
OP
00 YZ
YZ
Ho ER
ER Co
ld
## nf

R1 2 2
Tra
nsf
er
Re
An dia
sw l
er
Sp
ea
ker

LEN001 (No. 1)
MIC

T1 27 27

• • • •
LT00 • • • • MODULAR CONNECTOR
• • • •
R6 7 7
LEN006 (No. 6)
T6 32 32

R7 8 8
LEN007 (No. 7)
T7 33 33

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN001 2 R1 27 T1 27 T1 2 R1
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
LEN006 7 R6 32 T6 32 T6 7 R6
LEN007 8 R7 33 T7 33 T7 8 R7

– 205 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)

• Long Line (PN-4DLCT/PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN)

MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Long Line)

PIM0
LTC0 TO Dterm /
PN-4DLCT/2DLCB/
PN-2DLCN J P MDF DSS CONSOLE
ROSETTE

R0 1 1 ...
...
Exi
t

...
N
E
C

... ...

LEN000 (No. 0)
...

... ... ... Hel

...
p

11 ... ... ... ...

T0 26 26
2 ... ... ...

GH
44 AB
ABC
C
GH
II DE
3 ... ...

55 DEF
F
77 JK
JK
LL Fea
...
PQ
PQ
RS
RS 66 ture

88
TU
TU
MN
MN
OO
VV Re
WX
WX
99 cal
l
OP
OP
00 YZ
YZ
Ho ER
ER Co
ld
## nf
Tra
nsf
er
Re
An dia
sw l

R1 2 2
er
Sp
ea
ker

MIC

LEN001 (No. 1)
T1 27 27
LT00
R2 3 3
LEN002 (No. 2) T2 28 28 MODULAR CONNECTOR

R3 4 4
LEN003 (No. 3)
T3 29 29

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 29 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN001 2 R1 28 T1 27 T1 2 R1
LEN002 3 R2 27 T2 28 T2 3 R2
LEN003 4 R3 26 T3 29 T3 4 R3

– 206 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(1) MDF Cross Connection

(a) PN-PW00 Power Option

MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option)

NOTE: When using PN-PW00 card, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with
the PN-PW00 card.

INSTALLATION CABLE

TO SN716 DESKCON
MDF ROSETTE
PIM0 LTC0 NOTE
E 6
PN-8DLC/4DLC J P
–48 V 5

R0 1 1 4
LEN000 (No. 0)
T0 26 26 3

E 2
1
–48 V
LT00
NOTE

MODULAR CONNECTOR

PN-PW00

08 –48 V
07
06
E
05 LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)
04 –48 V
03 LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
02
E
01

– 207 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(b) AC Adapter Power Option

MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (AC Adapter Power Option)

INSTALLATION CABLE

PIM0 LTC0 MDF ROSETTE

E 6
PN-8DLC/4DLC J P TO SN716 DESKCON
5

R0 1 1 4
LEN000 (No. 0) 26 26 3
T0
E 2
1

LT00

MODULAR CONNECTOR

–24 V AC ADAPTER
TO COMMERCIAL
AC OUTLET

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)
-27V
LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
G

– 208 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(2) Mounting of Handset

(a) When mounting at the left side of the SN716 DESKCON (Standard)

STEP1: Let the handset cord through the hole on the side of the handset support fitting as shown below.

CAUTION
Handle the cord with care not to snap a hook on the modular of the cord, when you let the cord
through the hole.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

(01) (02) (03) (04)

Night
LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall PAGE REC
(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (21)

EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC Start Mute Position Busy

Cancel
L6 (12) Volume
(24)
1 2 3 SRC DEST
L5 (11)
Talk
L4 (10) 4 5 6 (22)
(19) (20)

L3 (09) 7 8 9 Release Hold Answer

L2 (08)
0 # (25)
(26) (23)
L1 (07)

HANDSET CORD

(DESK CONSOLE SIDE) (HANDSET SIDE)

Continued on next page

– 209 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

<TOP VIEW> <BOTTOM VIEW>

HOLE

<SIDE VIEW>

Continued on next page

– 210 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

STEP2: Plug the modular into HAND H/S0 jack, and trail the cord along the groove at the bottom of the
console (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

HANDSET CORD

HAND
H/S0 (for Handset/Headset)
H/S1 (for Headset only)

Continued on next page

– 211 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(b) When mounting at the right side of the SN716 DESKCON

Mounting of Handset to SN716 DESKCON

STEP1: Remove the metal plate from the Handset, turn it over, and mount it to the Handset again.

Turn over the metal plate.

When mounting at the right side When mounting at the left side

Screw (1) Screw (5) Screw (2)

Handset

Handset
Screw (4) Screw (3)

Screw (3) Screw (4)

Metal Plate

Screw (2) Screw (5) Screw (1)

Metal Plate

Desk Console

STEP2: Put the Handset code through the hole as shown below.

Handset code

(DESK CONSOLE side) (Handset side)

Hole
<SIDE VIEW>

Continued on next page

– 212 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

STEP3: Fit the three small holes of the handset support fitting to the projections on the bottom of the
console, and fix the fitting by three screws.

CAUTION
Do not screw too firmly to avoid damage to the console.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

HANDSET CORD

PROJECTION

PROJECTION

HANDSET SUPPORT

– 213 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

Mounting of Handset (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE)

<BOTTOM VIEW> <TOP VIEW>

STEP4: Plug the modular into HAND H/S0 jack (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).

Code
HAND
H/S0 (for Handset/Headset)
H/S1 (for Headset only)

Continued on next page

– 214 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

STEP5: Fit the three small holes of the handset support fitting to the projections on the bottom of the
console, and fix the fitting by three screws.

CAUTION
Do not screw too firmly to avoid damage to the console.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

Projection
Handset Support

Projection

– 215 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(3) Mounting of Headset

Plug the headset into the modular jack (H/S0 or H/S1) located at the bottom of the console, if
required.

Headset Installation for SN716 DESKCON

Head Band

Slide
Slide

Capsule Unit
(Microphone and
Speaker)

Ear Pad

Slide

Closing
Clip
Voice Tube

Quick Disconnect

Modular Plug NOTE

PIN1

PIN1 TX (+)
2 RX
3 RX
4 TX (–)

HAND
H/S0
H/S1

NOTE: In daily use, use Quick Disconnect when connecting/disconnecting the Headset.

– 216 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(4) Cable Connection to SN716 DESKCON

Plug the line cord into the modular jack (LINE) located at the bottom of the console. For the MDF
cross connection for the SN716 DESKCON. Refer to “MDF Cross Connection for SN716
DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option)”. Page 207

Cable Connection to SN716 DESKCON

LINE CORD (6-core)

PAGE REC LINE

(8-core) (6-core)
(8-core)

MODULAR MDF PBX

TERMINAL

3P 3P 1P
8DLC/
4DLC
SN716 DESKCON
2P
PW00

– 217 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(5) Connection of AC-DC Adapter

When using an AC-DC ADAPTER for power supply, plug the AC-DC ADAPTER into the “12-24
V DC” terminal located at the rear of the console.

AC-DC ADAPTER Connection to SN716 DESKCON

12~24 V DC RS-232

AC-DC ADAPTER

– 218 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(6) Connection of Recording Equipment

The following equipment is required for using recording function:
• Tape Recorder with MIC and Remote Connections
• Cross Connect Wire
• 8-Core Modular Block (RJ45)
• 8-Core Modular Cable
As shown in the following figure, connect cross connect wire to MIC Jack and Remote Jack, then
connect other end of wire to 8-core modular block. And connect one end of 8-core modular cable to
DESKCON REC connector, connect the other end to 8-core block.

Cable Connection for Recording Equipment

MODULAR TAPE RECORDER
8-Core BLOCK (RJ45)
1P
Modular Cable
MIC JACK
1P
REMOTE 
JACK

Cross Connect Wire

REC (8-Core)

DESK CONSOLE
(Bottom view)

MODULAR
SN716 DESKCON BLOCK (RJ45) TAPE RECORDER

1
MIC Jack
2
3
4
5
Remote Jack
6
7
Cross
8
Connect
8-core Wire
Modular
Cable Page 220

– 219 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

8-CORE LINE CABLE (INSTALLATION CABLE)

NOTE

8-pin Modular Connector

8-pin Modular Connector (Rosette side)
(DESK CONSOLE side)
8-core Line Cable (Installation Cable)

Pin No.

12345678

Pin No. LEAD NAME MEANING

1 A Speech
2 B Speech
3 – Not used
4 – Not used
5 KA Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)
6 KB Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)
7 – Not used
8 – Not used

NOTE: Cut the cable in proper length. Attach the modular connector to both sides of the 8-core
line cable using installation tool.

– 220 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(7) Configuration Menu

Configuration Menu is used to assign configuration data for the SN716 DESKCON. The menu has
the following items:

1. HEADSET/HANDSET
2. HEADSET TYPE
3. MUTE
4. REC CONTROL
5. PAGE CONTROL
6. SUP CONNECTION NOTE
7. REC VOLUME NOTE
8. BLF NOTE
9. HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP
10. 2ND RINGING
11. RINGING
12. RECEIVER VOL SET
13. FUNCTION KEY SWAP NOTE
14. RINGER VOLUME IN PB NOTE
15. POWER CONTROL
16. CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS
NOTE: This item can not be used for the NEAX 2000 IPS.

(a) Displaying Configuration Menu

Press the L4, L5 and SRC key simultaneously and turn on the power (Plug the AC/DC adapter
of the SN716 DESKCON in AC outlet).

Displaying the Configuration Menu

Position
Alarm Available
Position
Busy Night Position Busy lamp
Night
LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall PAGE REC

EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC Start Mute Position Busy

SRC key
L6 Cancel
1 2 3
ABC DEF SRC DEST
L5 key L5
Talk
4 5 6
L4 key L4 GHI JKL MNO

L3 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ Release Hold Answer

L2 key L2
0 #
*
L1

Continued on next page

– 221 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

The first page of Configuration Menu appears on the LCD. Configuration Menu has a total of five
or six pages.

• 1st Page
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x SRC: prev page
1: HEADSET/HANDSET DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE Release: exit
3: MUTE Answer: update
• 2nd Page
[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x SRC: prev page
1: REC CONTROL DEST: next page
2: PAGE CONTROL Release: exit
3: SUP CONNECTION Answer: update
• 3rd Page
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x SRC: prev page
1: REC VOLUME DEST: next page
2: BLF Release: exit
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP Answer: update
• 4th Page
[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x SRC: prev page
1: 2ND RINGING DEST: next page
2: RINGING Release: exit
3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET Answer: update
• 5th Page
[CONFIG MENU P5] VER x SRC: prev page
1: FUNCTION KEY SWAP DEST: next page
2: RINGER VOLUME IN PB Release: exit
3: POWER CONTROL Answer: update
• 6th Page
[CONFIG MENU P6] VER x SRC: prev page
1: CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

– 222 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

STEP1: When pressing the DEST key, the display changes to the next page. When returning to the pre-
vious page, press the SRC key.
STEP2: When pressing the Release key, Configuration Menu disappears and the SN716 DESKCON re-
turns to normal operation.

(b) Selection of Configuration Item

By using a numeric key, press the desired number in Configuration Menu. A menu for assigning
configuration data appears. Assign configuration data referring to “Assignment of Configuration
Data” on the next page.

Selecting a Configuration Item

Position Position
Alarm Available Busy Night
Night
LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall PAGE REC

EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC Start Mute Position Busy

SRC key
L6 Cancel
1 2 3
ABC DEF SRC DEST
L5
Talk DEST key
4 5 6
L4 GHI JKL MNO

L3 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ Release Hold Answer

L2 Answer key
* 0 #
L1

Numeric keys Release key

– 223 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(c) Assignment of Configuration Data

This section explains how to assign each configuration data. When assigning configuration data,
the following shaded keys are used.

Assigning Configuration Data

Position Position
Alarm Available Busy Night
Night
LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall PAGE REC

Position Busy
EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC Start Mute

SRC key
L6 Cancel
1 2 3
ABC DEF SRC DEST
L5
Talk
4 5 6
L4 GHI JKL MNO DEST key
L3 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ Release Hold Answer

L2
* 0 #
L1

Numeric keys

– 224 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(d) Updating Configuration Data

After assigning the configuration data, take the next step as below:

- To update the configuration data

While one of configuration menus is displayed on the LCD, press Answer key. (DESK CONSOLE
is automatically restarted.)

- To cancel update

Press Release key.

Updating Configuration Data

Position Position
Alarm Available Busy Night
Night
LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall PAGE REC

EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC Start Mute Position Busy

L6 Cancel
1 2 3
ABC DEF SRC DEST
L5
Talk
4 5 6
L4 GHI JKL MNO

L3 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ Release Hold Answer

L2 Answer key (Update)

* 0 #
L1

Release key (Cancel)

– 225 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

(e) Configuration Data Assignment of Each Item

<Headset/Handset>
This item specifies an optional handset/headset connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.

NOTE: When using HAND H/S1 connector, this data assignment is not required.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P1. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE Release: exit
3: MUTE Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (HEADSET/HANDSET).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[HEADSET/HANDSET] SRC: menu

* 1: HEADSET
2: HANDSET Default setting:
“1:HEADSET”

1. Headset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.

2. Handset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE Release: exit
3: MUTE Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.

– 226 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Headset Type>
This item specifies the type of headset connected to the HAND H/S1 or H/S0 connector.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P1. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE Release: exit
3: MUTE Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 2 (HEADSET TYPE).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[HEADSET TYPE] SRC: menu

* 1: SUPRA NEW SIGMA Default setting:
2: SUPRA POLARIS Series “1:SUPRA NEW
3: GN2200 Series SIGMA”

1. The type of Headset is “SUPRA F53U-U03F”.

2. The type of Headset is “P51N-U10P SUPRA NC POLARIS” or others.

3. The type of Headset is “GN2200” .

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE Release: exit
3: MUTE Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.

– 227 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Mute>
This item specifies On/Off setting of the mute function for the HAND H/S0 or H/S1 connector.
If the Mute key is pressed while the mute function is set to On, the voice at the DESKCON side
is not sent to the other party.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P1. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE Release: exit
3: MUTE Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (MUTE).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[MUTE] SRC: menu

* 1: H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON
2: H/S0 ON, H/S1OFF Default setting:
3: H/S0 OFF, H/S1 ON “1:H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON”

1. Both H/S0 and H/S1 are set to On

2. Only H/S0 is set to On

3. Only H/S1 is set to On

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x SRC: prev page

1: HEADSET/HANDSET DEST: next page
2: HEADSET TYPE Release: exit
3: MUTE Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.

– 228 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<REC Control>
This item specifies the operation mode of a recording equipment. The following two types of
modes are available:
Manual mode:
Manual mode is available when the recording equipment has a remote connection function.
When the REC key is pressed, the system starts recording. When the REC key is pressed again,
the recording stops.
Automatic mode:
In automatic mode, the system starts/ends recording automatically when a call is connected/
disconnected. Note that the REC key is not effective in Automatic mode.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P2. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x SRC: prev page

1: REC CONTROL DEST: next page
2: PAGE CONTROL Release: exit
3: SUP CONNECTION Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (REC CONTROL).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[REC CONTROL] SRC: menu

* 1: MANUAL
2: AUTO Default setting:
“1:MANUAL”

1. Manual mode

2. Automatic mode

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x SRC: prev page

1: REC CONTROL DEST: next page
2: PAGE CONTROL Release: exit
3: SUP CONNECTION Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

– 229 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<REC Volume>
This item specifies the recording level of the received voice from the other party. Note that the
voice level at the operator side cannot be adjusted.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P3. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME DEST: next page
2: BLF Release: exit
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (REC VOLUME).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT] SRC: menu

1: +2dB 4:-8dB
* 2: 0dB Default setting: “2:0dB”
3: -4dB

1. +2dB Up

2. 0dB (Standard level)

3. -4dB Down

4. -8dB Down

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME DEST: next page
2: BLF Release: exit
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

– 230 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Hold/Start/Release Swap>
This item specifies the locations of Hold, Start, and Release key.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P3. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME DEST: next page
2: BLF Release: exit
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP] SRC: menu

* 1: ORIGINAL
2: SWAPPED Default setting:
“1:ORIGINAL”

1. Original setting

2. Swapped setting NOTE

NOTE: The locations of each key changes as shown below.

ORIGINAL SETTING SWAPPED SETTING

Hold Start
Start Release
Release Hold

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME DEST: next page
2: BLF Release: exit
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

– 231 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<2nd Ringing>
This item specifies on/off setting of the 2nd ringing.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P4. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING DEST: next page
2: RINGING Release: exit
3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (2ND RINGING).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[2ND RINGING] SRC: menu

* 1: ENABLE
2: DISABLE Default setting:
“1:ENABLE”

1. 2nd Ringing is available.

2. 2nd Ringing is not available.

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING DEST: next page
2: RINGING Release: exit
3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

– 232 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Ringing>
This item specifies on/off setting of the ringing.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P4. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING DEST: next page
2: RINGING Release: exit
3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 2 (RINGING).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[RINGING] SRC: menu

* 1: ENABLE
2: DISABLE Default setting:
“1:ENABLE”

1. Ringing is available.

2. Ringing is not available.

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING DEST: next page
2: RINGING Release: exit
3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

– 233 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Receiver Volume Set>

This item specifies the receiver volume.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P4. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING DEST: next page
2: RINGING Release: exit
3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (RECEIVER VOLUME SET).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[RECEIVER VOLUME SET] SRC: menu

* 1: SYSTEM DEFAULT 4: QUIET PLACE
2: DEFAULT BY CALL Default setting:
3: SAME AS PREVIOUS CALL “1:SYSTEM DEFAULT”

1. When specifying “1:SYSTEM DEFAULT”, the receiver volume is set to the default level of the
DLC card.

2. When specifying “2:DEFAULT BY CALL”, the receiver volume is set to the level in accordance
with the system default.

3. When specifying “3:SAME AS PREVIOUS CALL”, the receiver volume is set to the level
adjusted by the UP/DOWN key.

4. When specifying “4:QUIET PLACE”, the receiver volume is set to the level (-8dB) lower than
System Default.

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P4] VER x SRC: prev page

1: 2ND RINGING DEST: next page
2: RINGING Release: exit
3: RECEIVER VOLUME SET Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

– 234 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Power Control>
This item specifies the power control of the SN716 DESKCON in night mode.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P5. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P5] VER x SRC: prev page

1: FUNCTION KEY SWAP DEST: next page
2: RINGER VOLUME IN PB Release: exit
3: POWER CONTROL Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 3 (POWER CONTROL).

STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[POWER CONTROL] SRC: menu

* 1: NORMAL
2: LOW POWER (PUT OUT LCD) Default setting:
“1:NORMAL”

1. Power control is not effective.

2. The LCD back light is put out. When pressing an any key, the LCD back light is put on, the light
is put out again after 30 seconds.

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P5] VER x SRC: prev page

1: FUNCTION KEY SWAP DEST: next page
2: RINGER VOLUME IN PB Release: exit
3: POWER CONTROL Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When specifying other item, press the DEST key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

– 235 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

<Conf. Tone For All Keys>

This item specifies the confirmation tone control for all keys of the SN716 DESKCON.

STEP1: Display Configuration Menu P6. Page 221

[CONFIG MENU P6] VER x SRC: prev page

1: CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

STEP2: Press the numeric key 1 (CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS).
STEP3: Press the desired numeric key. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number.

[CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS] SRC: menu

* 1: ENABLE
2: DISABLE Default setting:
3: SYSTEM “1:ENABLE”

1. Confirmation tone is enable for all keys.

2. Confirmation tone is disable for all keys.

3. Confirmation tone is controlled by the system.

STEP4: Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.

[CONFIG MENU P6] VER x SRC: prev page

1: CONF. TONE FOR ALL KEYS DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

STEP5: Press the Answer key to update the configuration data. Page 225
When canceling update, press the Release key.
When returning previous item, press the SRC key.

– 236 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

(1) MDF Cross Connection

• Standard Line (PN-8DLC/PN-4DLC)

MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (Standard Line)

PIM0
LTC0
PN-8DLC J P MDF ROSETTE
TO SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

R0 1 1
LEN000 (No. 0)
T0 26 26
R1 2 2
LEN001 (No. 1)
T1 27 27

• • • •
LT00 • • • •
MODULAR CONNECTOR
• • • •
R6 7 7
LEN006 (No. 6)
T6 32 32
R7 8 8
LEN007 (No. 7)
T7 33 33

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN001 2 R1 27 T1 27 T1 2 R1
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
LEN006 7 R6 32 T6 32 T6 7 R6
LEN007 8 R7 33 T7 33 T7 8 R7

– 237 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

• Long Line (PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN)

MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (Long Line)

PIM0
LTC0
PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN J P MDF
ROSETTE
TO SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON
R0 1 1
LEN000 (No. 0)
T0 26 26

R1 2 2
LEN001 (No. 1)
T1 27 27
LT00
3 3

28 28 MODULAR CONNECTOR

4 4

29 29

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN001 2 R1 27 T1 27 T1 2 R1
3 28 28 3
4 29 29 4

– 238 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
(2) Installation of SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

STEP1: To provide the console with the headset in place of the handset, unplug the modular cord from
the handset and then plug the modular cord to the Jack Set.

Jack Set Installation for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

SN708/709/712/741
ATTCON

MODULAR
CORD

JACK SET

– 239 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

STEP2: Set the switch located inside the console according to the type of headset/handset connected.
Refer to next page. Page 241

Switch Setting on the SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

• Slide the directory out of the way.

Then insert a flat screw driver’s blade into the notched opening and apply light upward pressure until
the access panel is clear of the front lip. At the same time apply pressure (toward you) at the rear of
the pedestal to move the access panel.

ACCESS PANEL

DIRECTORY

Continued on next page

– 240 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Switch Setting on SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

• Set the switch according to the type of headset/handset connected.

C: Carbon Type Handset/Headset
S: SUPRA Headset
D: Dterm Type Handset

• Replace the directory and access panel.

SWITCH

– 241 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

STEP3: Plug the line cord into the modular jack located at the bottom of the console.

Cable Connection to SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

LINE CORD

PBX
MODULAR MDF
TERMINAL
1P 1P 1P
DLC

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

– 242 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

STEP4: Screw the handset support onto the bottom of the console as shown below.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN708/709/712 ATTCON

HANDSET
SUPPORT

SN708/709/712 ATTCON

– 243 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

For SN741 ATTCON, use the modular cord clamp provided with the handset support to dispose the
straight part of the handset modular cord as shown below.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN741 ATTCON

MODULAR CORD CLAMP SN741 ATTCON

~

HANDSET SUPPORT MODULAR CORD

– 244 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP)

Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP)

MDF Cross Connection for Day/Night Mode Change by External Key

• When using PN-DK00

PIM0
LTC0
PN-DK00 J P MDF
TO KEYS
K0 1 1 K0

K1 26 26 K1
LEN000
K2 2 2 K2

K3 27 27 K3
LT00
K4 3 3 K4

K5 28 28 K5
LEN002
K6 4 4 K6

K7 29 29 K7

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

1 K0 26 K1 26 K1 1 K0
LEN000
2 K2 27 K3 27 K3 2 K2
3 K4 28 K5 28 K5 3 K4
LEN002
4 K6 29 K7 29 K7 4 K6

• When using DK on PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D

PBX
External Key
PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D

– 245 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 External TAS Indicator (DK)

External TAS Indicator (DK)

(1) Connection Outline

External TAS Indicator Connection Outline

• When using PN-DK00

PBX
TAS Indicator with Battery
PN-DK00 MDF

IND

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

G
G

PBX TAS Indicator with Battery

(Ground Start)
PN-DK00 MDF

IND

– 246 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 External TAS Indicator (DK)

(2) MDF Cross Connection

• When using a TAS Indicator with a Battery

MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery

PIM0
LTC0
TAS INDICATOR
PN-DK00 J P MDF WITH BATTERY

K0 1 1 K0
IND
K1 26 26
LEN000
K2 2 2

K3 27 27
LT00
K4 3 3

K5 28 28
LEN002
K6 4 4

K7 29 29

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

–27 V

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

1 K0 26 K1 26 K1 1 K0
LEN000
2 K2 27 K3 27 K3 2 K2
3 K4 28 K5 28 K5 3 K4
LEN002
4 K6 29 K7 29 K7 4 K6

– 247 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 External TAS Indicator (DK)

• When using a TAS Indicator with a Battery (Ground Start)

MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery (Ground Start)

PIM0
TAS INDICATOR
LTC0 WITH BATTERY
PN-DK00 J P MDF (GROUND START)

K0 1 1 K0 IND
K1 26 26
LEN000
K2 2 2

K3 27 27
LT00
K4 3 3

K5 28 28
LEN002
K6 4 4

K7 29 29

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

1 K0 26 K1 26 K1 1 K0
LEN000
2 K2 27 K3 27 K3 2 K2
3 K4 28 K5 28 K5 3 K4
LEN002
4 K6 29 K7 29 K7 4 K6

– 248 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

(1) Requirement for Customer-owned Paging Equipment

Input Impedance : 600 Ω
Control Method : Start - Ground Start NOTE
Stop - Ground Off (Open)

NOTE: The current capacity of relay contact (PN-DK00 card) is 0.125 A.

(2) Connection Outline

Paging Equipment Connection Outline

• When using PN-8COT and PN-DK00

PBX
For Amplifier Input

MDF
PN-8COT Paging Equipment

PN-DK00 For Control

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

G
G

Continued on next page

– 249 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

Paging Equipment Connection Outline

• When using PN-8COT and DK on PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D

PBX
For Amplifier Input

MDF
PN-8COT Paging Equipment

PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D

For Control

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

G
G

– 250 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

(3) MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for Paging Equipment

PIM0 MDF
LTC0
PN-DK00 J P
K0 1 1

K1 26 26
LEN000
K2 2 2

K3 27 27
LT00
K4 3 3

K5 28 28
LEN002
K6 4 4

K7 29 29

PN-8COT
R0 9 9
LEN008 (No. 0)
T0 34 34
PAGING EQUIPMENT
• • • •
• • • • G CONTROL
LT01 • • • • CIRCUIT SPEAKER
R6 15 15
LEN014 (No. 6)
T6 40 40

R7 16 16 Ring
LEN015 (No. 7) SPEECH
T7 41 41 Tip PATH
CIRCUIT
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 G

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 K0 26 26 1 K0
2 27 27 2
3 28 28 3
LEN002
4 29 29 4

LEN008 9 R0 34 T0 34 T0 9 R0
LEN009 10 R1 35 T1 35 T1 10 R1
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
LEN015 14 R6 40 T6 40 T6 14 R6
LEN016 15 R7 41 T7 41 T7 15 R7

– 251 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

(1) Requirement for Customer-owned External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

Output level : Less than 0 dbm (Adjustable)
Output impedance : Less than 1 kΩ (When using PN-4COT/8COT and PN-DK00)
: Less than 10 kΩ (When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA)
Control Method : Start - Ground Start NOTE 1
: Stop - Ground Off (Open)

NOTE 1: The current capacity of relay contact (PN-DK00 card) is 0.125 A.

NOTE 2: When connecting the external tone source/announcement machine using the PN-4COT/8COT
and PN-DK00 cards, an appropriate diode must be installed on the MDF, as shown on the next
page. Page 253

– 252 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

(2) Connection Outline

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Connection Outline

• When using PN-8COT and PN-DK00

PBX MDF
PN-8COT External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

Diode *
PN-DK00

* Rating for the Diode

• VR Less than –50 V
• IO More than 20 mA
• VF Less than 1.0 V

• When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA

PBX
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine
PN-TNTA

JACK0

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

JACK1

• When using Pin Jack on PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D

PBX
PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

JACK

NOTE: When connecting the external hold tone source to Pin Jack on MP card (PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D), set JP1 on the MP card to RIGHT position. Page 292

– 253 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

(3) MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

PIM0 MDF
LTC0
PN-DK00 J P
K0 1 1

K1 26 26
LEN000
K2 2 2

K3 27 27
LT00
K4 3 3

K5 28 28
LEN002
K6 4 4

K7 29 29

PN-8COT
R0 9 9
LEN008 (No. 0)
T0 34 34 EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/
ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE
• • • •
• • • •
K0
LT01 • • • • CONTROL
R6 15 15 G CIRCUIT
LEN014 (No. 6)
T6 40 40

R7 16 16 Ring
LEN015 (No. 7) SPEECH
T7 41 41 Tip PATH
CIRCUIT
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

Continued on next page

– 254 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 K0 26 26 1 K0
2 27 27 2
3 28 28 3
LEN002
4 29 29 4

LEN008 9 R0 34 T0 34 T0 9 R0
LEN009 10 R1 35 T1 35 T1 10 R1
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
LEN015 14 R6 40 T6 40 T6 14 R6
LEN016 15 R7 41 T7 41 T7 15 R7

– 255 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

• If a D.C. voltage is supplied with the tone from the external tone source/announcement machine, a
transformer or coupling capacitor should be used as shown below.

Connecting External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Supplied with D.C.

CAPACITOR
2 µF SOURCE
Ring TRANSFORMER

R
TO COT DC
VOLTAGE
Tip SOURCE
TO PBX

EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/

K ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE
TO CONTROL CIRCUIT
FROM PN-DK00

CAPACITOR
2 µF SOURCE
Ring

R
TO COT
DC
Tip VOLTAGE
TO PBX SOURCE

EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/

K ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE
TO CONTROL CIRCUIT
FROM PN-DK00

– 256 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 External BGM Source (COT/TNT)

External BGM Source (COT/TNT)

The system can connect a maximum of 10 customer-owned BGM sources.

(1) Connection Outline

External BGM Sources Connection Outline

• When using PN-8COT

PN-8COT
MDF
BGM SOURCE

#0
BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE

#1

• When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA

PN-TNTA
BGM SOURCE

#0
JACK0
BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE

#1
JACK1

– 257 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 External BGM Source (COT/TNT)

(2) MDF Cross Connection

• When using PN-8COT

MDF Cross Connection for External BGM Sources

PIM0
LTC0
PN-8COT J P MDF
BGM SOURCE
R0 1 1
LEN000 (No. 0)
T0 26 26 #0

R1 2 2 BGM SOURCE
LEN001 (No. 1)
T1 27 27 #0
#1

• • • •
LT00 • • • •
• • • •
R6 7 7
LEN006 (No. 6)
T6 32 32

R7 8 8
LEN007 (No. 7)
T7 33 33

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0
LEN001 2 R1 27 T1 27 T1 2 R1
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
LEN006 7 R6 32 T6 32 T6 7 R6
LEN007 8 R7 33 T7 33 T7 8 R7

– 258 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

(1) Connection Outline

PFT Connection Outline

PZ-8PFTB

PBX

TEL PN-8LC PN-8COT

MDF MDF MDF MDF TO C.O.
LINE

– 259 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

(2) Installation of PZ-8PFTB

STEP1: Mount the PZ-8PFTB card into the PFT slot of the PIM.

STEP2: Connect the champ connectors of 25-pair cables to the PFT0 and PFT1 connectors on the PZ-
8PFTB card as shown below.

Connection of 25-Pair Cable and PZ-8PFTB

PFT1 CONNECTOR
CHAMP CONNECTOR ATTACHED TO PZ-8PFTB

PZ-8PFTB

PFT0 CONNECTOR

25-PAIR CABLE

To MDF

Continued on next page

– 260 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

STEP3: Connect the 25-pair cables on the MDF.

• This figure shows the PFT connector pin assignment for each PFT circuit number
(No. 0 - No. 7).

PFT Connector Pin Assignment

PFT0 PFT1
1 Sta. R0 26 Sta. T0 1 Sta. R6 26 Sta. T6
2 8LC. R0 27 8LC. T0 2 8LC. R6 27 8LC. T6
No. 0 No. 6
3 C.O. R0 28 C.O. T0 3 C.O. R6 28 C.O. T6
4 8COT. R0 29 8COT. T0 4 8COT. R6 29 8COT. T6
5 Sta. R1 30 Sta. T1 5 Sta. R7 30 Sta. T7
6 8LC. R1 31 8LC. T1 6 8LC. R7 31 8LC. T7
No. 1 No. 7
7 C.O. R1 32 C.O. T1 7 C.O. R7 32 C.O. T7
8 8COT. R1 33 8COT. T1 8 8COT. R7 33 8COT. T7
9 Sta. R2 34 Sta. T2 9 34
10 8LC. R2 35 8LC. T2 10 35
No. 2
11 C.O. R2 36 C.O. T2 11 36
12 8COT. R2 37 8COT. T2 12 37
13 Sta. R3 38 Sta. T3 13 38
14 8LC. R3 39 8LC. T3 14 39
No. 3
15 C.O. R3 40 C.O. T3 15 40
16 8COT. R3 41 8COT. T3 16 41
17 Sta. R4 42 Sta. T4 17 42
18 8LC. R4 43 8LC. T4 18 43
No. 4
19 C.O. R4 44 C.O. T4 19 44
20 8COT. R4 45 8COT. T4 20 45
21 Sta. R5 46 Sta. T5 21 46
22 8LC. R5 47 8LC. T5 22 47
No. 5
23 C.O. R5 48 C.O. T5 23 48 MJ
24 8COT. R5 49 8COT. T5 24 49 E
25 50 25 50 –27 V

– 261 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

• This figure shows MDF cross connection for No. 0 circuit on the PZ-8PFTB.

MDF Cross Connection for PFT

MDF
Tip
Ring TO C.O. LINE
Tip
Ring TO STATION

PIM0 PZ-8PFTB
LTC0
PN-8LC J P PFT0
R0 1 1 Sta. R0 1
LEN000
(No. 0) T0 26 26 Sta. T0 26

LEN001 R1 2 2
(No. 1) T1 27 27 8LC. R0 2
LT00 8LC. T0 27
• • • •
• • • • No. 0
• • • •
LEN007 R7 8 8 C.O. R0 3
(No. 7) T7 33 33
C.O. T0 28

PN-8COT
8COT. R0 4
LEN008 R0 9 9
8COT. T0 29
(No. 0) T0 34 34

LEN009 R1 10 10
(No. 1) T1 35 35
LT01 P J
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
LEN015 R7 16 16
(No. 7) T7 41 41 PFT1

PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/ • •
CP24-C/CP24-D • •
• •
MJ 25 25
MN 50 50 23
48
MJ
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

–27 V
G 24
49
E

25
50
–27 V

P J
INSTALLATION CABLE

Continued on next page

– 262 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 Power Failure Transfer (PFT)

MDF Cross Connection for PFT

1 PFT0 CONNECTOR

PFT0 (J) PFT0 (P)

1 Sta. R0 26 Sta. T0 26 Sta. T0 1 Sta. R0 TO STATION
2 8LC. R0 27 8LC. T0 27 8LC. T0 2 8LC. R0 TO PN-8LC
3 C.O. R0 28 C.O. T0 28 C.O. T0 3 C.O. R0 TO C.O. LINE
4 8COT. R0 29 8COT. T0 29 8COT. T0 4 8COT. R0 TO PN-8COT

2 PFT1 CONNECTOR

PFT1 (J) PFT1 (P)

TO PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/
23 48 MJ 48 MJ 23 PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D
24 49 E 49 E 24
TO PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126
25 50 –27 V 50 –27 V 25

3 LTC0 CONNECTOR

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26 T0 1 R0 TO PZ-8PFTB
2 27 27 2
3 28 28 3
4 29 29 4

LEN008 9 R0 34 T0 34 T0 9 R0 TO PZ-8PFTB
10 35 35 10
11 36 36 11
12 37 37 12

24 49 49 24
25 MJ 50 MN 50 MN 25 MJ TO PZ-8PFTB

– 263 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 Alarm Display Panel (MP)

Alarm Display Panel (MP)

MDF Cross Connection for Alarm Display Panel

ALARM DISPLAY PANEL

PWR MJ MIN
PIM0 MDF
LTC0
PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D J P
FRONT
MJ 25 25

MN 50 50

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

–27 V

REAR

LTC0 (J) LTC0 (P)

1 26 26 1

25 MJ 50 MN 50 MN 25 MJ

– 264 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP)

Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP)

The MP card provides two RS-232C interface ports for SMDR/MCI.

No.0/No.1 Port : Async.: 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps

• Direct connection
Connect the SMDR terminal and/or the VMS to the RS0-RS1 port of the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-
C/CP24-D card using the RS RVS-15(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C as shown
below.

SMDR/MCI Terminal Direct Connection

PBX

PN-CP24-A
/CP24-B
/CP24-C
/CP24-D

RS 1 TO RS-232C
RS 0 PORT (25pin)
RS RVS-15(S) CA-A: 15 m (49.2 ft.) SMDR0/SMDR1/
RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.) MCI (VMS)

MAXIMUM 15 m (49.2 ft.)

• Connection via MODEM

When the cable length between the PBX and the terminal is more than 15 m (49.2 ft.), connect the
SMDR terminal and/or the VMS to the RS0-RS1 port of the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D
card through the MODEMs using the RS NORM-4(S) CA-A as shown below.

SMDR/MCI Terminal Connection via MODEMs

PBX

PN-CP24-A
/CP24-B
/CP24-C MODEM MODEM
/CP24-D
2P
RS 1 TO RS-232C
RS 0 PORT
SMDR0/SMDR1/
MCI (VMS)

RS NORM-4 CA-A/ MODEM INTERFACE

RS NORM-4S CA-A: 4 m (13.1 ft.) CABLE (STRAIGHT)

MORE THAN 15 m (49.2 ft.)

– 265 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP)

RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A

RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C
RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C

NOTE: If the terminal does not send DTR or RTS signal, cut the signal lead marked by × in the D-Sub
connector (terminal side) as shown in the wiring diagram below.
See “RS-232C Connector Layout”. Page 274

RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A: 15 m (49.2 ft.)

D-sub 25pin
RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C/
RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.) (male)

06D-TXC (1) 15-TXC (2)

06B-RXC 17-RXC
06A-TXC (2) 24-TXC (1)
05C-DTR 06-DSR
05B-GND 01-GND
05A-TXD 03-RXD
04B-RXD 02-TXD
04A-RTS 08-DCD
03B-CTS 05-CTS
03A-DSR NOTE 20-DTR
×
02B-GND 07-GND
02A-DCD 04-RTS
×
01C-LALB 18-LALB

13 ----
25 ----
12 ----
24 TXC (1)
11 ----
23 ----
10 ----
22 ----
D C B A 09 ----
21 ----
06 TXC (1) ---- RXC TXC (2) 08 DCD
20 DTR
05 ---- DTR GND TXD 07 GND
19 ----
04 ---- ---- RXD RTS 06 DSR
18 LALB
03 ---- ---- CTS DSR 05 CTS
17 RXC
02 ---- ---- GND DCD 04 RTS
16 ----
01 ---- LALB ---- G G: GROUND 03 RXD
15 TXC (2)
02 TXD
14 ----
01 GND

– 266 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 Built-in SMDR/MCI on RS-232C (MP)

RS NORM-4 CA-A/RS NORM-4S CA-A

See “RS-232C Connector Layout”. Page 274

4 m (13.1 ft.)
D-sub 25pin
(male)
06D-TXC (1) 24-TXC (1)
06B-RXC 17-RXC
06A-TXC (2) 15-TXC (2)
05C-DTR 20-DTR
05B-GND 01-GND
05A-TXD 02-TXD
04B-RXD 03-RXD
04A-RTS 04-RTS
03B-CTS 05-CTS
03A-DSR 06-DSR
02B-GND 07-GND
02A-DCD 08-DCD
01C-LALB 18-LALB

D C B A 13 ----
25 ----
06 TXC (1) ---- RXC TXC (2) 12 ----
24 TXC (1)
05 ---- DTR GND TXD 11 ----
23 ----
04 ---- ---- RXD RTS 10 ----
22 ----
03 ---- ---- CTS DSR 09 ----
21 ----
02 ---- ---- GND DCD 08 DCD
20 DTR
01 ---- LALB ---- G G: GROUND 07 GND
19 ----
06 DSR
18 LALB
05 CTS
17 RXC
04 RTS
16 ----
03 RXD
15 TXC (2)
02 TXD
14 ----
01 GND

– 267 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 Built-in SMDR/PMS on IP (MP)

Built-in SMDR/PMS on IP (MP)

[Series 3400 software enhancement]

The ETHER card (PZ-M606-A) on the MP card provides on LAN interface port for SMDR/PMS.

Connect the SMDR/PMS terminal to LAN port of the PZ-M606A-A card on the PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/
CP24-C/CP24-D card using 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable as shown below.

SMDR/PMS Terminal Connection

PBX

PN-CP24-A Switching HUB

/CP24-B
/CP24-C LAN
/CP24-D
TO LAN PORT

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable SMDR/PMS

PZ-M606-A

The LAN interface specifications are listed below.

Item Specifications
Physical layer Ethernet
Connection layer The Ethernet packet format complies with the DIX standard.
TCP/IP protocol ARP,IP,ICMP,UDP,TCP
Socket interface Complies with 4.3 BSD socket interface
Transport protocol TCP stream type protocol
Application port number SMDR : 60010 (fixed)
PMS : 60050 (fixed)
Number of connection 1
Client/Server Client : SMDR/PMS terminal
Server: PBX
Transmission code 7-bit ASCII code
Quasi-normal restriction condition 1. When connection is closed.
2. Status monitoring text

NOTE: The MP card in Main site communicates with the SMDR/PMS terminal. Therefore, in the com-
munication settings in SMDR/PMS terminal side, set the IP address to connected to the address
specified by office data (CM0BY=00>00 or CM0BY=02>03), and application port number
shown in the above table.

– 268 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

The PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D card provides 4 RS-232C interface ports for SMDR, PMS, MCI, CIS Print-
er, Hotel Printer.

(1) SMDR/PMS/MCI (VMS)

• Direct Connection
Connect the terminal to the RS0-RS3 port of the PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D card using the RS RVS-
15(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C as shown below. See Page 266 also.

SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Direct Connection

PBX
(PIM0 - PIM7)

RS0 - RS3

PN- TO RS-232C PORT

AP00-B/
AP00-D
SMDR0/SMDR1/
RS RVS-15(S) CA-A : 15 m (49.2 ft.) PMS/MCI (VMS)
RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.) NOTE

MAXIMUM 15 m (49.2 ft.)

NOTE: PMS cannot be used with PN-AP00-D card.

– 269 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

• Connection via MODEM

When the cable length between the PBX and the terminal is more than 15 m (49.2 ft), MODEMs are
required. Use RS NORM-4S CA-A as shown below. See Page 267 also.

SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Connection via MODEMs

INTERFACE CABLE
(FOR STRAIGHT
CONNECTION)
PBX
(PIM0 - PIM7)

RS0 - RS3
2P
PN-
AP00-B/ TO RS-232C PORT
AP00-D
RS NORM-4 CA-A/ SMDR0/SMDR1/
RS NORM-4S CA-A: MODEM MODEM
PMS/MCI (VMS)
4 m (13.1 ft.) NOTE

MORE THAN 15 m (49.2 ft.)

MODEM: FULL DUPLEX (4W)

1200 BPS (LEASED TYPE)

NOTE: PMS cannot be used with PN-AP00-D card.

– 270 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

(2) CIS Printer/Hotel Printer

• Direct Connection
Connect a maximum of two printers to the PN-AP00-B/PN-AP00-D using the RS PRT-15(S)
CA-A/RS PRT-15(S) CA-C as shown below.

Printer Direct Connection

PBX
RS0-RS3
CONNECTOR
PN-
AP00-B/
AP00-D

RS PRT-15 CA-A/RS PRT-15S CA-A/ PRINTER0/PRINTER1

RS PRT-15 CA-C/RS PRT-15S CA-C : 15 m (49.2 ft.)

MAXIMUM 15 m (49.2 ft.)

• Connection via MODEM

When the cable length between the printer and the PBX is more than 15 m (49.2 ft.), MODEMs are
required.

Printer Connection via MODEMs

INTERFACE CABLE
(FOR STRAIGHT
CONNECTION)

PBX
RS0-RS3
CONNECTOR
PN- 2P
AP00-B/
AP00-D

MODEM MODEM PRINTER0/PRINTER1

RS NORM-4 CA-A/
RS NORM-4S CA-A : 4 m (13.1 ft.)

MORE THAN 15 m (49.2 ft.)

MODEM: FULL DUPLEX (4W)

1200 BPS (LEASED TYPE)

– 271 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

RS PRT-15 CA-A/RS PRT-15S CA-A

See “RS-232C Connector Layout”. Page 274

15 m (49.2 ft.)

05C-DTR
05B-GND 01-GND
05A-TXD 03-RXD
03B-CTS 20-DTR
03A-DSR

02B-GND 07-GND

13 ----
D C B A 25 ----
12 ----
06 ---- ---- ---- ---- 24 ----
11 ----
05 ---- DTR GND TXD 23 ----
10 ----
04 ---- ---- ---- ---- 22 ----
09 ----
03 ---- ---- ---- DSR 21 ----
08 ----
02 ---- ---- GND ---- 20 DTR
07 GND
01 ---- ---- ---- ---- 19 ----
06 ----
18 ----
05 ----
17 ----
04 ----
16 ----
03 RXD
15 ----
02 ----
14 ----
01 GND

– 272 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

RS PRT-15 CA-C/RS PRT-15S CA-C

See “RS-232C Connector Layout”. Page 274

15 m (49.2 ft.)

05B-GND 01-GND
05A-TXD 03-RXD

03A-DSR 20-DTR

02B-GND 07-GND

13 ----
D C B A 25 ----
12 ----
06 ---- ---- ---- ---- 24 ----
11 ----
05 ---- ---- GND TXD 23 ----
10 ----
04 ---- ---- ---- ---- 22 ----
09 ----
03 ---- ---- ---- DSR 21 ----
08 ----
02 ---- ---- GND ---- 20 DTR
07 GND
01 ---- ---- ---- ---- 19 ----
06 ----
18 ----
05 ----
17 ----
04 ----
16 ----
03 RXD
15 ----
02 ----
14 ----
01 GND

– 273 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

RS-232C Connector Layout

SIGNAL-NAME
PIN SIGNAL
MEANING
NO. RS-232C JIS C6361 ITU-T ANOTHER DIRECTION
V.24
1 AA (FG) 101 GND Frame Ground
2 BA SD 103 TXD DTE Send Data
3 BB RD 104 RXD DCE Receive Data
4 CA RS 105 RTS DTE Request to Send
5 CB CS 106 CTS DCE Clear to Send
6 CC DR 107 DSR DCE Data Set Ready
7 AB SG 102 GND Signal Ground
8 CF CD 109 DCD DCE Data Channel Receive Carrier
Detect
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 PB Peripheral Busy
12 SCF BCD 122 DCE Backward Channel Receive Carrier
Detect
13 SCB BCS 121 DCE Backward Channel Send (OK)
14 SBA BSD 118 DTE Backward Channel Send Data
15 DB ST2 114 TXC (2) DCE Send Signal Element Timing
16 SBB BRD 119 DCE Backward Channel Receive Data
17 DD RT 115 RXC DCE Receive Signal Element Timing
18 Not Used
19 SCA BRS 120 DTE Backward Channel Send Detect
20 CD ER 108/2 DTR DTE Data Terminal Ready
21 CG SQD 110 DCE Data Signal Quality Detect
22 CE CI 125 RI DCE Call Indication
23 CI, CH SRS 112, 111 – Data Signal Speed Choice
24 DA ST1 113 TXC (1) DCE Send Signal Element Timing
25 Not Used

– 274 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS

MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS

(1) Before mounting the circuit cards, confirm the following items.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
• Wrist Strap is connected to Frame Ground. Handling
Precautions Required

See CHAPTER 2 “Static Electricity Guard”. Page 63

• Switch settings of circuit cards are already completed. See CHAPTER 3. Page 289

• The “SW1” switches of all PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards are turned off.

(2) Mount circuit cards into their mounting positions according to the “Bay Face Layout” and “Port
Assignment Table” given in the Office Data Programming Manual. See CHAPTER 1 “MOUNTING
CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARDS”. Page 45
This figure shows the mounting method of circuit cards.

Mounting of Circuit Cards

TO FRAME GROUND CONNECTION

WRIST STRAP

CARD FRONT SIDE

– 275 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS

(3) Fix the CARD STOPPER according to the following procedure.

STEP1: After mounting all circuit cards slide the CARD STOPPER to the left.
STEP2: Tighten the screws of the CARD STOPPER as shown below.

NOTE: When sliding the PIM CARD STOPPER, loosen all of the screws securing the PIM CARD
STOPPER and the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card (the screws need not to be removed).

Installation of the CARD STOPPER

CIRCUIT CARD

CARD
STOPPER

CIRCUIT CARD

SCREW

CARD
SLIDE THE CARD
SCREW STOPPER
STOPPER TO THE LEFT.

– 276 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
There are two methods for System Initialization. The first method is to Clear All Data,
ATTENTION
except LEN000 as a CAT terminal, and then program the System Data. The second Contents
Static Sensitive
method is to use the Resident System Program, which causes the system to configure Handling
Precautions Required

itself automatically to the default settings, wherever the line/trunk cards are installed.

NOTE 1: See CHAPTER 3 for MP switch settings. Page 292

NOTE 2: Refer to the “Command Manual” for default settings on the Resident System Program.

All Clear, Except LEN000 CAT

STEP1: Turn on the “SW1” switch on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.

- The “ON” lamp must be lit on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.

STEP2: On the MP Card, set SW3 to “B” and press SW1.

STEP3: When the “MN” lamp on the system is lit, set SW3 to the “0” position.

Resident System Program

STEP1: Mount the line/trunk cards into PIM.

STEP2: Turn on the “SW1” switch on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.

- The “ON” lamp must be lit on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.

STEP3: On the MP card, set SW3 to “C” and press SW1.

- After 30 to 40 seconds, the “MN” lamp turns on.
- The system has loaded the Resident System Program.

NOTE: If the “MJ” lamp is lit, repeat Step 3.

STEP4: On the MP card, set SW3 to the “0” position.

– 277 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY

SYSTEM DATA ENTRY

There are two methods for data entry, using a Customer Administration Terminal (CAT)
ATTENTION
or a Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT). Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

NOTE: For assigning system data, refer to the “Command Manual”.

CAT
Any Dterm can be assigned as a CAT through programming. The Dterm can still be used as a regular tele-
phone when it is not in CAT mode. If the system is initialized by “C” (Resident System Program), every
Dterm will be able to go into CAT mode. If the system is initialized by “B” (All Clear), only LEN000 is
assigned as a CAT port (the DLC card must be installed in slot LT00).

To use a Dterm as a CAT, follow the procedures shown below.

NOTE: It is necessary to complete Steps 1 through 6 within 4 seconds.

To set CAT mode:

1. Press TRF or Transfer

2. Press CNF or Conf

- CNF/Conf lamp flashes

3. Press *
- CNF/Conf lamp is off

4. Press TRF or Transfer

5. Press CNF or Conf

- CNF/Conf lamp flashes

6. Press #
- CNF/Conf, SPKR/Speaker, FNC/Feature lamps are lit
- “CAT MODE” is displayed on the LCD

7. Press LNR/SPD or Redial

- “COMMAND = -” is displayed on the LCD

– 278 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY

To reset CAT mode:

While “COMMAND = -” is displayed on the LCD:

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
1. Lift the handset (off hook) Handling
Precautions Required
-SPKR/Speaker lamp turns off.

2. Restore the handset (on hook)

-CNF/Conf, FNC/Feature lamps turn off.
-LCD returns to clock.

MAT

Refer to the “MATWorX User Guide”.

Confirming Lamp Indication

After system data entry, confirm proper operation of the system using indicator lamps.

• RUN Lamp Flashing (120 IPM)

Check that the RUN lamps of PN-CP24-A/CP24-B/CP24-C/CP24-D card and other application cir-
cuit cards are flashing.

• ON Lamps of All PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards Lightning

Check that the ON lamps of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards are lightning and their MJ/MN
lamps have gone out.

• BL Lamps Gone Out

Check that the BL lamps of all the line/trunk circuit cards have gone out. If BL lamps are flashing,
it means that the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or the system data for this card is not
assigned.

For more details of lamp indication, see “CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SET-
TINGS”. For information of maintenance servicing and troubleshooting of the equipment, refer to the
“Maintenance Manual”.

– 279 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
OPERATION TEST

OPERATION TEST
Confirm the entered system data and hardware, including cable connection, by completing the following
operational tests.

• Basic Connection Test at MDF

Station Line Test (Operator Call from all stations)

Central Office Trunk Test (Incoming, Outgoing)
Tie Line Trunk Test (Incoming, Outgoing)

• Service Feature Test

Call Transfer
Step Call
Executive Right of Way (Executive Override)
Call Hold
Call Back
Call Forwarding-All Calls/Don’t Answer (No Answer)/Busy Line
Call Pickup
Station Hunting-Pilot/Circular
Speed Calling-Station/System (Station Speed Dialing/System Speed Dialing)
Paging Access (External Paging with Meet-me)
Announcement Service
Other selected features

NOTE: Feature names in the parenthesis are for North America.

– 280 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM DATA SAVE/CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK

SYSTEM DATA SAVE

After system data entry, save the system data to floppy diskette. Refer to “Maintenance Manual” for the
operation of system data save.

CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK

Cleaning

Clean the following places:

• Inside of the main equipment, especially the bottom of the base.

• On the Top Cover.
• Around the Main Equipment and the MDF.
• Keyboard on the Attendant Console.

Visual Check

(1) Check to see if all circuit cards are in their positions correctly.
(2) Check that the cable connections in the PIM are correctly and completely connected, and the routing
of the cables has been done smoothly and neatly.
(3) Check to see if the MAT is removed.

– 281 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MOUNTING FRONT COVER

MOUNTING FRONT COVER

NOTE: When the system is a multiple-Module configuration, attach the FRONT COVER of those other
than bottom Module in the following procedures.

(1) Remove two screws located on the inside of the FRONT COVER, and remove the
BRACKET.
(2) Insert the BRACKET from under the hook of the FRONT COVER and fix the BRACKET
to the FRONT COVER with screws.
(3) Attach the FRONT COVER in an order from top-stack PIM.

FRONT COVER

BRACKET

SCREW

– 282 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

The Backup CPU system has two MP cards (MP0, MP1) for active/stand by per system.
The system can execute the changeover of active/stand by MP cards according to the emergency notice
(EMA) from the MP card.
[Series 3200 R6.1 software required]

Required Equipment

Required Equipment for Backup CPU System

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION QUANTITY REMARKS

SN1658 PIMMF PIM for Backup CPU sys- 1 For PIM0
SN1664 PIMMH tem
[For EU]
PN-CP27-A/ MP Card for Backup CPU 2 For MP0 and MP1
PN-CP27-B system

– 283 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

Service Conditions

(1) Date and time for system clock must be set by CM02.
The system clock is updated hourly from the active MP card to the stand by MP card.
(2) The MP0 and MP1 cards must have the same configuration.
• The same software version must be provided to the MP0 and MP1 cards.
• When one MP card mounts the ETHER card, another MP card must mount the ETHER card.
• The same type of Key FD data must be loaded to the MP0 and MP1 cards.
You must prepare two Key FDs per each Key FD function and load the Key FD data to the MP0
and MP1 cards respectively.
(3) Automatic office data copy from the active MP card to the stand by MP card can be executed once
to four times a day by CM43 Y=4>00-03.
(4) The Day/Night mode change in each tenant is updated every two hours from the active MP card to
the stand by MP card.
(5) The MAT and OAI terminal that are connected to the system are available after MP cards changeover
occurs. But, the DtermIPs that are connected via Virtual IPT or router to the system are not available
for a several minutes until the APR table is updated.
(6) When MP cards changeover occurs while copying the office data from the active MP card to the
stand by MP card, the office data that has been copied is cancelled and the office data copy cannot
be executed.
(7) When MP cards changeover occurs while executing the system data backup of the stand by MP card,
the MP cards changeover will be executed after executing system data backup.
(8) When MP cards changeover occurs, the DtermIP with protected login mode requires the login
operation again.
(9) While copying the office data from the active MP card to the stand by MP card, saving/loading/
verifying of the office data and the AP program downloading cannot be executed from the MAT.
An error message is indicated on the MAT.
(10) While saving/loading/verifying of the office data and executing the AP program download from the
MAT, the office data cannot be copied from the active MP card to the stand by MP card.
(11) Peg count data and fault information can be taken over the stand by MP card from the active MP card
after MP cards changeover occurs.

– 284 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

Installation Procedure
Install the Backup CPU system according to the procedure as shown below.
For switch settings on the MP card (PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B), see “PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)”.
Page 298
For mounting locations of the MP card, see “Mounting Locations of MP Cards”. Page 286

(1) Set the SW3 switch on the MP0 card to 2/3 (Off-line), and mount the MP0 card into MP00 slot.
(2) Turn the system power ON.
(3) Connect the MAT to the MP0 card, and clear all system data by CM00.
(4) Assign the necessary office data to the MP0 card (Date and time must be assigned by CM02).
Then execute the system data backup by CMEC Y=6>0:0.
(5) Load the Key FD data to the MP0 card.
(6) When setting the automatic office data copy from the active MP card to the stand by MP card at the
predetermined time, assign the data below.
The office data can be copied from the active MP card to the stand by MP card once to four times a
day. Maximum four starting time for automatic office data copy can be set to the system.
CM43 Y=4>00-03: HH MM
HH : Hour (00-23)
MM: Minutes (00-59)
If no data is set, the office data is copied from the active MP card to the stand by MP card at 2:00 a.m.
(7) Flip the MB switch on the MP0 card to ON (UP position).
(8) Set the SW3 switch on the MP1 card to 2/3 (Off-line).
(9) Flip the MB switch on the MP1 card to ON (UP position), and mount the MP1 card into MP01 slot.
(10) Flip the MB switch on the MP1 card to OFF (DOWN position).
(11) Connect the MAT to the MP1 card, and clear all system data by CM00.
(12) Load the Key FD data to the MP1 card.
(13) Flip the MB switch on the MP0 and MP1 cards to ON (UP position), and set the SW3 switch on the
MP0 and MP1 cards to 0 (On-line).
(14) Flip the MB switch on the MP0 card to OFF (DOWN position) and confirm if the RUN lamp on the
MP0 card lights.
(15) Flip the MB switch on the MP1 card to OFF (DOWN position).
- The MP0 acts. The RUN lamp on the MP0 card flashes at 120IPM.
- The MP1 card comes into a stand by mode. The STBY lamp lights and the RUN lamp flashes in
a slow pace, on the MP1 card.
- 3 to 6 minutes later, the office data copy from the MP0 to MP1 card starts. The RUN lamp on the
MP1 card flashes intermittently.
- When the office data copy finishes, the system data backup of MP1 card is executed. The RUN
lamp is out and the SYSD lamp lights, on the MP1 card (About 1 minute).
- When the system data backup finishes, the RUN lamp on the MP1 card flashes in a slow pace
(Maximum 10 minutes later).

– 285 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

Mounting Locations of MP Cards

The mounting locations of the MP cards are illustrated below.
Mount the MP0 (PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B) card into MP00 slot.
Mount the MP1 (PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B) card into MP01 slot.

NOTE: Flip the MB switch on the MP card to ON (UP position), before mounting the MP card.

Mounting Locations of PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B Card

LT01/AP01

LT04/AP04

LT05/AP05

LT07/AP07

LT08/AP08

LT10/AP10
LT00/AP00

LT02/AP02

LT03/AP03

LT06/AP06

LT09/AP09

MP00
MP01

PFT
VM

AC/DC
PIM0 PWR
(For
Backup
CPU)
LTC1 LTC3
LTC0 LTC2

DC/DC BWB

PWR

MP1 MP0

– 286 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

MP System Changeover
• Automatic Changeover
By detecting the emergency notice (EMA), the system executes the changeover from the MP0 to the
MP1 or from the MP1 to the MP0 automatically.

• Manual Changeover
There are two ways for manual changeover as follows.

Case1 By MB Switch Setting:

Flip the MB switch on the MP0 card to ON (UP position).
- Now changeover is executed.
When you want the stand by MP card to return to the active MP, flip the MB switch on
the stand by MP card to OFF (DOWN position), then flip the MB switch on the active
MP card to ON (UP position).

Case2 By System Data Setting:

Assign the following data for changeover.
CME0 Y=6>3600: MM DD HH mm
MM: Month (01-12)
DD : Date (01-31)
HH : Hour (00-23)
mm : Minute (00-59)

NOTE: After setting the first data, the MAT indicates “INITIAL?_”.
Then input the present time. Now changeover is executed.
When there is no MP card for stand by, or the MB switch on the MP card in stand by is ON (UP
position), the MAT indicates “HARDWARE ERROR”.

– 287 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BACKUP CPU SYSTEM

Office Data Copy

There are two ways for office data copy as follows.

• Automatic Office Data Copy

When a Stand by MP starts:
3 to 6 minutes later after the MP card has entered into a stand by mode, all office data are copied from
the active MP card to the stand by MP card automatically.
At a Predetermined Time:
The office data is copied automatically from the active MP card to the stand by MP card at the pre-
determined time assigned by CM43 Y=4>00-03 once to four times a day.

NOTE: If you set two or more starting time for automatic office data copy, set the time with fifteen min-
utes or more intervals.

• Manual Office Data Copy

Set the data for manual office data copy as follows.
CMEC Y=5>0: 0 (start copy)

NOTE: “1” is displayed during the office data is being copied.

– 288 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch2002.fm
 CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS

CHAPTER 3

LAMP INDICATIONS AND

SWITCH SETTINGS

This chapter explains the meaning of lamp indications and the switch settings
of each circuit card used in the system.

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER .............................................. 290

CONTROL CARD ...................................................................... 291
APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD ........................................ 319
LINE/TRUNK CARD .................................................................. 484

– 289 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3001.fm
 CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER

This chapter explains the following items about each circuit card used in this system. Explanations are giv-
en in alphabetical order of the circuit card names within each circuit card category (Control, Application
Processor, and Line/Trunk).

(1) Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The locations of lamps, switches, and connectors of each circuit card are shown by a face layout.

(2) Lamp Indications

The name, color, and functions of each indicator lamp equipped on each circuit card are described in
a table.

(3) Switch Settings

The name, settings, and functions of each switch equipped on each circuit card are described in a
table.

Each switch setting table has a “CHECK” column. Make necessary entries in the CHECK column during
and/or after the system installation and maintenance, and use each table as a reference for subsequent sys-
tem maintenance and operations.

– 290 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3001.fm
 CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
CONTROL CARD

CONTROL CARD
The table below shows the control cards to be explained in this section.

List of Control Cards

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
LAMP SWITCH POWER ON
NAME
×: PROVIDED ×: PROVIDED × : ALLOWED REFERENCE
(FUNCTIONAL
–: NOT –: NOT : ALLOWED PAGE
NAME)
PROVIDED PROVIDED AFTER MB*
–: NOT
ALLOWED
PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/
× × – Page 292
PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D (MP)
PN-CP27-A/
× × Page 298
PN-CP27-B (MP)
PN-CP15 (FP) × × Page 303
PN-PW00
× × Page 305
(EXTPWR)
PZ-M606-A
× – – Page 307
(ETHER)
PZ-PW121
× × – Page 309
(AC/DC PWR)
PZ-PW126
× × – Page 312
(AC/DC PWR)
PZ-PW122
× × – Page 315
(DC/DC PWR)
PZ-PW135
× × – Page 317
(PWR)

*MB = Make Busy

– 291 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

JP1
SW3
RUN
SW1

SW2
JACK
SYSD
VR
L0
CLK IN
JP0

SW4
RS1

RS0
CONN
DK

CONN: To CONN connector on PZ-M606-A (ETHER)

– 292 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flash (120 IPM) : On Line
Flash (slowly) : Off Line
OFF or ON : This card is not operating.
Lights momentarily when initializing this card.
SYSD Red Flashes while writing the system data for backup to the Flash Memory.
Lights while copying the system data from the Flash Memory to the
SDRAM.
L0 Green Flashes at 240 IPM while copying the MP program from the Flash
Memory to the SDRAM.
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 240 IPM while downloading the MP pro-
gram to the Flash Memory (outdated side).
[Series 3500 software required]
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, remains lit when the MP program downloaded to the
Flash Memory (outdated side) is completed.
[Series 3500 software required]
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, disappears when the program change of the Flash
Memory (outdated side) and the Flash Memory (upgraded side) is com-
pleted.
[Series 3500 software required]
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 120 IPM when the MP program download
to the Flash Memory (outdated side) is interrupted/fails.
[Series 3500 software required]
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, flashes at 60 IPM while copying the program of
Flash Memory (upgraded side) to the Flash Memory (outdated side).
[Series 3500 software required]
When executing the MP program remote download to the PN-CP24-C/
PN-CP24-D card, flashes specially (ON : Off = 7 : 3) when the pro-
gram copy from the Flash Memory (upgraded side) to the Flash Mem-
ory (outsided side) is completed
[Series 3500 software required]
CLK IN Green Remains lit while receiving clock signals to the PLO.

– 293 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Rotary SW) On Line
0 (Call processing is in progress)
0 Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
2
• I/O port: As per CM40 Y=08
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
3
• I/O port: 9600 bps (Fixed)
Debug Mode
4 (For collecting control signals between
NOTE 1
MP and SIP cards)
5 Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
0-F NOTE 2 • I/O port: 9600 bps
6 Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
NOTE 2 • I/O port: 19200 bps
7 Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
NOTE 2 • I/O port: 38400 bps
8 Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
NOTE 2 • I/O port: 57600 bps
B For clearing the office data
C For setting the resident system program
1, 9 Not used
A, D-F

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: Only when executing “MP Program Download (Local download)” using MATWorX, set the
SW3 to 5-8.
Continued on next page

– 294 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Push SW) For initializing CPU

SW2 ON A-law (Australia)

(Piano SW) 1
OFF µ-law (North America)
OFF Selection of PLO0 input
4 (Phase Locked Oscillator)
3
2
• For clock receiver office:
1
SW2-2 SW2-3 FUNCTION
ON
OFF OFF 1.5 MHz clock
[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/
PN-24PRT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-
M649]

2, 3 ON OFF 192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF ON 2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M650]
ON ON Not used

• For clock source office:

SW2-2 SW2-3
OFF OFF
When using RS1 port for built-in
ON
4 MODEM
OFF When using RS1 port for RS-232C
Continued on next page

– 295 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW4 (Dip SW) 1 OFF Not used

ON
2 OFF Not used
1 2 3 4
Selection of PLO1 input
(Phase Locked Oscillator)
• For clock receiver office:

SW4-3 SW4-4 FUNCTION

OFF OFF 1.5 MHz clock
[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/
PN-24PRT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-
M649]

3, 4 ON OFF 192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF ON 2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M650]
ON ON Not used
• For clock source office:
SW4-3 SW4-4
OFF OFF
VR (Rotary SW) Variable Resistor for External Hold
Tone Source
(Volume [low to high] : Clockwise)

DK (Connector)
02 Ground detection
02
01 01 Ground sending

Continued on next page

– 296 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-CP24-A/PN-CP24-B/PN-CP24-C/PN-CP24-D (MP)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
JP0 (Jumper pin) For normal operation
UP
(Battery backup ON)

Not used
Front DOWN
(Battery backup OFF)
JP1 (Jumper pin) For using external hold tone source
RIGHT (When Pin Jack on the MP card is in
use)
Front For using internal hold tone source
LEFT (When Merody IC on the MP card is in
use)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 297 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

JP1
SW3
RUN
SW1

SW2

JACK

VR SYSD
L0
CLK IN
STBY
JP0 MB
SW4

CONN RS1

RS0

DK

CONN: To CONN connector on PZ-M606-A (ETHER)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flash (120 IPM) : On Line
Flash (slowly) : Off Line
OFF or ON : This card is not operating.
Lights momentarily when initializing this card.
SYSD Red Flashes at 240 IPM while writing the system data for backup to the
Flash Memory. Lights while copying the system data from the Flash
Memory to the SDRAM.
L0 Green Flashes at 240 IPM while copying the MP program from the Flash
Memory to the SDRAM.
CLK IN Green Remains lit while receiving clock signals to the PLO.
STBY Red Remains lit while this card is a stand by mode.

– 298 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Rotary SW) On Line
0 (Call processing is in progress)
0
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
2
• I/O port: As per CM40 Y=08
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
3
• I/O port: 9600 bps (Fixed)
NOTE 1 Debug Mode
4 (For collecting control signals between
MP and SIP cards)
5 Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
0-F NOTE 2 • I/O port: 9600 bps
6 Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
NOTE 2 • I/O port: 19200 bps
7 Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
NOTE 2 • I/O port: 38400 bps
8 Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
NOTE 2 • I/O port: 57600 bps
B For clearing the office data
C For setting the resident system program
1, 9 Not used
A, D-F

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: Only when executing “MP Program Download” using MATWorX, set the SW3 to 5-8.
Continued on next page

– 299 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Push SW) For initializing CPU

SW2 ON A-law (Australia)

(Piano SW) 1
OFF µ-law (North America)
OFF
Selection of PLO0 input
4 (Phase Locked Oscillator)
3
2
• For clock receiver office:
1
SW2-2 SW2-3 FUNCTION
ON
OFF OFF 1.5 MHz clock
[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/
PN-24PRT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-
M649]

2, 3 ON OFF 192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF ON 2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M650]
ON ON Not used

• For clock source office:

SW2-2 SW2-3
OFF OFF
When using RS1 port for built-in
ON
4 MODEM
OFF When using RS1 port for RS-232C
Continued on next page

– 300 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW4 (Dip SW) 1 OFF Not used
ON 1 2 3 4
2 OFF Not used
Selection of PLO1 input
(Phase Locked Oscillator)
• For clock receiver office:

SW4-3 SW4-4 FUNCTION

OFF OFF 1.5 MHz clock
[For PN-24DTA/PN-24CCT/
PN-24PRT/PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-
M649]

3, 4 ON OFF 192 kHz clock

[For PN-BRTA]
OFF ON 2 MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC/PN-2BRT/
PN-4BRT/PN-30CCT/PN-30PRT/
PN-DTA/PN-DTB/PZ-M650]
ON ON Not used
• For clock source office:
SW4-3 SW4-4
OFF OFF
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 3
VR (Rotary SW) Variable Resistor for External Hold
Tone Source
(Volume [low to high] : Clockwise)

NOTE 3: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

– 301 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-CP27-A/PN-CP27-B (MP)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
DK (Connector)
02 Ground detection
02
01
01 Ground sending

JP0 (Jumper pin) For normal operation

UP
(Battery backup ON)

Front Not used

DOWN
(Battery backup OFF)
JP1 (Jumper pin) For using external hold tone source
RIGHT (When Pin Jack on the MP card is in
use)
Front For using internal hold tone source
LEFT (When Merody IC on the MP card is in
use)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 302 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-CP15 (FP)

PN-CP15 (FP)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB

SW1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while the circuit card is operating normally.

– 303 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PN-CP15 (FP)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE For setting FP No.
(Rotary SW) 0 Not used
0-3 1 For mounting this card in PIM2
0
32
1 2 For mounting this card in PIM4

NOTE 1 3 For mounting this card in PIM6

4-F Not used
MB (Toggle SW) For make-busy
UP
ON

For normal operation

DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1 Not used
(Piano Key SW) 1-3 OFF

OFF
For normal operation
4 ON
3
2 4
1 Not used
OFF
ON

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 304 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)

PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

08 -48 V
07 -48 V
06 E
05 E
RUN
04 -48 V
MB 03 -48 V
02 E
01 E

CONN To DESKCON

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Remains lit while –48 V power is being supplied.

– 305 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW) For make-busy
UP
ON (–48 V power off)
For normal operation
DOWN
NOTE (–48 V power on)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 306 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-M606-A (ETHER)

PZ-M606-A (ETHER)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

FACE REAR

LAN

CONN: CONN
To CONN Connector
on PN-CP24-A/
PN-CP24-B/
LINK
PN-CP24-C/ 100M
PN-CP27-A (MP) TX
RX
COL

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
LINK Green Remains lit when link is established.
100M Green ON: Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.
OFF: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
TX Green Remains lit when transmitting the data.
RX Green Remains lit when receiving the data.
COL Yellow Remains lit when detecting IP data collision.

– 307 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-M606-A (ETHER)

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

Mounting PZ-M606-A Card

When mounting the ETHER card on the MP card, do the following procedure.

STEP1: Take off four screws from the rear side of ETHER support.

NOTE: Supports and screws are attached to the ETHER card.

STEP2: Connect the CONN connector on the ETHER card and the CONN connector on the MP card.

STEP3: Secure the ETHER card to the MP card with four screws which have been taken off by STEP1.

Mounting ETHER Card on MP card

Support

ETHER Card
CONN Connector of ETHER Card

ETHER Card

MP Card

CONN Connector on MP Card

– 308 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)

PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW 301
SW 102

MJ MJ
MN MN
ON ON
SW 101

CN103 (SIGNAL)

CN104

BATT BATT

SW2

ON
CN1

OFF

SW 1

SW2

– 309 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
MJ Red Remains lit when a major trouble occurs or resident system program is
not properly loaded.
MN Yellow Remains lit when a minor trouble occurs or resident system program is
successfully loaded, or a station line is locked out.
ON Green Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied.

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 For turning AC power and the battery
ON
on
ON
For turning AC power and the battery
OFF OFF
off
SW2
FORWARD AC INPUT: 90 V-132 V
100/120 V AC 240 V AC
BACK-
AC INPUT: 180 V-264 V
WARD
SW101 1 OFF Not used
(Piano key)
Float charging, for sealed batteries
ON
(Normal Setting).
ON
1 OPTION: Periodic Equalize charging of
2 external vented batteries.
2

Float charging, for vented batteries

OFF OFF
only.
Continued on next page

– 310 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW301 (Dip SW) ON CR Voltage: 75 Vrms
90 V 75 V 1
OFF CR Voltage: 90 Vrms
1
OFF ON
2 ON Frequency: 20 Hz
2
25 Hz 20 Hz
OFF Frequency: 25 Hz

SW102 PRESS To start each PIM on battery power

MOMEN- when AC power is not provided
TARILY

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 311 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)

PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW 301
SW 102

MJ MJ
MN MN
ON ON
SW 101

CN103 (SIGNAL)

CN104

BATT BATT

ON
CN1

OFF

SW 1

– 312 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
MJ Red Remains lit when a major trouble occurs or resident system program is
not properly loaded.
MN Yellow Remains lit when a minor trouble occurs or resident system program is
successfully loaded, or a station line is locked out.
ON Green Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied.

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 For turning AC power and the battery
ON
on
ON
For turning AC power and the battery
OFF OFF
off
SW101 1 OFF Not used
(Piano key)
Float charging, for sealed batteries
ON
(Normal Setting).
ON
1 2 OPTION: Periodic Equalize charging of
2 external vented batteries.
Float charging, for vented batteries
OFF OFF
only.
Continued on next page

– 313 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW301 (Dip SW) ON CR Voltage: 75 Vrms
90 V 75 V 1
OFF CR Voltage: 90 Vrms
1
OFF ON
2 ON Frequency: 20 Hz
2
25 Hz 20 Hz
OFF Frequency: 25 Hz

SW102 PRESS To start each PIM on battery power

MOMEN- when AC power is not provided
TARILY

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 314 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)

PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CONN ON

SW

CONN connector:
To PWR1 connector on PIM BWB

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (-48 V, E):

To PWR0C connector on PIM BWB

– 315 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
ON Green Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied.

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW
ON For turning AC power on
ON

OFF OFF For turning AC power off

– 316 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-PW135 (PWR)

PZ-PW135 (PWR)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

MJ MJ
MN MN
ON ON

SIG

SW1
-27 V
FG
GND

ON
DC INPUT SW
OFF

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
MJ Red Remains lit when a major trouble occurs or resident system program is
not properly loaded.
MN Yellow Remains lit when a minor trouble occurs or resident system program is
successfully loaded, or a station line is locked out.
ON Green Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied.

– 317 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 PZ-PW135 (PWR)

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW For turning DC power and the battery
ON
on
ON
For turning DC power and the battery
OFF OFF
off
SW1 (Piano Key SW) ON CR Voltage: 75 Vrms
1
ON
OFF CR Voltage: 90 Vrms
1
2
ON Frequency: 20 Hz
2
OFF
OFF Frequency: 25 Hz

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 318 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3002.fm
 CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD

APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD

The table below shows the application processor cards to be explained in this section.

List of Application Processor Cards

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
LAMP SWITCH
NAME POWER ON
×: PROVIDED ×: PROVIDED REFERENCE
(FUNCTIONAL ×: ALLOWED
–: NOT –: NOT PAGE
NAME) : ALLOWED
PROVIDED PROVIDED
AFTER MB*
–: NOT ALLOWED
PN-AP00-B (AP00) × × Page 321
PN-AP00-D (AP00) × × Page 327
PN-AP00-B (DBM) × × Page 333
PN-BRTA (BRT) × × Page 336
PN-2BRTC (BRT) × × Page 341
PN-2BRTK (BRT) × × Page 346
PN-4BRTA-A (BRT) × × Page 351
PN-24CCTA (CCT) × × Page 359
PN-30CCTA (CCT) × × Page 365
PN-CFTC (CFT) × × Page 372
PN-CFTC-A (CFT) × × Page 374
PN-DAIA-A × × Page 376
(DAIA)
PN-DAIB (DAIB) × × Page 381
PN-DAIC (DAIC) × × Page 385
PN-DAID-A × × Page 388
(DAID)
PN-DAIE (DAIE) × × Page 394
PN-DAIF (DAIF) × × Page 398
PN-DTA/ × × Page 402
PN-DTB (CCH)
Continued on next page
*MB = Make Busy

– 319 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD

List of Application Processor Card

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
LAMP SWITCH
NAME POWER ON
×: PROVIDED ×: PROVIDED REFERENCE
(FUNCTIONAL ×: ALLOWED
–: NOT –: NOT PAGE
NAME) : ALLOWED
PROVIDED PROVIDED
AFTER MB*
–: NOT ALLOWED
PN-DTA × × Page 407
(CCT/DTI/PRT)
PN-DTB × × Page 414
(CCT/DTI/PRT)
PN-24DTA-C (DTI) × × Page 421
PN-30DTC-C (DTI) × × Page 427
PN-8ETIA (HUB) × × – Page 433
PN-2ILCC (ILC) × × Page 435
PN-8IPTA (SIP) × × Page 440
PN-IPTB (IPT) × × Page 444
PN-24PRTA (PRT) × × Page 448
PN-30PRTA (PRT) × × Page 456
PN-4RSTB (MFR) × × Page 463
PN-4RSTC/ × × Page 465
PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)
PN-SC00 (CCH) × × Page 467
PN-SC01 (DCH) × × Page 470
PN-SC03-B/ × × Page 473
PN-SC03-C (CSH)
PN-SC03-B (ICH) × × Page 475
PZ-M537 – × – Page 477
(EXPMEM)
PZ-M542 (CONN) – × Page 480
PZ-M557 (CONN) – × Page 482

*MB = Make Busy

– 320 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-AP00-B (AP00)

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CONN
SENSE

RUN

MB
JP0

SW1

L3
L2
L1
L0

RS3
RS2
JP1 RS1
RS0

SW0 SW2

CONN: To CONNR connector on PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

– 321 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-AP00-B (AP00)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
L0-L3 Green Second data setting value for CMD001 > 250
0 1 (port0)-3 (port2)
L3 Indication of transmitting Indication of CTS signal status on
status of port0 port0-2
L2 Indication of transmitting Indication of DCD signal status on
status of port1 port0-2
L1 Indication of transmitting Indication of TXD signal status on
status of port2 port0-2
L0 Indication of transmitting Indication of RXD signal status on
status of port3 port0-2

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
Continued on next page

– 322 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-AP00-B (AP00)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (Dip SW) ON Not used
ON
1-3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF For normal operation

ON For normal operation

4, 5
OFF Not used
Sets No. 0 Port forcibly in a state which
ON
6 DSR signal is always provided.
NOTE 3 Receives DSR signal from the DCE on
OFF
No. 0 Port.
Sets No. 1 Port forcibly in a state which
ON
7 DSR signal is always provided.
NOTE 3 Receives DSR signal from the DCE on
OFF
No. 1 Port.
Sets No. 2 Port forcibly in a state which
ON
8 DSR signal is always provided.
NOTE 3 Receives DSR signal from the DCE on
OFF
No. 2 Port.
SW1 ON For normal operation
(Piano Key SW) 1
OFF Not used
OFF

4 ON For normal operation

3 2 For AP data clearing by CMD100/
2
OFF
1 CMD101
ON ON For normal operation
3 For AP data clearing by CMD100/
OFF
CMD101
ON AP No. 4-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 323 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-AP00-B (AP00)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) Sets No. 3 Port forcibly in a state which
ON
1 DSR signal is always provided.
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE 3 Receives DSR signal from the DCE on
OFF
No. 3 Port.
Enables the receive clock from the DCE
(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchro-
ON
nous. (Clock is received at the RXC ter-
minal)
2
• Uses internal clock as the receive
clock when No. 1 Port is synchro-
OFF
nous.
• When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
Enables transmit clock from the DCE
(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchro-
ON
nous. (Clock is received at the TXC (2)
3 terminal.)
• Uses internal clock as the send clock
OFF when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
• When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
Transmit the send clock from the DTE
(this card) when No. 1 Port is synchro-
ON
nous. (Clock is transmitted from the
TXC (1) terminal)
4
• Not transmit the send clock from the
DTE (this card) when No. 1 Port is
OFF
synchronous.
• When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
ON When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
5
OFF When No. 1 Port is synchronous.
Continued on next page

– 324 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-AP00-B (AP00)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) • Uses internal clock as the receive
ON clock when No. 1 Port is synchro-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
nous.
6 • When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
NOTE 4 Enables receive clock from the DCE
(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchro-
OFF
nous. (Clock is received at the RXC ter-
minal)

7 OFF Not used

8 OFF Not used

JP0 (Jumper SW) For normal operation

UP (Battery backup ON)
Not used
DOWN
(Battery backup OFF)
JP1 (Jumper SW)
UP Not used

DOWN For normal operation

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the DCE connected to the port does not provide a function to send the DSR signals, set
the switch to ON. In this case, the AP00 card cannot recognize the actual state of the DCE, so
that the call records or system messages will not be stored in the memory buffer on the AP00
card even if the cable is disconnected from the DCE.
When the switch is set to OFF, the call records or system messages will be stored when the cable
is disconnected, and will be sent when the cable is re-connected.
Continued on next page

– 325 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-AP00-B (AP00)

NOTE 4: The use of the external clock (from the distant end) or the internal clock is determined by the
following table:

SW2
CLOCK
2 6
External ON OFF
Internal OFF ON

– 326 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-AP00-D (AP00)

PN-AP00-D (AP00)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB
JP0

SW1

L3
L2
L1
L0

RS3
RS2
JP1 RS1
RS0

SW0 SW2

– 327 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-AP00-D (AP00)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
L0-L3 Green Second data setting value for CMD001 > 250
0 1 (port0)-3 (port2)
L3 Indication of transmitting Indication of CTS signal status on
status of port0 port0-2
L2 Indication of transmitting Indication of DCD signal status on
status of port1 port0-2
L1 Indication of transmitting Indication of TXD signal status on
status of port2 port0-2
L0 Indication of transmitting Indication of RXD signal status on
status of port3 port0-2

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
Continued on next page

– 328 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-AP00-D (AP00)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (Dip SW) ON Not used
ON
1-3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF For normal operation

ON For normal operation

4, 5
OFF Not used
Sets No. 0 Port forcibly in a state which
ON
6 DSR signal is always provided.
NOTE 3 Receives DSR signal from the DCE on
OFF
No. 0 Port.
Sets No. 1 Port forcibly in a state which
ON
7 DSR signal is always provided.
NOTE 3 Receives DSR signal from the DCE on
OFF
No. 1 Port.
Sets No. 2 Port forcibly in a state which
ON
8 DSR signal is always provided.
NOTE 3 Receives DSR signal from the DCE on
OFF
No. 2 Port.
SW1 ON For normal operation
(Piano Key SW) 1
OFF Not used
OFF

4 ON For normal operation

3 2 For AP data clearing by CMD100/
2
OFF
1 CMD101
ON ON For normal operation
3 For AP data clearing by CMD100/
OFF
CMD101
ON AP No. 4-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 329 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-AP00-D (AP00)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) Sets No. 3 Port forcibly in a state which
ON
1 DSR signal is always provided.
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE 3 Receives DSR signal from the DCE on
OFF
No. 3 Port.
Enables the receive clock from the DCE
(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchro-
ON
nous. (Clock is received at the RXC ter-
minal)
2
• Uses internal clock as the receive
clock when No. 1 Port is synchro-
OFF
nous.
• When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
Enables transmit clock from the DCE
(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchro-
ON
nous. (Clock is received at the TXC (2)
3 terminal.)
• Uses internal clock as the send clock
OFF when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
• When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
Transmit the send clock from the DTE
(this card) when No. 1 Port is synchro-
ON
nous. (Clock is transmitted from the
TXC (1) terminal)
4
• Not transmit the send clock from the
DTE (this card) when No. 1 Port is
OFF
synchronous.
• When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
ON When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
5
OFF When No. 1 Port is synchronous.
Continued on next page

– 330 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-AP00-D (AP00)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) • Uses internal clock as the receive
ON clock when No. 1 Port is synchro-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
nous.
6 • When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
NOTE 4 Enables receive clock from the DCE
(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchro-
OFF
nous. (Clock is received at the RXC ter-
minal)

7 OFF Not used

8 OFF Not used

JP0 (Jumper SW) For normal operation

UP (Battery backup ON)
Not used
DOWN
(Battery backup OFF)
JP1 (Jumper SW)
UP Not used

DOWN For normal operation

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the DCE connected to the port does not provide a function to send the DSR signals, set
the switch to ON. In this case, the AP00 card cannot recognize the actual state of the DCE, so
that the call records or system messages will not be stored in the memory buffer on the AP00
card even if the cable is disconnected from the DCE.
When the switch is set to OFF, the call records or system messages will be stored when the cable
is disconnected, and will be sent when the cable is re-connected.
Continued on next page

– 331 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-AP00-D (AP00)

NOTE 4: The use of the external clock (from the distant end) or the internal clock is determined by the
following table:

SW2
CLOCK
2 6
External ON OFF
Internal OFF ON

– 332 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-AP00-B (DBM)

PN-AP00-B (DBM)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CONN
SENSE

RUN

MB
JP0

SW1

L3
L2
L1
L0

RS3
RS2
JP1 RS1
RS0

SW0 SW2

CONN: Not used

RS0-RS3: Not used

– 333 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-AP00-B (DBM)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
L0-L3 Green Not used

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW0 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1-8 OFF Not used

Continued on next page

– 334 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-AP00-B (DBM)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 ON For normal operation
(Piano Key SW) 1
OFF Not used
OFF

4 ON For normal operation

3 2
2 OFF Not used
1

ON
ON For normal operation
3
OFF Not used

ON AP No. 4-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1-8 OFF Not used

JP0 (Jumper SW) For normal operation

UP (Battery backup ON)
Not used
DOWN
(Battery backup OFF)
JP1 (Jumper SW)
UP Not used

DOWN For normal operation

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 335 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-BRTA (BRT)

PN-BRTA (BRT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENS

RUN

MB

B1
B2
D
ALM

SW0

SW1

– 336 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-BRTA (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
B1 Green B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B2 Green B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation

– 337 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-BRTA (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENS 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1
0-3 Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW0 (Dip SW) ON For normal operation
1
ON 1 2 3 4 OFF Not used
Source clock signal from network is
ON sent to the PLO of MP card according
2 to the switch setting of SW0-3.
NOTE 3
Source clock signal from network is not
OFF
sent to the PLO of MP card.
Clock signal is sent to the PLO0 of MP
ON
3 card.
NOTE 3 Clock signal is sent to the PLO1 of MP
OFF
card.

ON For normal operation

4
OFF Not used
Continued on next page

– 338 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-BRTA (BRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Dip SW) For terminating the transmitting side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω .
ON 1 2
1 To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2.
For terminating the receiving side of
ON
channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω .
2 To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

– 339 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-BRTA (BRT)

NOTE 3: Set the SW0-2 and SW0-3 as follows:

BRT0 BRT1 BRT2 ---- BRT11

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
----
0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3
When one MP card will receive the
BRT is ON ON clock signal from BRT0 at its
provided. PLO0 input.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
When more
conditions.
than one BRT is ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ---- OFF ON
Should a clock failure occur
provided.
with BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

– 340 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2BRTC (BRT)

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENS

RUN

MB

B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
SW11
SW10
SW0

– 341 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
B21 Red No.1 Circuit B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B11 Red B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D1 Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM1 Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation
B20 Red No.0 Circuit B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B10 Red B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D0 Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM0 Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation

– 342 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENS 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW11-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW11-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1

0-3 Not used

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW0, SW10 For terminating the transmitting side of
ON
(Dip SW) channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω .
ON
1 To remove the terminating resistor on
1 2
OFF the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2.
For terminating the receiving side of
ON
channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω .
2 To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2.
Continued on next page

– 343 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2BRTC (BRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW11 (Dip SW) ON For normal operation
1
ON 1 2 3 4 OFF Not used
Source clock signal from network is
ON sent to the PLO of MP card according
2 to the switch setting of SW11-3.
NOTE 3
Source clock signal from network is not
OFF
sent to the PLO of MP card.
Output clock signals to the PLO0 of MP
ON
3 card.
NOTE 3 Output clock signals to the PLO1 of MP
OFF
card.
ON AP No. 04-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

– 344 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2BRTC (BRT)

NOTE 3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO0 of MP
card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows.

BRT0 BRT1 BRT2 ---- BRT23

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
----
11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3
MP card will receive the
clock signal from No.0 circuit
of BRT0 at its PLO0 input.
When one BRT
ON ON Should a clock failure occur
is provided.
with No.0 circuit, MP card
will switch to No. 1 circuit of
BRT0.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
When more conditions.
than one BRT is ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ---- OFF ON Should a clock failure occur
provided. with both No.0 and No.1 cir-
cuits of BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

– 345 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2BRTK (BRT)

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB

B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
SW10

SW11

SW0

– 346 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
B21 Red No.1 Circuit B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B11 Red B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D1 Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM1 Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation
B20 Red No.0 Circuit B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B10 Red B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D0 Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM0 Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation

– 347 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW11-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW11-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1

0-3 Not used

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW0, SW10 For terminating the transmitting side of
ON
(Dip SW) channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω .
ON
1 To remove the terminating resistor on
1 2
OFF the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2.
For terminating the receiving side of
ON
channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω .
2 To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2.
Continued on next page

– 348 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2BRTK (BRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW11 (Dip SW) ON For normal operation
1
ON 1 2 3 4 OFF Not used
Source clock signal from network is
ON sent to the PLO of MP card according
2 to the switch setting of SW11-3.
NOTE 3
Source clock signal from network is not
OFF
sent to the PLO of MP card.
Output clock signals to the PLO0 of MP
ON
3 card.
NOTE 3 Output clock signals to the PLO1 of MP
OFF
card.
ON AP No. 04-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

– 349 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2BRTK (BRT)

NOTE 3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO0 of MP
card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows.

BRT0 BRT1 BRT2 ---- BRT23

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
----
11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3
MP card will receive the
clock signal from No.0 circuit
of BRT0 at its PLO0 input.
When one BRT
ON ON Should a clock failure occur
is provided.
with No.0 circuit, MP card
will switch to No. 1 circuit of
BRT0.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from BRT0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
When more conditions.
than one BRT is ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ---- OFF ON Should a clock failure occur
provided. with both No.0 and No.1 cir-
cuits of BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

– 350 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW4

B21 B23
B11 B13
D1 D3
ALM1 ALM3
B20 B22
SW0 SW1 B10 B12
SW2 SW3 D0 D2
ALM0 ALM2

CN2

– 351 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
B23 Red No.3 Circuit B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B13 Red B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D3 Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM3 Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation
B22 Red No.2 Circuit B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B12 Red B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D2 Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM2 Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation
Continued on next page

– 352 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
B21 Red No.1 Circuit B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B11 Red B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D1 Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM1 Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation
B20 Red No.0 Circuit B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B10 Red B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D0 Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM0 Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation

– 353 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW4-8: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW4-8: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1

0-3 Not used

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
Continued on next page

– 354 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW4 (Piano SW) Output clock signals to PLO0/PLO1 of MP card. NOTE 3
OFF SW No. Circuit No.
8
1 2 3 4 No.0 No.1 No.2 No.3
7
6 OFF OFF OFF OFF – – – –
5 ON OFF OFF OFF PLO0 – – –
4
OFF ON OFF OFF – PLO0 – –
3
2 ON ON OFF OFF PLO0 PLO1 – –
1 OFF OFF ON OFF – – PLO0 –
ON OFF OFF OFF ON – – – PLO0
OFF OFF ON ON – – PLO0 PLO1
ON OFF ON OFF PLO0 – PLO1 –
ON OFF OFF ON PLO0 – – PLO1
OFF ON OFF ON – PLO0 – PLO1
OFF ON ON OFF – PLO0 PLO1 –
ON ON ON OFF
ON ON OFF ON
ON OFF ON ON Not allowed
OFF ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON

Output clock signals according to the

ON
switch setting of SW4-1 to SW4-4.
5
NOTE 3 Output clock signals to the reverse PLO
OFF route of the switch setting of SW4-1 to
SW4-4.
6 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)

7 OFF Not used

ON AP No. 04-15
8
OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 355 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (Dip SW) For terminating the transmitting side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.0
ON 1 2
Circuit)
1
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)
For terminating the receiving side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.0
Circuit)
2
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)
SW1 (Dip SW) For terminating the transmitting side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.1
ON 1 2
Circuit)
1
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)
For terminating the receiving side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.1
Circuit)
2
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)
Continued on next page

– 356 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) For terminating the transmitting side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.2
ON 1 2
Circuit)
1
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.2 Circuit)
For terminating the receiving side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.2
Circuit)
2
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.2 Circuit)
SW3 (Dip SW) For terminating the transmitting side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.3
ON 1 2
Circuit)
1
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.3 Circuit)
For terminating the receiving side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.3
Circuit)
2
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.3 Circuit)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

Continued on next page

– 357 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4BRTA-A (BRT)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO0 of MP
card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes
over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW4-1 to SW4-5 as follows.

CONDITIONS SWITCH BRT0 BRT1 BRT2 ---- BRT23

SW4-1 ON
SW4-2 OFF
When one BRT is
SW4-3 OFF
provided.
SW4-4 OFF
SW4-5 ON
SW4-1 ON ON OFF OFF

When more than SW4-2 OFF OFF OFF OFF

one BRT is pro- SW4-3 OFF OFF OFF ---- OFF
vided. SW4-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF
SW4-5 ON OFF OFF OFF

NOTE 4: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

– 358 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24CCTA (CCT)

PN-24CCTA (CCT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MAS MB

SW1

JP1

SW0

AISS LC
LPB
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
JPR0 SW2 AIS
BL
JPS

JRR1

– 359 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24CCTA (CCT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LC Green Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the com-
mon signaling channel data links connected.
LPB Green Remains lit when a loopback test is in progress.
CRC Red Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)
errors.
PCM Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
FRM Red Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.
AIS Red Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive “1” is received.
The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.
BL Red B channel status
ON : More than 10 channels are busy
OFF : All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM) : 2 through 10 channels are busy

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1 SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Continued on next page

– 360 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW0 Source clock signal from network is
1 ON
(Piano Key SW) sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
NOTE 3
NOTE 4 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF
OFF
sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
8
Source clock signal from network is
7
2 ON
6 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
5 NOTE 3
4
NOTE 4 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF
3
sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
2
1
3 ON Remote loopback
ON
NOTE 7 OFF For normal operation

4 ON Local loopback (AIS send)

NOTE 7 OFF For normal operation

5 ON Set equalizer according to the cable

NOTE 7 OFF length between the PBX and the CSU.
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7 CABLE LENGTH
6 ON ON ON ON 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)
ON ON OFF 40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
NOTE 7 OFF ON OFF ON 80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
ON OFF OFF 120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
7 ON OFF ON ON 160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent
NOTE 7 OFF

8 OFF Not used

Continued on next page

– 361 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 1 Not used
OFF
(Piano Key SW)
OFF 2 OFF Not used
4
3 3 OFF Not used
2
1
ON AP No. 04-15
ON 4
OFF AP No. 20-31

SW2 (Dip SW) ON • Common channel signaling data

1 transmission speed (For Digital Inter-
OFF face)
ON 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON TRANSMISSION SW SW SW SW SW
2 SPEED 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5
OFF 48 Kbps NOTE 6 ON ON OFF OFF ON
48 Kbps NOTE 6 ON ON ON OFF ON
ON 56 Kbps ON ON OFF ON ON
3
64 Kbps ON ON ON ON ON
OFF

ON
4
OFF

ON
5
OFF

6 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)

7 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)

8 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)

Continued on next page

– 362 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
JPR0 (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the receiving line
UP
is provided.
Neutral grounding on the receiving line
DOWN
is not provided.
JPR1 (Jumper pin)
RIGHT Line impedance: 100 Ω

LEFT Line impedance: 110 Ω

JPS (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the transmitting

UP
line is provided.
Neutral grounding on the transmitting
DOWN
line is not provided.
MAS (Jumper pin)

DOWN Always set to DOWN

AISS (Jumper pin) AIS signal is sent out when make-busy

UP
or power on.
AIS signal is not sent out when make-
DOWN
busy or power on.
JP1 (Jumper pin)

LEFT Always set to LEFT

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

Continued on next page

– 363 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
AUGUST/15/2006
 PN-24CCTA (CCT)

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:

CCT0 CCT1 CCT2 ····· CCT7

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2
MP card will receive the
When one CCT
ON OFF – – – – – – clock signal from CCT0
is provided.
at its PLO0 input.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from CCT0
at its PLO0 input, under
normal conditions.
When more than
Should a clock failure
one CCT is pro- ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
occurs with CCT0, MP
vided.
card will automatically
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from
CCT1.

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the CCT cards mounted
in PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 5: Mount the CCT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 6: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
• SW2-3: OFF • SW2-3: ON
48 Kbps 48 Kbps

1 1 1 1
Data Data
NOTE 7: This card must be reset after the SW0-3 to SW0-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.

– 364 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30CCTA (CCT)

PN-30CCTA (CCT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB

SW

LC
LPB
PCM
JP1 FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
JPS BL
SW1
JPR
JP

– 365 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30CCTA (CCT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating.
LC Green Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the com-
mon signaling channel data links connected.
LPB Green Remains lit when a loopback test is in progress.
PCM Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
FRM Red Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
MFRM Red Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time
slot 16.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant office.
MRMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office.
AIS Red Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive “1” is being
received. The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.
BL Red B channel status
ON : More than 10 channels are busy
OFF : All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM) : 2 to 10 channels are busy

– 366 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30CCTA (CCT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW-8: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
4
SW-8: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

NOTE 1
0-3 Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
Continued on next page

– 367 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SW Source clock signal from network is
1 ON
(Piano Key SW) sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
NOTE 3
NOTE 4 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF OFF
sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
8
7 Source clock signal from network is
6 2 ON
sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
5
NOTE 3
4
NOTE 4 Source clock signal from network is not
3 OFF
2 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
1
ON Remote loopback
ON 3
OFF For normal operation
ON Local loopback (AIS send)
4
OFF For normal operation
Transmission line cable:
ON
Coaxial cable (75 Ω)
5
Transmission line cable:
OFF
Twisted-pair cable (120 Ω)
ON Loopback test
6
OFF For normal operation
7 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)
ON AP No. 04-15
8
OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 368 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SW1(Dip SW) ON • Common channel signaling data
1 transmission speed (For Digital Inter-
OFF face)
ON 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON TRANSMISSION SW SW SW SW SW
2 SPEED 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5
OFF 48 Kbps NOTE 5 ON ON OFF OFF ON
48 Kbps NOTE 5 ON ON ON OFF ON
ON
3 56 Kbps ON ON OFF ON ON
OFF 64 Kbps ON ON ON ON ON

ON
4
OFF

ON
5
OFF
6 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)
7 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)
8 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)
Continued on next page

– 369 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30CCTA (CCT)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
JPS Balanced transmission
(Jumper pin) RIGHT
(For twisted-pair cable)

TA is grounded on the transmission line

LEFT
(For coaxial cable)

JPR Balanced transmission

(Jumper pin) UP
(For twisted-pair cable)

RA is grounded on the transmission line

DOWN
(For coaxial cable)

JP
Line impedance: 75 Ω
(Jumper pin) RIGHT
(For coaxial cable)

Line impedance: 120 Ω

LEFT
(For twisted-pair cable)

JP1 (Jumper pin)

DOWN Always set to DOWN

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

– 370 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30CCTA (CCT)

NOTE 3: Set SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

CCT0 CCT1 CCT2 ····· CCT7

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
MP card will receive the
When one CCT is
ON OFF – – – – – – clock signal from CCT0
provided.
at its PLO0 input.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from CCT0
at its PLO0 input, under
normal conditions.
When more than
Should a clock failure
one CCT is ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
occurs with CCT0, MP
provided.
card will automatically
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from
CCT1.

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the CCT cards mounted in
PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 5: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
• SW1-3: OFF • SW1-3: ON
48 Kbps 48 Kbps

1 1 1 1
Data Data
NOTE 6: Mount the CCT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

– 371 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-CFTC (CFT)

PN-CFTC (CFT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB

SW1

RUN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Remains lit while this card is operating normally.
RUN1 Red Remains lit while the DSP on this card is operating normally.

– 372 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-CFTC (CFT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
4
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

NOTE 1
0-3 Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW1 (Dip SW)
1-3 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)
ON 1 2 3 4

ON AP No. 04-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 373 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-CFTC-A (CFT)

PN-CFTC-A (CFT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB

SW1

DOPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Frashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
DOPE0 Green Remains lit while the DSP on this card is operating normally.

– 374 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-CFTC-A (CFT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
4
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

NOTE 1
0-3 Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW) 1-3 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)

OFF

4 ON AP No. 04-15
3
2 4
1
OFF AP No. 20-31
ON

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 375 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
PWR
SW1 BL

SW2 BUS

SW3

PCM1

PCM0
JPS

JPR
CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK Green Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RED Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment
signal loss.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP – Not used
PWR – Not used
BL Red Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).
Flashes while FP data downloading.

– 376 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE FP (Firmware Processor) Number setting for the DAIA
(Rotary SW) card.
By this setting, the system regards the DAIA card and
0
1 the opposite DAIB card as one Firmware Processor.
2
3 SW1-4: ON SW1-4: OFF
NOTE 1 0-F 0 FP No. 16
1 FP No. 01 FP No. 17
2 FP No. 02 FP No. 18
3 FP No. 03 FP No. 19
4–F Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW1 For supplying 1.5 MHz clock to
1 ON
(Piano Key SW) PLO0
NOTE 3
OFF OFF No clock supply to PLO0
4
For supplying 1.5 MHz clock to
3
2 ON
2 PLO1
1 NOTE 3
OFF No clock supply to PLO1
ON

3 OFF Always set to OFF

ON FP No.01-03
4
OFF FP No.16-19
Continued on next page

– 377 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) Control channel signaling data trans-
ON
mission speed: 48 Kbps
1
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Control channel signaling data trans-
OFF
mission speed: 64 Kbps
DTI frame configuration: 12-Multi
ON
Frame
2
DTI frame configuration: 24-Multi
OFF
Frame
ON Line code: AMI with ZCS
3
OFF Line code: B8ZS

ON Setting of control signal time slot

4 SWITCH NUMBER TIME SLOT
4 5 6 7 8 NUMBER
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON TS1
ON OFF ON ON ON TS2
OFF OFF ON ON ON TS3
ON ON ON OFF ON ON TS4
OFF ON OFF ON ON TS5
5 ON OFF OFF ON ON TS6
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON TS7
ON ON ON OFF ON TS8
OFF ON ON OFF ON TS9
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON TS10
OFF OFF ON OFF ON TS11
6 ON ON OFF OFF ON TS12
OFF ON OFF OFF ON TS13
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON TS14
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON TS15
ON ON ON ON OFF TS16
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF TS17
7 ON OFF ON ON OFF TS18
OFF OFF ON ON OFF TS19
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF TS23

ON NOTE 4: The time slot number 0, 20,

21, and 22 (TS0/20/21/22)
cannot be used for control
8
signal.
OFF
NOTE 5: This setting must be identical
with the opposite DAIB card.
Continued on next page

– 378 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Dip SW) Set the equalizer according to the cable
ON
length between the system and the
ON 1 2 3 4 1
CSU.
OFF
SW SW SW CABLE
3-1 3-2 3-3 LENGTH
ON
2 ON ON ON 0 - 40 m
(0-131.2 ft.)
OFF
ON ON OFF 40 - 80 m
(131.2-262.5 ft.)
ON
ON OFF ON 80 - 120 m
(262.5-394 ft.)
ON OFF OFF 120 - 160 m
3 (394-525 ft.)
OFF OFF ON ON 160 - 200 m
(525-656 ft.)
OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent

ON FP No.16
4
OFF FP No.01-03, 17-19
JPS (Jumper pin) RIGHT For mounting this card on PIM1 - PIM7

LEFT For mounting this card on PIM0

JPR (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the receiving line

RIGHT
is provided.
Neutral grounding on the receiving line
LEFT
is not provided.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

– 379 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIA-A (DAIA)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When source clock signal is supplied via the line between the Main Site and the Remote Site, set
the SW1-1 and SW1-2 as the following table. In this case, DAIA cards (DAIA0, DAIA1) must be
mounted in PIM0.

DAIA0 DAIA1 ···· DAIA5

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
1-1 1-2 1-1 1-2 1-1 1-2
One DAIA card is ON OFF – – – – The clock signal is sent
provided. to PLO0 of MP card via
supply route 0
(DAIA0).
Two or three ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF The clock signal supply
DAIA cards are route is automatically
provided. changed to the route 1
(DAIA1), if a transmis-
sion line failure occurs
on the supply route 0.

– 380 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIB (DAIB)

PN-DAIB (DAIB)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
SW1 BL

SW2
BUS

SW3

JPS

JPR
CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK Green Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RED Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment
signal loss.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP – Not used
BL Red Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).
Flashes while FP data downloading.

– 381 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIB (DAIB)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW) 0 Always set to 0
0-F
1-F Not used

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 1
SW1 1 Always set to OFF
OFF
(Piano Key SW)
OFF 2 OFF Always set to OFF
4
3
2
3 OFF Always set to OFF
1

ON
4 OFF Always set to OFF

Continued on next page

– 382 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIB (DAIB)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) Control channel signaling data trans-
ON
mission speed: 48 Kbps
1
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Control channel signaling data trans-
OFF
mission speed: 64 Kbps
DTI frame configuration: 12-Multi
ON
Frame
2
DTI frame configuration: 24-Multi
OFF
Frame
ON Line code: AMI with ZCS
3
OFF Line code: B8ZS

ON Setting of control signal time slot

4 SWITCH NUMBER TIME SLOT
4 5 6 7 8 NUMBER
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON TS1
ON OFF ON ON ON TS2
OFF OFF ON ON ON TS3
ON ON ON OFF ON ON TS4
OFF ON OFF ON ON TS5
5 ON OFF OFF ON ON TS6
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON TS7
ON ON ON OFF ON TS8
OFF ON ON OFF ON TS9
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON TS10
OFF OFF ON OFF ON TS11
6 ON ON OFF OFF ON TS12
OFF ON OFF OFF ON TS13
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON TS14
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON TS15
ON ON ON ON OFF TS16
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF TS17
7 ON OFF ON ON OFF TS18
OFF OFF ON ON OFF TS19
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF TS23

ON NOTE 2: The time slot number 0, 20,

21, and 22 (TS0/20/21/22)
cannot be used for control
8
signal.
OFF
NOTE 3: This setting must be identical
with the opposite DAIA card.
Continued on next page

– 383 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIB (DAIB)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Dip SW) Set the equalizer according to the cable
ON
length between the system and the
ON 1
1 2 3 4
CSU.
OFF
SW SW SW CABLE
ON 3-1 3-2 3-3 LENGTH
2 ON ON ON 0 - 40 m
(0-131.2 ft.)
OFF
ON ON OFF 40 - 80 m
(131.2-262.5 ft.)
ON
ON OFF ON 80 - 120 m
(262.5-394 ft.)
ON OFF OFF 120 - 160 m
3 (394-525 ft.)
OFF OFF ON ON 160 - 200 m
(525-656 ft.)
OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent

4 OFF Always set to OFF

JPS (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the transmitting
UP
line is provided.
Neutral grounding on the transmitting
DOWN
line is not provided.
JPR (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the receiving line
UP
is provided.
Neutral grounding on the receiving line
DOWN
is not provided.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 384 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIC (DAIC)

PN-DAIC (DAIC)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
SW2 LOOP
PWR
SW1 BL

TBUS

SW3

RBUS

CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK Green Remains lit when the following connection are normal.
• Control channel link between the DAIA card and DAIB card.
• Connection between the opposite DAIC card.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RED Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment sig-
nal loss.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP – Not used
PWR – Not used
BL – Not used

– 385 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIC (DAIC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE
SW1
1 OFF Always set to OFF
(Piano Key SW)
ON
2 OFF Always set to OFF
4
3
2 3 OFF Always set to OFF
1

OFF 4 OFF Always set to OFF

SW2 (Dip SW) 1 OFF Not used

DTI frame configuration: 12-Multi
ON
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Frame
2
DTI frame configuration: 24-Multi
OFF
Frame
ON Line code: AMI with ZCS
3
OFF Line code: B8ZS
4 OFF Not used
5 OFF Not used
6 OFF Not used
7 OFF Not used
8 OFF Not used
Continued on next page

– 386 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIC (DAIC)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Dip SW) Set the equalizer according to the cable
ON
length between the system and the
1 CSU.
ON 1 2 3 4
OFF
SW SW SW CABLE
3-1 3-2 3-3 LENGTH
ON
ON ON ON 0 - 40 m
2
(0-131.2 ft.)
OFF
ON ON OFF 40 - 80 m
(131.2-262.5 ft.)
ON ON OFF ON 80 - 120 m
(262.5-394 ft.)
ON OFF OFF 120 - 160 m
3 (394-525 ft.)
OFF OFF ON ON 160 - 200 m
(525-656 ft.)
OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent

When mounting this card on Remote

ON
4 Site.
OFF When mounting this card on Main Site.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE: When the power is on, flip MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the cir-
cuit card.

– 387 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAID-A (DAID)

PN-DAID-A (DAID)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN
MB

LINK
RMT
LOOP
PWR
SW1 BL

SW2 BUS

SW3

PCM1

PCM0
E1Z SRT

JPR JP JPS
CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK Green Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is nor-
mally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP – Not used
PWR Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
BL Red Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).
Flashes while FP data downloading.

– 388 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAID-A (DAID)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE FP (Firmware Processor) Number setting for the DAID
(Rotary SW) card.
0 By this setting, the system regards the DAID card and
1 the opposite DAIE card as one Firmware Processor.
3 2
SW1-4: ON SW1-4: OFF
NOTE 1
0-F 0 FP No. 16
1 FP No. 01 FP No. 17
2 FP No. 02 FP No. 18
3 FP No. 03 FP No. 19
4-F Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW1 For supplying 2.0 MHz clock to
1 ON
(Piano Key SW) PLO0
NOTE 3
OFF No clock supply to PLO0
OFF
For supplying 2.0 MHz clock to
4
2 ON
3 PLO1
2 NOTE 3
1 OFF No clock supply to PLO1

ON 3 OFF Always set to OFF

ON FP No.01-03
4
OFF FP No.16-19
Continued on next page

– 389 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAID-A (DAID)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) Control channel signaling data trans-
ON
mission speed: 48 Kbps
1
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Control channel signaling data trans-
OFF
mission speed: 64 Kbps
CRC Synchronization Detection Timer
ON
is provided.
2
CRC Synchronization Detection Timer
OFF
is not provided.
ON CRC4 Check is provided.
3
OFF CRC4 Check is not provided.
Continued on next page

– 390 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAID-A (DAID)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) Setting of control signal time slot
ON
4 SWITCH NUMBER TIME SLOT
4 5 6 7 8 NUMBER
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON TS 1
ON OFF ON ON ON TS 2
OFF OFF ON ON ON TS 3
ON ON ON OFF ON ON TS 4
5 OFF ON OFF ON ON TS 5
ON OFF OFF ON ON TS 6
OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON ON TS 7
ON ON ON OFF ON TS 8
OFF ON ON OFF ON TS 9
ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON TS 10
6 OFF OFF ON OFF ON TS 11
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON TS 12
OFF ON OFF OFF ON TS 13
ON OFF OFF OFF ON TS 14
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON TS 15
ON ON ON ON OFF TS 16
7 OFF ON ON ON OFF TS 17
OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF TS 18
OFF OFF ON ON OFF TS 19
ON ON OFF ON OFF TS 20
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF TS 21
ON OFF OFF ON OFF TS 22
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF TS 23
ON ON ON OFF OFF TS 24
OFF ON ON OFF OFF TS 25
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF TS 26
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF TS 27
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF TS 29
8 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF TS 30
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF TS 31

NOTE 4: The time slot number 0 and

28 (TS0/28) cannot be used
for control signal.
NOTE 5: This setting must be identical
with the opposite DAIE card.
Continued on next page

– 391 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAID-A (DAID)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Dip SW) 1 ON Always set to ON
ON 1 2 3 4 2 ON Always set to ON

3 ON Always set to ON
ON FP No.16
4
OFF FP No.01-03, 17-19
JPS (Jumper pin) Balanced transmission: 120 Ω
RIGHT
(For twisted-pair cable)
TA is grounded on the transmission
LEFT
line: 75 Ω (For coaxial cable)
JPR (Jumper pin) Balanced transmission: 120 Ω
RIGHT
(For twisted-pair cable)
RA is grounded on the transmission
LEFT
line: 75 Ω (For coaxial cable)
E1Z (Jumper pin) Line impedance:
RIGHT
120 Ω (For twisted-pair cable)
Line impedance:
LEFT
75 Ω (For coaxial cable)
SRT (Jumper pin) RIGHT For mounting this card on PIM0

LEFT For mounting this card on PIM1-PIM7

JP (Jumper pin) Line impedance:
UP
120 Ω (For twisted-pair cable)
Line impedance:
DOWN
75 Ω (For coaxial cable)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

– 392 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAID-A (DAID)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When source clock signal is supplied via the line between the Main Site and the Remote Site, set
the SW1-1 and SW1-2 as the following table. In this case, DAID cards (DAID0, DAID1) must
be mounted in PIM0.

DAID0 DAID1 ···· DAID5

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
1-1 1-2 1-1 1-2 1-1 1-2
One DAID card is ON OFF – – – – The clock signal is sent
provided. to PLO0 of MP card via
supply route 0
(DAID0).
Two or three ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF The clock signal supply
DAID cards are route is automatically
provided. changed to the route 1
(DAID1), if a transmis-
sion line failure occurs
on the supply route 0.

– 393 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIE (DAIE)

PN-DAIE (DAIE)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN
MB
LINK
RMT
LOOP
BL
SW1

SW2 BUS

SW3

JP

E1Z JPR JPS CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK Green Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP – Not used
BL Red Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).
Remains lit while FP data downloading.

– 394 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIE (DAIE)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE Always set to 0
0
(Rotary SW)
0-F
1-F Not used

MB (Toggle SW) UP For make-busy

ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 1
SW1 1 Always set to OFF
OFF
(Piano Key SW)
OFF 2 OFF Always set to OFF
4
3
3 OFF Always set to OFF
2
1

ON
4 OFF Always set to OFF

SW2 (Dip SW) Control channel signaling data trans-

ON
mission speed: 48 Kbps
1
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Control channel signaling data trans-
OFF
mission speed: 64 Kbps
CRC Synchronization Detection Timer
ON
is provided.
2
CRC Synchronization Detection Timer
OFF
is not provided.
ON CRC4 Check is provided.
3
OFF CRC4 Check is not provided.
Continued on next page

– 395 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIE (DAIE)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) Setting of control signal time slot
ON
4 SWITCH NUMBER TIME SLOT
4 5 6 7 8 NUMBER
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON TS 1
ON OFF ON ON ON TS 2
OFF OFF ON ON ON TS 3
ON ON ON OFF ON ON TS 4
5 OFF ON OFF ON ON TS 5
ON OFF OFF ON ON TS 6
OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON ON TS 7
ON ON ON OFF ON TS 8
OFF ON ON OFF ON TS 9
ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON TS 10
6 OFF OFF ON OFF ON TS 11
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON TS 12
OFF ON OFF OFF ON TS 13
ON OFF OFF OFF ON TS 14
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON TS 15
ON ON ON ON OFF TS 16
7 OFF ON ON ON OFF TS 17
OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF TS 18
OFF OFF ON ON OFF TS 19
ON ON OFF ON OFF TS 20
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF TS 21
ON OFF OFF ON OFF TS 22
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF TS 23
ON ON ON OFF OFF TS 24
OFF ON ON OFF OFF TS 25
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF TS 26
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF TS 27
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF TS 29
8 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF TS 30
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF TS 31

NOTE 2: The time slot number 0 and

28 (TS0/28) cannot be used
for control signal.
NOTE 3: This setting must be identical
with the opposite DAID card.
Continued on next page

– 396 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIE (DAIE)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Dip SW) 1 ON Always set to ON
ON 1 2 3 4 2 ON Always set to ON

3 ON Always set to ON

4 OFF Always set to OFF

JPS (Jumper pin) Balanced transmission: 120 Ω (For
RIGHT
twisted-pair cable)
TA is grounded on the transmission
LEFT
line: 75 Ω (For coaxial cable)
JPR (Jumper pin) RA is grounded on the transmission
RIGHT
line: 75 Ω (For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission: 120 Ω (For
LEFT
twisted-pair cable)
E1Z (Jumper pin) Line impedance: 75 Ω (For coaxial
RIGHT
cable)
Line impedance:
LEFT
120 Ω (For twisted-pair cable)
SRT (Jumper pin) Line impedance:
RIGHT
75 Ω (For coaxial cable)

Line impedance:
LEFT
120 Ω (For twisted-pair cable)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 397 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIF (DAIF)

PN-DAIF (DAIF)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

RUN
MB

LINK
RMT
SW2 LOOP
PWR
SW1 BL

TBUS

SW3

JPS
RBUS

JP

JPR
CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK Green Remains lit when the following connection are normal.
• Control channel link between the DAID card and DAIE card.
• Connection between the opposite DAIF card.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP – Not used
PWR Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
(Only on the DAIF card mounted on the Main Site.)
BL – Not used

– 398 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIF (DAIF)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE
SW1
1 OFF Always set to OFF
(Piano Key SW)
Line impedance: 75 Ω
ON
OFF (For coaxial cable)
2
4
Line impedance: 120 Ω
3 OFF
2 (For twisted-pair cable)
1

ON
3 OFF Always set to OFF

4 OFF Always set to OFF

Continued on next page

– 399 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIF (DAIF)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) Control channel signaling data trans-
ON
ON
mission speed: 48 Kbps
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1
Control channel signaling data trans-
OFF
mission speed: 64 Kbps
CRC Synchronization Detection Timer
ON
is provided.
2
CRC Synchronization Detection Timer
OFF
is not provided.
ON CRC4 Check is provided.
3
OFF CRC4 Check is not provided.

4 OFF Not used

5 OFF Not used

6 OFF Not used

7 OFF Not used

8 OFF Not used

Continued on next page

– 400 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DAIF (DAIF)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Dip SW) 1 ON Always set to ON

2 ON Always set to ON
ON 1 2 3 4
3 ON Always set to ON
When mounting this card on Remote
ON
4 Site.
OFF When mounting this card on Main Site.
JPS (Jumper pin) TA is grounded on the transmission
RIGHT
line: 75 Ω (For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission: 120 Ω
LEFT
(For twisted-pair cable)
JPR (Jumper pin) RA is grounded on the transmission
RIGHT
line: 75 Ω (For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission: 120 Ω
LEFT
(For twisted-pair cable)
JP (Jumper pin) Line impedance:
UP
75 Ω (For coaxial cable)
Line impedance:
DOWN
120 Ω (For twisted-pair cable)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 401 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
SW3 MB

SW1

SW2

LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
JP3 MRMT
RMT
JP2 CRC
JPRI
AIS
JPR JP1 BL

JPT

– 402 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LC Green Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the com-
mon signaling channel data links connected.
LPB Green Remains lit when loopback test is in progress.
PCM – Not used
MFRM – Not used
FRM – Not used
MRMT – Not used
RMT – Not used
CRC – Not used
AIS – Not used
BL – Not used

– 403 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW1 1 OFF Not used
(Piano Key SW)
2 OFF Not used
OFF

4 3 OFF Not used

3
2
ON AP No. 04-15
1
4
ON OFF AP No. 20-31
SW2 ON Local loopback
(Piano Key SW) 4
OFF For normal operation
OFF

8
7
6
5
4 1-3, 5-8 OFF Not used
3
2
1

ON

Continued on next page

– 404 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Dip SW) 1 OFF Always set to OFF
2 ON Always set to ON
OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)
4 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)
• Common channel signaling data
ON
transmission speed (For Digital Inter-
5 face)
OFF TRANSMISSION SW SW
SPEED 3-5 3-6
48 Kbps (1) NOTE 3 OFF ON
ON
48 Kbps (2) NOTE 3 OFF OFF
6 56 Kbps ON OFF
OFF 64 Kbps ON ON

7 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)

8 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)
JP1 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT Not used

JP2 (Jumper pin)

LEFT Not used

JP3 (Jumper pin)

RIGHT Not used

Continued on next page

– 405 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTA/PN-DTB (CCH)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
JPRI (Jumper pin)
LEFT Not used

JPR (Jumper pin)

LEFT Not used

JPT (Jumper pin)

LEFT Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
• SW3-6: ON • SW3-6: OFF
48 Kbps (1) 48 Kbps (2)

1 1 1 1
Data Data

– 406 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

SW3 RUN
MB

SW1

SW2

LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
JP3 JPRI JP2 CRC
JPR AIS
BL
JPT JP1

– 407 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LC Green Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the com-
mon signaling channel (CCT)/D channel (DTI/PRT) data links con-
nected.
LPB Green Remains lit when a loopback is in progress.
PCM Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
MFRM Red Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time
slot 16 (Only for E1).
FRM Red Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
MRMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office (Only for E1).
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.
CRC Red Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors
(Only for T1).
AIS Red Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive “1” is received.
BL Red B channel status
ON : More than 10 channels are busy
OFF : All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM) : 2 through 10 channels are busy

– 408 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 8

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW1 1 Not used
OFF
(Piano Key SW)
OFF 2 OFF Not used
4
3 [North America only]
2
1
DS-1
ON
ON (T1 with CSU function)
NOTE 3 DSX-1
3 OFF
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]

OFF Not used

ON AP No. 04-15
4
NOTE 8
OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 409 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 Source clock signal from network is
1 ON
(Piano Key SW) sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
NOTE 3
NOTE 4 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF
OFF sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
8 Source clock signal from network is
7 2 ON
6 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
5
NOTE 3
NOTE 4 Source clock signal from network is not
4 OFF
3 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
2
1
3 ON Remote loopback
ON NOTE 6 OFF For normal operation

4 ON Local loopback (AIS send)

NOTE 6 OFF For normal operation
Set equalizer according to the cable
ON length between the PBX and the C.O.
5 or CSU.
NOTE 6 • For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
OFF
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 φ)
ON ON ON 1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)
OFF ON ON 599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
ON ON OFF ON 0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
OFF OFF ON Not used
6 OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent
NOTE 6
• For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan
OFF
(SW1-3 OFF)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 φ)

ON ON ON 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

ON ON ON OFF 40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
7 ON OFF ON 80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
NOTE 6 ON OFF OFF 120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
OFF ON ON 160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
OFF OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent

8 OFF Not used

Continued on next page

– 410 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 ON T1 mode
(Dip SW) 1
OFF E1 mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF ON PRT/CCT mode
2
OFF DTI mode

3 OFF Not used

4 OFF Not used

ON Common channel signaling data trans-

5 mission speed (For Digital Interface)
OFF TRANSMISSION SW SW
SPEED 3-5 3-6
ON 48 Kbps (1) NOTE 7 OFF ON
48 Kbps (2) NOTE 7 OFF OFF
6
56 Kbps ON OFF
OFF 64 Kbps ON ON

7 OFF Not used

8 OFF Not used

Continued on next page

– 411 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
AUGUST/15/2006
 PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
JP1 (Jumper pin) Set the line impedance.
RIGHT
JP1 JP2 LINE IMPEDANCE
LEFT LEFT RIGHT 100Ω (for T1)
LEFT LEFT 110Ω (for T1)
JP2 (Jumper pin) RIGHT RIGHT 120Ω (for E1)
RIGHT
RIGHT LEFT 75Ω (for E1)

LEFT

JP3 (Jumper pin) Balanced transmission

RIGHT
(For twisted-paire cable) (for T1/E1)
Unbalanced transmission
LEFT
(For coaxial cable) (for E1)
JPRI (Jumper pin)
LEFT Not used

JPR (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the receiving line

RIGHT
is provided.
Neutral grounding on the receiving line
LEFT
is not provided.
JPT (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the transmitting
RIGHT
line is provided.
Neutral grounding on the transmitting
LEFT
line is not provided.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW2-1 and SW2-2 on all the CCT/DTI/PRT cards
mounted in PIM0 to “OFF”.
Continued on next page

– 412 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTA (CCT/DTI/PRT)

NOTE 4: Set SW2-1 and SW2-2 as follows:

CCT/DTI/PRT0 CCT/DTI/PRT1 CCT/DTI/PRT2 ····· CCT/DTI/PRT7

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
2-1 2-2 2-1 2-2 2-1 2-2 2-1 2-2
MP card will receive the clock
When one CCT/DTI/
ON OFF – – – – – – signal from CCT/DTI/PRT0 at
PRT is provided.
its PLO0 input.
MP card will receive the clock
signal from CCT/DTI/PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal
When more than one conditions.
CCT/DTI/PRT is ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Should a clock failure occurs
provided. with CCT/DTI/PRT0, MP card
will automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets clock
from CCT/DTI/PRT1.

NOTE 5: Mount the CCT/DTI/PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 6: This card must be reset after the SW2-3 to SW2-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.
NOTE 7: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
• SW3-6: ON • SW3-6: OFF
48 Kbps (1) 48 Kbps (2)

1 1 1 1
Data Data
NOTE 8: When using the AP Number 64 to 93 (for AP Number extension) in accommodating the PRT
card on Remote site, be sure to set the SENSE switch and SW1-4 switch of all the PRT cards to
be accommodated to AP Number 31. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each PRT card. If a different site is used to accommodate the PRT card, be sure to
set switches similarly.
[Series 3800 software or later required]

– 413 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

SW3 RUN
MB

SW1

SW2

LC
LPB
PCM
MFRM
FRM
MRMT
RMT
JP3 JPRI JP2 CRC
JPR AIS
BL
JPT JP1

– 414 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LC Green Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the com-
mon signaling channel (CCT)/D channel (DTI/PRT) data links con-
nected.
LPB Green Remains lit when a loopback is in progress.
PCM Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
MFRM Red Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time
slot 16 (Only for E1).
FRM Red Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
MRMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office (Only for E1).
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.
CRC Red Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors
(Only for T1).
AIS Red Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive “1” is received.
BL Red B channel status
ON : More than 10 channels are busy
OFF : All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM) : 2 through 10 channels are busy

– 415 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 2

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 3
SW1 1 Not used
OFF
(Piano Key SW)
OFF 2 OFF Not used
4
3 [North America only]
2
1
DS-1
ON
ON (T1 with CSU function)
NOTE 4 DSX-1
3 OFF
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]

OFF Not used

ON AP No. 04-15
4
NOTE 2
OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 416 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 Source clock signal from network is
1 ON
(Piano Key SW) sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
NOTE 4
NOTE 5 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF
OFF sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
8 Source clock signal from network is
7 2 ON
6 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
5
NOTE 4
NOTE 5 Source clock signal from network is not
4 OFF
3 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
2
1
3 ON Remote loopback
ON NOTE 7 OFF For normal operation

4 ON Local loopback (AIS send)

NOTE 7 OFF For normal operation
Set equalizer according to the cable
ON length between the PBX and the C.O.
5 or CSU.
NOTE 7 • For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
OFF
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 φ)
ON ON ON 1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)
OFF ON ON 599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
ON ON OFF ON 0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
OFF OFF ON Not used
6 OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent
NOTE 7
• For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan
OFF
(SW1-3 OFF)
SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 φ)

ON ON ON 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

ON ON ON OFF 40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
7 ON OFF ON 80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
NOTE 7 ON OFF OFF 120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
OFF ON ON 160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
OFF OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent

8 OFF Not used

Continued on next page

– 417 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 ON T1 mode
(Dip SW) 1
OFF E1 mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF ON PRT/CCT mode
2
OFF DTI mode

A-law/u-law conversion (For Taiwan)

ON
NOTE 8,NOTE 9
3
OFF For normal operation

4 OFF Not used

ON Common channel signaling data trans-

5 mission speed (For Digital Interface)
OFF TRANSMISSION SW SW
SPEED 3-5 3-6
ON 48 Kbps (1) NOTE 10 OFF ON
48 Kbps (2) NOTE 10 OFF OFF
6
56 Kbps ON OFF
OFF 64 Kbps ON ON

7 OFF Not used

8 OFF Not used

Continued on next page

– 418 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
JP1 (Jumper pin) Set the line impedance.
RIGHT
JP1 JP2 LINE IMPEDANCE
LEFT LEFT RIGHT 100Ω (for T1)
LEFT LEFT 110Ω (for T1)
JP2 (Jumper pin) RIGHT RIGHT 120Ω (for E1)
RIGHT
RIGHT LEFT 75Ω (for E1)

LEFT

JP3 (Jumper pin) Balanced transmission

RIGHT
(For twisted-paire cable) (for T1/E1)
Unbalanced transmission
LEFT
(For coaxial cable) (for E1)
JPRI (Jumper pin)
LEFT Not used

JPR (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the receiving line

RIGHT
is provided.
Neutral grounding on the receiving line
LEFT
is not provided.
JPT (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the transmitting
RIGHT
line is provided.
Neutral grounding on the transmitting
LEFT
line is not provided.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When using the AP Number 64 to 93 (for AP Number extension) in accommodating the PRT
card on Remote site, be sure to set the SENSE switch and SW1-4 switch of all the PRT cards to
be accommodated to AP Number 31. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each PRT card. If a different site is used to accommodate the PRT card, be sure to
set switches similarly.
[Series 3800 software or later required]
NOTE 3: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

– 419 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-DTB (CCT/DTI/PRT)

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW2-1 and SW2-2 on all the CCT/DTI/PRT cards
mounted in PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 5: Set SW2-1 and SW2-2 as follows:

CCT/DTI/PRT0 CCT/DTI/PRT1 CCT/DTI/PRT2 ····· CCT/DTI/PRT7

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
2-1 2-2 2-1 2-2 2-1 2-2 2-1 2-2
MP card will receive the clock
When one CCT/DTI/
ON OFF – – – – – – signal from CCT/DTI/PRT0 at
PRT is provided.
its PLO0 input.
MP card will receive the clock
signal from CCT/DTI/PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal
When more than one conditions.
CCT/DTI/PRT is ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Should a clock failure occurs
provided. with CCT/DTI/PRT0, MP card
will automatically switch to the
PLO1 input which gets clock
from CCT/DTI/PRT1.

NOTE 6: Mount the CCT/DTI/PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 7: This card must be reset after the SW2-3 to SW2-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.
NOTE 8: This switch setting is required when providing A-law/u-law conversion for CCT/DTI/PRT in
Taiwan. And for PRT, A-law/u-law setting by CMAAY=17 is required in addition to the switch
setting (Setting SW3-3 to ON).
NOTE 9: To provide A-law/u-law conversion for CCT/DTI/PRT, the following firmware program and
MP program are required.
Firmware program MP program
CCT SC-3729 IPS CCHDA PROG-B1 or later No limitation
DTI SC-3712 IPS PRTDA PROG-B1 or later No limitation
PRT (PRI) SC-3712 IPS PRTDA PROG-B1 or later Series 3900 or later
PRT (Q-SIG) SC-3728 IPS PRTDB PROG-B1 or later No limitaion
NOTE 10:The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
• SW3-6: ON • SW3-6: OFF
48 Kbps (1) 48 Kbps (2)

1 1 1 1
Data Data

– 420 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/15/2007
 PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MAS MB

SW1

JP1

SW0

AISS
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
JPR0 AIS
BL
JPS

JRR1

– 421 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
CRC Red Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors.
PCM Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
FRM Red Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.
AIS Red Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive “1” is received. The distant
office transmits this signal for a loopback test.
BL Red B channel status
ON : More than 10 channels are busy
OFF : All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM) : 2 through 10 channels are busy

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1 SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
Continued on next page

– 422 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 Source clock signal from network is
1 ON
(Piano Key SW) sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
NOTE 3
NOTE 4 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF
OFF sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
8 Source clock signal from network is
7 2 ON
6 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
5
NOTE 3
NOTE 4 Source clock signal from network is not
4 OFF
3 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
2
1
3 ON Remote loopback
ON NOTE 6 OFF For normal operation

4 ON Local loopback (AIS send)

NOTE 6 OFF For normal operation
Set equalizer according to the cable
ON length between the PBX and the C.O.
5 or CSU.
NOTE 6 • For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
OFF
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7 CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 φ)
ON ON ON 1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)
OFF ON ON 599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
ON ON OFF ON 0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
OFF OFF ON Not used
6 OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent
NOTE 6
• For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan
OFF
(SW1-3 OFF)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7 CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 φ)

ON ON ON 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

ON ON ON OFF 40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
7 ON OFF ON 80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
NOTE 6 ON OFF OFF 120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
OFF ON ON 160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
OFF OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent

8 OFF Not used

Continued on next page

– 423 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 1 Not used
OFF
(Piano Key SW)
OFF 2 OFF Not used
4
3 [North America only]
2
1
DS-1
ON
ON (T1 with CSU function)
NOTE 4 DSX-1
3 OFF
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]

OFF Not used

ON AP No. 04-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31

JPR0 (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the receiving line

UP
is provided.
Neutral grounding on the receiving line
DOWN
is not provided.
JPR1 (Jumper pin)
RIGHT Line impedance: 100 Ω

LEFT Line impedance: 110 Ω

JPS (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the transmitting

UP
line is provided.
Neutral grounding on the transmitting
DOWN
line is not provided.
Continued on next page

– 424 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
MAS (Jumper pin)

DOWN Always set to DOWN

AISS (Jumper pin) AIS signal is sent out when make-busy

UP
or power on.
AIS signal is not sent out when make-
DOWN
busy or power on.
JP1 (Jumper pin)

LEFT Always set to LEFT

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

– 425 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
AUGUST/15/2006
 PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:

DTI0 DTI1 DTI2 ····· DTI7

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2
MP card will receive the clock
When one DTI is
ON OFF – – – – – – signal from DTI0 at its PLO0
provided.
input.
MP card will receive the clock
signal from DTI0 at its PLO0
input, under normal conditions.
When more than one Should a clock failure occurs
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
DTI is provided. with DTI0, MP card will auto-
matically switch to the PLO1
input which gets clock from
DTI1.

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the DTI cards mounted
in PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 6: This card must be reset after the SW0-3 to SW0-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.

– 426 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB

SW

PCM
JP1 FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
BL
JPS
JPR
JP

– 427 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating.
PCM Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
FRM Red Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
MFRM Red Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time
slot 16.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant office.
MRMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office.
AIS Red Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive “1” is being
received. The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.
BL Red B channel status
ON : More than 10 channels are busy
OFF : All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM) : 2 to 10 channels are busy

– 428 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW-8: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
4 SW-8: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

NOTE 1
0-3 Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
Continued on next page

– 429 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SW Source clock signal from network is
1 ON
(Piano Key SW) sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
NOTE 3
NOTE 4 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF
OFF sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
8
Source clock signal from network is
7 2 ON
6 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
5 NOTE 3
NOTE 4 Source clock signal from network is not
4
OFF
3 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
2
1 ON Remote loopback
3
ON OFF For normal operation
ON Local loopback (AIS send)
4
OFF For normal operation
Transmission line cable:
ON
Coaxial cable (75 Ω)
5
Transmission line cable:
OFF
Twisted-pair cable (120 Ω)
6 OFF
Not used (Always set to OFF)
7 OFF
ON AP No. 04-15
8
OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 430 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
JPS Balanced transmission
(Jumper pin) RIGHT
(For twisted-pair cable)

TA is grounded on the transmission line

LEFT
(For coaxial cable)

JPR Balanced transmission

(Jumper pin) UP
(For twisted-pair cable)

RA is grounded on the transmission line

DOWN
(For coaxial cable)

JP
Line impedance: 75 Ω
(Jumper pin) RIGHT
(For coaxial cable)

Line impedance: 120 Ω

LEFT
(For twisted-pair cable)

JP1
(Jumper pin)
DOWN Always set to DOWN

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

– 431 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30DTC-C (DTI)

NOTE 3: Set the SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

DTI0 DTI1 DTI2 ····· DTI7

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
MP card will receive the
When one DTI is
ON OFF – – – – – – clock signal from DTI0 at
provided.
its PLO0 input.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from DTI0 at
its PLO0 input, under nor-
When more than mal conditions.
one DTI is ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Should a clock failure
provided. occurs with DTI0, MP card
will automatically switch to
the PLO1 input which gets
from DTI1.

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the DTI cards mounted in
PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

– 432 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-8ETIA (HUB)

PN-8ETIA (HUB)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

PN-8ETIA
PZ-M675

D4
S2

10/100
LAN 7/8
LINK/ACT
10/100
LAN 5/6
LINK/ACT
To LAN
10/100
LAN 3/4
LINK/ACT
10 /100
LAN 1/2
J12 LINK/ACT

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
D4 Green ON : Operating power is ON.
OFF : Operating power is OFF.
LINK/ACT Green Lights : LAN link pulse is detected.
Flashes : LAN data is transferred and received.
10/100 Green ON : Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.
OFF : Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.

– 433 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-8ETIA (HUB)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
S2 Auto MDI/MDI-X OFF
ON
(Piano Key SW) (MDI-X fixed)
1
ON Auto MDI/MDI-X ON
OFF
4 (MDI/MDI-X automatic change)
3
2 2 OFF Not used
1

OFF 3 OFF Not used

4 OFF Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 434 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-2ILCC (ILC)

PN-2ILCC (ILC)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MB

SW2

B21
B11
D1
ALM1
PFA1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
PFA0

SW1

SW0

– 435 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-2ILCC (ILC)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
B21 Red No.1 Circuit B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B11 Red B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D1 Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM1 Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation
PFA1 Red Power supply status
ON: Power failure
OFF: Normal operation
Continued on next page

– 436 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-2ILCC (ILC)

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
B20 Red No.0 Circuit B2 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B10 Red B1 channel status
ON: Busy
OFF: Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D0 Green D channel status
ON: Link is connected
OFF: Link is not connected
ALM0 Red Transmission line fault status
ON: Line fault
OFF: Normal operation
PFA0 Red Power supply status
ON: Power failure
OFF: Normal operation

– 437 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-2ILCC (ILC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW4-8: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW4-8: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1

0-3 Not used

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW2 (Piano SW) 1 ON Remote loopback (No.0 Circuit)
OFF
OFF Normal operation
8
7
2 ON Remote loopback (No.1 Circuit)
6
5
4 OFF Normal operation
3
2
1
3 OFF Not used

ON 4 OFF Not used

5 OFF Not used

6 OFF Not used (Always set to OFF)

7 OFF Not used

ON AP No. 04-15
8
OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 438 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-2ILCC (ILC)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (Dip SW) For terminating the transmitting side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.0
ON 1 2
Circuit)
1
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)
For terminating the receiving side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.0
Circuit)
2
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.0 Circuit)
SW1 (Dip SW) For terminating the transmitting side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.1
ON 1 2
Circuit)
1
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the transmitting side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)
For terminating the receiving side of
ON channels B1 and B2 with 100 Ω . (No.1
Circuit)
2
To remove the terminating resistor on
OFF the receiving side of channels B1 and
B2. (No.1 Circuit)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 439 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-8IPTA (SIP)

PN-8IPTA (SIP)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

DC_CONN

SENS

PZ-24IPLA RUN
NOTE
MB

SW0

BUSY
DC
L1
L0
LINK
100M
ACT

LAN

RS

NOTE: Order the PZ-24IPLA card separately.

– 440 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 PN-8IPTA (SIP)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flash (240 IPM): Initializing this card.
Flash (120 IPM): Normal operation.
OFF: Idle/Make Busy.
BUSY Red ON: All channels are busy.
Flash (120 IPM): One or more channels are busy (except for a case
where all channels are busy).
OFF: All channels are idle.
DC Green ON: PZ-24IPLA card already mounted is operating.
OFF: PZ-24IPLA card is not mounted.
L0 Red ON: Disconnection of a link with the IP network has been
detected.
L1 – Not used
LINK Green ON: Connected to the IP network.
OFF: Not connected to the IP network.
100M Green ON: Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.
OFF: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
ACT Green ON: Data is sending/receiving to the IP network.
OFF: Data is not sending/receiving to the IP network.

– 441 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-8IPTA (SIP)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENS 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW0-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1 SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

– 442 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-8IPTA (SIP)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 ON Not used
(Piano Key SW) 1
OFF OFF For normal operation
4
3 ON For normal operation
2 2
1 OFF Not used
ON
Auto Negotiation OFF
ON
(100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed)
3
NOTE 3 Auto Negotiation ON
OFF (Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change)

ON AP No. 04-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 3: When using the firmware program of SC-3591 IPS IPTT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPTA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firm-
ware program of SC-3249 IPS IPTT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPTA card, Auto Negotiation func-
tion is always set to ON.

– 443 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-IPTB (IPT)

PN-IPTB (IPT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

PZ-M567 PN-IPTB

SENSE
RUN
SW1 MB BUSY
SUBOPE3
LINK SUBOPE2
TXRX SUBOPE1
COL SUBOPE0
100M L3
L2
L1
LYR
VCTA
VCTA
VCT To 4VCT Card
VCT

IP
IP CONN : To External
SW2 CONN
LAN Interface

MODE

– 444 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-IPTB (IPT)

Lamp Indications

• PN-IPTB

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
BUSY Red ON: At least one line is busy.
OFF: All lines are idle.
SUBOPE3 Green Remains lit when Card No.3 of 4VCT is operating.
SUBOPE2 Green Remains lit when Card No.2 of 4VCT is operating.
SUBOPE1 Green Remains lit when Card No.1 of 4VCT is operating.
SUBOPE0 Green Remains lit when Card No.0 of 4VCT is operating.
L3 – Not used
L2 Green Remains lit when this card successfully has been registered at the
H.323 gatekeeper. Before the L2 lights, the led is winking.
L1 Green Remains lit while the line can be used.
LYR Green Remains lit when IP network is ready to use.

• PZ-M567

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
LINK Green ON: Connected to the IP network.
OFF: Not connected to the IP network.
TXRX Green Remains lit when sending or receiving IP data.
COL Green Remains lit when detecting IP data collision.
100M Green ON: Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.
OFF: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.

– 445 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-IPTB (IPT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1 SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
MODE 0 Auto Negotiation ON NOTE 3
(Rotary SW)
0, 1 Auto Negotiation OFF
1 (Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps change
by SW2-1) NOTE 3

2-F Not used

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When you set the MODE switch of the IPT card to 0 (Auto Negotiation On), the communication
mode (Full-Duplex/Half-Duplex) and the communication speed (Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps)
of the Ethernet are adjusted to the switching HUB automatically. When you set the MODE
switch to 1 (Auto Negotiation Off), the communication mode of the Ethernet will be fixed to
Half-Duplex. And the communication speed will be set by SW2-1.
Continued on next page

– 446 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-IPTB (IPT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Dip SW) ON For normal operation
1
ON 1 2 3 4 OFF Not used

ON For normal operation

2
OFF Not used

ON For normal operation

3
OFF Not used

ON AP No. 04-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31

SW2 (Dip SW) ON Ethernet 100 Mbps NOTE 4

1
ON
OFF Ethernet 10 Mbps NOTE 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2-5, 7 OFF Not used

ON Dynamic Jitter Buffer

6
OFF Static Jitter Buffer

Nonlinear processor for echo canceller

ON is not used.
8
Nonlinear processor for echo canceller
OFF
is used.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 4: These switch settings are valid only when MODE switch (Rotary SW) is set to 1 (Auto Negoti-
ation OFF).

– 447 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24PRTA (PRT)

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE
RUN
MAS MB

SW1

JP1

SW0

AISS LC
LPB
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
JPR0 SW2 AIS
BL
JPS

JRR1

– 448 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24PRTA (PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LC Green Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D
channel data links connected.
LPB – Not used
CRC Red Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)
errors.
PCM Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
FRM Red Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a
distant office.
AIS Red Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive “1” is received.
The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.
BL Red B channel status
ON : More than 10 channels are busy
OFF : All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM) : 2 through 10 channels are busy

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 0-3 Not used
(Rotary SW) 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
set by CM05.
F

4 SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
NOTE 1
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 6

Continued on next page

– 449 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW0 Source clock signal from network is
ON
(Piano Key SW) 1 sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
NOTE 3 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF OFF
sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
8
7 Source clock signal from network is
ON
6
2 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
5
4 NOTE 3 Source clock signal from network is not
3 OFF
2
sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
1
3 ON Remote loopback
ON
NOTE 5 OFF For normal operation

4 ON Local loopback (AIS send)

NOTE 5 OFF For normal operation
Continued on next page

– 450 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 Set equalizer according to the cable
(Piano Key SW) ON length between the PBX and the C.O. or
5 CSU.
OFF NOTE 5 • For DS-1 (SW1-3 ON)
8
OFF
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7 CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.5 φ)
7 ON ON ON 1199-1758 m (3930-5764 ft.)
6 OFF ON ON 599-1199 m (1965-3930 ft.)
5 0-599 m (0-1965 ft.)
ON ON OFF ON
4 OFF OFF ON Not used
3 6 OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent
2 NOTE 5
1 • For DSX-1/Hong Kong/Taiwan
OFF
ON
(SW1-3 OFF)
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7 CABLE LENGTH TO CSU (0.65 φ)

ON ON ON 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

ON ON ON OFF 40-80 m (131.2-262.5 ft.)
7 ON OFF ON 80-120 m (262.5-394 ft.)
NOTE 5 ON OFF OFF 120-160 m (394-525 ft.)
OFF ON ON 160-200 m (525-656 ft.)
OFF OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent

8 OFF Not used

Continued on next page

– 451 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 ON DTI mode
(Piano Key SW) 1
OFF OFF PRT mode
4
3 2 OFF Not used
2
1
[North America only]
ON
DS-1
ON
(T1 with CSU function)

3 DSX-1
OFF
(T1 without CSU function)

[Hong Kong/Taiwan]

OFF Not used

ON AP No. 04-15
4
NOTE 6
OFF AP No. 20-31

Continued on next page

– 452 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (Dip SW) 1 OFF Always set to OFF

[North America only for AT&T]

ON 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Deletion of Area Code on
ON
International Outgoing call
2 No deletion of Area Code on
OFF
International Outgoing call
[Hong Kong/Taiwan]

OFF Always set to OFF

3 OFF Always set to OFF

4 OFF Always set to OFF

5 OFF Always set to OFF

6 OFF Always set to OFF

7 OFF Always set to OFF

8 OFF Always set to OFF

Continued on next page

– 453 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
JPR0 (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the receiving line
UP
is provided.
Neutral grounding on the receiving line
DOWN
is not provided.
JPR1 (Jumper pin)
RIGHT Line impedance: 100 Ω

LEFT Line impedance: 110 Ω

JPS (Jumper pin) Neutral grounding on the transmitting

UP
line is provided.
Neutral grounding on the transmitting
DOWN
line is not provided.
MAS (Jumper pin)

DOWN Always set to DOWN

AISS (Jumper pin) AIS signal is sent out when make-busy

UP
or power on.
AIS signal is not sent out when make-
DOWN
busy or power on.
JP1 (Jumper pin)

LEFT Always set to LEFT

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

Continued on next page

– 454 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-24PRTA (PRT)

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:

PRT0 PRT1 PRT2 ····· PRT7

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2
MP card will receive the
When one PRT
ON OFF – – – – – – clock signal from PRT0 at
is provided.
its PLO0 input.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under
normal conditions.
When more than
Should a clock failure
one PRT is pro- ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
occurs with PRT0, MP
vided.
card will automatically
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from
PRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 5: This card must be reset after the SW0-3 to SW0-7 switch settings. Set the MB switch to UP and
then DOWN.
NOTE 6: When using the AP Number 64 to 93 (for AP Number extension) in accommodating the PRT
card on Remote site, be sure to set the SENSE switch and SW1-4 switch of all the PRT cards to
be accommodated to AP Number 31. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each PRT card. If a different site is used to accommodate the PRT card, be sure to
set switches similarly.
[Series 3800 software or later required]

– 455 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-30PRTA (PRT)

PN-30PRTA (PRT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB

SW

LC
LPB
PCM
JP1 FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
JPS BL
SW1
JPR
JP

– 456 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30PRTA (PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating.
LC Green Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D
channel data links connected.
LPB – Not used
PCM Red Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
FRM Red Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
MFRM Red Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time
slot 16.
RMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant office.
MRMT Red Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office because
Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant
office.
AIS Red Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive “1” is being
received. The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test.
BL Red B channel status
ON : More than 10 channels are busy
OFF : All channels are idle
Flash (60 IPM) : Only one channel is busy
Flash (120 IPM) : 2 to 10 channels are busy

– 457 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30PRTA (PRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW-8: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
4 SW-8: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

NOTE 1
NOTE 5 0-3 Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
Continued on next page

– 458 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-30PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SW Source clock signal from network is
ON
(Piano Key SW) 1 sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
NOTE 3 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF
OFF sent to the PLO0 input on MP card.
8
Source clock signal from network is
7 ON
6 2 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
5
NOTE 3 Source clock signal from network is not
4
OFF
3 sent to the PLO1 input on MP card.
2
1 ON Remote loopback
3
ON OFF For normal operation
ON Local loopback (AIS send)
4
OFF For normal operation
Transmission line cable:
ON
Coaxial cable (75 Ω)
5
Transmission line cable:
OFF
Twisted-pair cable (120 Ω)
6 OFF
Not used (Always set to OFF)
7 OFF
8 ON AP No. 04-15
NOTE 5 OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 459 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-30PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Dip SW) 1 OFF Always set to OFF

2 OFF Always set to OFF

ON 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 OFF Always set to OFF

4 OFF Always set to OFF

5 OFF Always set to OFF

6 OFF Always set to OFF

7 OFF Always set to OFF

8 OFF Always set to OFF

Continued on next page

– 460 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
JPS Balanced transmission
(Jumper pin) RIGHT
(For twisted-pair cable)

TA is grounded on the transmission line

LEFT
(For coaxial cable)

JPR Balanced transmission

(Jumper pin) UP
(For twisted-pair cable)

RA is grounded on the transmission line

DOWN
(For coaxial cable)

JP
Line impedance: 75 Ω
(Jumper pin) RIGHT
(For coaxial cable)

Line impedance: 120 Ω

LEFT
(For twisted-pair cable)

JP1 (Jumper pin)

DOWN Always set to DOWN

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
Continued on next page

– 461 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-30PRTA (PRT)

NOTE 3: Set SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

PRT0 PRT1 PRT2 ····· PRT7

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
MP card will receive the
When one PRT is
ON OFF – – – – – – clock signal from PRT0 at
provided.
its PLO0 input.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from PRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under nor-
mal conditions.
When more than
Should a clock failure
one PRT is ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
occurs with PRT0, MP
provided.
card will automatically
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from
PRT1.

NOTE 4: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NOTE 5: When using the AP Number 64 to 93 (for AP Number extension) in accommodating the PRT
card on Remote site, be sure to set the SENSE switch and SW1-4 switch of all the PRT cards to
be accommodated to AP Number 31. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each PRT card. If a different site is used to accommodate the PRT card, be sure to
set switches similarly.
[Series 3800 software or later required]

– 462 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-4RSTB (MFR)

PN-4RSTB (MFR)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENS

RUN

MB

SW

OPE3
OPE2
OPE1
OPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
OPE0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

– 463 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4RSTB (MFR)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENS 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05

F SW-8: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW-8: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

NOTE 1
0-3 Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW ON For make-busy No. 0 circuit
(Piano Key SW) 1
OFF For normal operation
OFF ON For make-busy No. 1 circuit
8
2
7
OFF For normal operation
6
ON For make-busy No. 2 circuit
5 3
4 OFF For normal operation
3
2 ON For make-busy No. 3 circuit
1 4
OFF For normal operation
ON
5 OFF
6 OFF Not used
7 OFF
ON AP No. 04-15
8
OFF AP No. 20-31

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 464 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)

PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB

SW1

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
JP0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
BL0-3 Red Remains lit when receiving a CALLER ID (CLASS SM) signal.

– 465 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-4RSTC/PN-4RSTC-A (CIR)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.
F
AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
4
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1
NOTE 3 0-3 Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW1 ON For make-busy No. 0 circuit
(Piano Key SW) 1
OFF For normal operation
OFF ON For make-busy No. 1 circuit
2
4
OFF For normal operation
3
2 ON For make-busy No. 2 circuit
1 3
OFF For normal operation
ON
ON For make-busy No. 3 circuit
4
OFF For normal operation
JP0
(Jumper pin)
RIGHT For normal operation

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When accommodating the CIR card (PN-4RSTC-A) on Remote site, be sure to set SENSE switch
of all the CIR cards to AP Number 15. Also, set AP Number to any one between 64 and 93 by
CM05 for each CIR card. If a different site is used to accommodate the CIR card, be sure to set
SENSE switch to switch No. 15.
[Series 3800 software or later required]

– 466 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-SC00 (CCH)

PN-SC00 (CCH)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW1

SENS

RUN

MB

SW0

LC
LPB

RS To Modem
( For Analog Interface)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LC Green Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the com-
mon signaling channel data links connected.
LPB Green Remains lit when a loopback test is in progress.

– 467 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-SC00 (CCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENS 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW0-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
4
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

NOTE 1
0-3 Not used
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW0 ON Loopback test
(Piano Key SW) 1
OFF For normal operation
OFF
ON Analog interface
4
2
3
OFF Digital interface
2
1 RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM) ON
ON
ON NOTE 3
3
RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM)
OFF
OFF
ON AP No. 04-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 468 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-SC00 (CCH)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Dip SW) ON • Common channel signaling data
1 transmission speed (For Digital Inter-
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF face)
ON TRANSMISSION SW SW SW SW SW
2 SPEED 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5
OFF 48 Kbps NOTE 4 ON ON OFF OFF ON
48 Kbps NOTE 4 ON ON ON OFF ON
ON
3 56 Kbps ON ON OFF ON ON
OFF 64 Kbps ON ON ON ON ON

ON • Common channel signaling data

4 transmission speed (For Analog Inter-
OFF face)
ON
5 Set switches (SW1-1 - SW1-5) to
OFF OFF.
6 OFF Not used
7 OFF Always set to OFF
8 OFF Always set to OFF

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: This setting is available when SW0-2 is set to ON (Analog Interface).
NOTE 4: The following two kinds of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission.
The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of clock source office.
• SW1-3: OFF • SW1-3: ON
48 Kbps 48 Kbps

1 1 1 1
Data Data

– 469 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-SC01 (DCH)

PN-SC01 (DCH)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW1

SENS

RUN

MB

SW0

LC
LPB

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LC Green Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D
channel data links connected.
LPB Green Not used

– 470 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-SC01 (DCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENS 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW0-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
4 SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1

0-3 Not used

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW0 1 OFF Always set to OFF
(Piano Key SW)
2 OFF Always set to OFF
OFF

4
3 OFF Always set to OFF
3
2
1 ON AP No. 04-15
4
ON
OFF AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

– 471 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-SC01 (DCH)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Dip SW) 1 OFF Always set to OFF
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 OFF Always set to OFF

3 OFF Always set to OFF

4 OFF Always set to OFF

5 OFF Always set to OFF

6 OFF Always set to OFF

7 OFF Always set to OFF

8 OFF Always set to OFF

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 472 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-SC03-B/PN-SC03-C (CSH)

PN-SC03-B/PN-SC03-C (CSH)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB

SW1

DOPE7
DOPE6
DOPE5
DOPE4
DOPE3
DOPE2
DOPE1
DOPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
DOPE7-0 Green Remains lit when D channel link with CSI card is connected.
CSI Card No. Circuit No.
DOPE7 CSI3 No.1
DOPE6 CSI3 No.0
DOPE5 CSI2 No.1
DOPE4 CSI2 No.0
DOPE3 CSI1 No.1
DOPE2 CSI1 No.0
DOPE1 CSI0 No.1
DOPE0 CSI0 No.0

– 473 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-SC03-B/PN-SC03-C (CSH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
4 SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1

0-3 Not used

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW1 1 ON 60 ms synchronization clock ON
(Piano SW) NOTE 3
NOTE 4 OFF 60 ms synchronization clock OFF
OFF

4 2 OFF Not used

3
2
1 3 OFF Not used

ON
ON AP No. 04-15
4
OFF AP No. 20-31

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the U-interface CS (ZT) is used, one CSH card per system must be set to the SW1-1 switch
ON. And mount the CSH card which SW1-1 is set to ON into PIM0.
NOTE 4: When the S-interface CS (ZT) is used, set the SW1-1 switch to OFF.

– 474 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-SC03-B (ICH)

PN-SC03-B (ICH)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE

RUN

MB

SW1

DOPE7
DOPE6
DOPE5
DOPE4
DOPE3
DOPE2
DOPE1
DOPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
DOPE7 Green Remains lit when No. 7 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE6 Green Remains lit when No. 6 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE5 Green Remains lit when No. 5 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE4 Green Remains lit when No. 4 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE3 Green Remains lit when No. 3 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE2 Green Remains lit when No. 2 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE1 Green Remains lit when No. 1 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE0 Green Remains lit when No. 0 circuit D channel link is connected.

– 475 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PN-SC03-B (ICH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE 4-F Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be
(Rotary SW) set by CM05.

F SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
AP No.
4 SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1

0-3 Not used

MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 2
SW1 1 OFF Not used
(Piano SW)
2 OFF Not used
OFF

4
3 OFF Not used
3
2
1 ON AP No. 04-15
4
ON
OFF AP No. 20-31

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 476 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

FACE

SW

REAR

CONNR

CONNR: To CONN connector on

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

– 477 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

Lamp Indications

This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW (Dip SW) For normal operation
ON
(Battery backup ON)
ON 1 2 3 4 1
Not used
OFF
(Battery backup OFF)
2 OFF Not used

3 OFF Not used

4 OFF Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 478 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

Mounting PZ-M537 Card

When mounting the EXPMEM card on the AP00 card, do the following procedure.

STEP1: Take off three screws from the rear side of EXPMEM support.
NOTE: Supports and screws are attached to the EXPMEM card.

STEP2: Connect the CONNR connector on the EXPMEM card and the CONN connector on the AP00
card.

STEP3: Secure the EXPMEM card to the AP00 card with three screws which have been taken off by
STEP1.

Mounting EXPMEM Card on AP00 Card

SUPPORT

EXPMEM CARD

CONNR CONNECTOR

EXPMEM CARD

AP00 CARD

CONN CONNECTOR

– 479 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 PZ-M542 (CONN)

PZ-M542 (CONN)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

TRS21 RCV21 FOR

No.2
CIRCUIT
JP2

FOR TRS11 RCV11

To Champ To LTC Connector
LTC

No.1 LT
JP1

Connector (MDF) CIRCUIT on BWB in PIM

RCV01 TRS01 FOR

JP0

No.0
CIRCUIT

COAXIAL CONNECTOR

Lamp Indications

This card has no lamps.

– 480 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PZ-M542 (CONN)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
JP0 For coaxial connectors
RIGHT
(No.0 circuit)
For champ connector
LEFT
(LT connector) (No.0 circuit)
JP1 For coaxial connectors
RIGHT
(No.1 circuit)
For champ connector
LEFT
(LT connector) (No.1 circuit)
JP2 For coaxial connectors
RIGHT
(No.2 circuit)
For champ connector
LEFT
(LT connector) (No.2 circuit)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 481 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PZ-M557 (CONN)

PZ-M557 (CONN)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

FOR TRS20 RCV20

No.2
CIRCUIT
JP2

TRS10 RCV10 FOR

To Champ To LTC Connector
LTC

No.1 LT
JP1

Connector (MDF) CIRCUIT on BWB in PIM

FOR RCV00 TRS00

JP0

No.0
CIRCUIT

COAXIAL CONNECTOR

Lamp Indications

This card has no lamps.

– 482 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 PZ-M557 (CONN)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
JP0 For coaxial connectors
RIGHT
(No.0 circuit)
For champ connector
LEFT
(LT connector) (No.0 circuit)
JP1 For coaxial connectors
RIGHT
(No.1 circuit)
For champ connector
LEFT
(LT connector) (No.1 circuit)
JP2 For coaxial connectors
RIGHT
(No.2 circuit)
For champ connector
LEFT
(LT connector) (No.2 circuit)

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 483 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3003.fm
 CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
LINE/TRUNK CARD

LINE/TRUNK CARD
The table below shows the line/trunk cards to be explained in this section.

List of Line/Trunk Cards

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
LAMP SWITCH POWER ON
NAME
×: PROVIDED ×: PROVIDED ×: ALLOWED REFERENCE
(FUNCTIONAL
–: NOT –: NOT : ALLOWED PAGE
NAME)
PROVIDED PROVIDED AFTER MB*
–: NOT
ALLOWED
PN-2AMPA (AMP) × – × Page 488
PN-CFTA (CFT) × – × Page 489
PN-CFTB (CFT) × × × Page 490
PN-2COTD (COT) × – × Page 491
PN-2COTE (COT) × – × Page 492
PN-4COTA-A
× – × Page 493
(COT)
PN-4COTB (COT) × – × Page 494
PN-4COTE (COT) × – × Page 495
PN-4COTF (COT) × – × Page 496
PN-4COTG (COT) × – × Page 497
PN-6COTJ (COT) × – × Page 498
PN-8COTH (COT) × – × Page 499
PN-8COTQ (COT) × – × Page 500
PN-8COTR (COT) × – × Page 501
PN-8COTS (COT) × – × Page 502
PN-8COTT (COT) × – × Page 503
PN-8COTU (COT) × – × Page 504
PN-2CSIA (CSI) × – × Page 505
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI) × × × Page 508
Continued on next page
*MB = Make Busy

– 484 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
LINE/TRUNK CARD

List of Line/Trunk Cards

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
LAMP SWITCH POWER ON
NAME
×: PROVIDED ×: PROVIDED ×: ALLOWED REFERENCE
(FUNCTIONAL
–: NOT –: NOT : ALLOWED PAGE
NAME)
PROVIDED PROVIDED AFTER MB*
–: NOT
ALLOWED
PN-2CSIH (CSI) × – × Page 511
PN-4CSIA (CSI) × – × Page 514
PN-4CSIA-A (CSI) × – × Page 517
PN-4DATC (DAT) × × × Page 520
PN-4DIDA (DIT) × – × Page 521
PN-2DITA (DIT) × – × Page 522
PN-4DITB (DIT) × – × Page 523
PN-DK00 (DK) – – × Page 524
PN-2DLCN (DLC) × – × Page 525
PN-4DLCM (DLC) × – × Page 526
PN-4DLCT (DLC) × – × Page 527
PN-4DLCQ (DLC) × – × Page 528
PN-8DLCL (DLC) × – × Page 529
PN-8DLCP (DLC) × – × Page 530
PN-2ILCA (ILC) × × × Page 531
PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) × × Page 534
PN-32IPLA
× × Page 537
(IP-PAD)
PN-32IPLA-A
× × Page 541
(IP-PAD)
PN-4LCC (LC) × – × Page 545
PN-4LCD-A (LC) × – × Page 546
PN-4LCE (LC) × – × Page 547
Continued on next page
*MB = Make Busy

– 485 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
LINE/TRUNK CARD

List of Line/Trunk Cards

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
LAMP SWITCH POWER ON
NAME
×: PROVIDED ×: PROVIDED ×: ALLOWED REFERENCE
(FUNCTIONAL
–: NOT –: NOT : ALLOWED PAGE
NAME)
PROVIDED PROVIDED AFTER MB*
–: NOT
ALLOWED
PN-4LCF (LC) × – × Page 548
PN-4LCK (LC) × – × Page 549
PN-4LCL (LC) × – × Page 550
PN-4LCV (LC) × – × Page 551
PN-4LCW (LC) × – × Page 552
PN-8LCAA (LC) × – × Page 553
PN-8LCAB (LC) × – × Page 554
PN-8LCAD (LC) × – × Page 555
PN-8LCAE (LC) × – × Page 556
PN-8LCAF (LC) × – × Page 557
PN-8LCAK (LC) × – × Page 558
PN-2LDTA (LDT) × – × Page 559
PN-4LDTA (LDT) × – × Page 560
PN-4LLCB (LLC) × – × Page 561
PN-M10 (M10) × × × Page 563
PN-M13 (M13) – – × Page 565
PN-2ODTA (ODT) × – × Page 566
PN-2ODTB (ODT) × – × Page 567
PN-4ODTA (ODT) × × × Page 568
PN-4RSTF/
PN-4RSTF-A × – × Page 570
(SDT)
PN-4RSTH (SDT) × – × Page 571
PN-8RSTG (PBR) – – × Page 572
Continued on next page
*MB = Make Busy

– 486 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
LINE/TRUNK CARD

List of Line/Trunk Cards

EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
LAMP SWITCH POWER ON
NAME
×: PROVIDED ×: PROVIDED ×: ALLOWED REFERENCE
(FUNCTIONAL
–: NOT –: NOT : ALLOWED PAGE
NAME)
PROVIDED PROVIDED AFTER MB*
–: NOT
ALLOWED
PN-RTA (RTA) × × NOTE Page 573
PN-TNTA (TNT) – × × Page 576
PN-4VCTI (4VCT) × × × Page 578
PN-16VCTA/
PN-16VCTA-A × × × Page 580
(16VCT)
PZ-8PFTB (PFT) – – × Page 582
PZ-M623 (ETHER) × × – Page 583
PZ-M649 (DTI) × × – Page 584
PZ-M650 (DTI) × × – Page 587
PZ-VM00/
PZ-VM00-M
(VM00)/ × × Page 590
PZ-VM10-M
(VM10)
PZ-VM01 (VM01) × × – Page 593
PZ-VM02 (VM02) × × – Page 594
PZ-VM03-M
× × × Page 597
(VM03)
PZ-VM04 (VM04) × × – Page 602
PZ-VM05 (VM05) – – – Page 603
PZ-VM06 (VM06) – – – Page 603

*MB = Make Busy

NOTE: It is allowed to plugging/unplugging PN-RTA (RTA) card, after flip the PWRSW switch to UP
position (Operating power is off).

– 487 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-2AMPA (AMP)

PN-2AMPA (AMP)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0, 1 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 488 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-CFTA (CFT)

PN-CFTA (CFT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL Red • Remains lit when this card is in use.
• Flashes (60 IPM) when the circuit on the card is in make-busy state
on the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 489 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-CFTB (CFT)

PN-CFTB (CFT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL

JP0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL Red • Remains lit when this card is in use.
• Flashes (60 IPM) when the circuit on the card is in make-busy state
on the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
JP0 6/10 Party Conference
RIGHT
(When using two PN-CFTB cards)
LEFT Not used

– 490 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2COTD (COT)

PN-2COTD (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

LF1
LF0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0, 1 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
LF0, 1 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a meter signal or a
line fault condition.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 491 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2COTE (COT)

PN-2COTE (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

LF1
LF0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0, 1 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
LF0, 1 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a meter signal or a
line fault condition.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 492 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 PN-4COTA-A (COT)

PN-4COTA-A (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 493 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4COTB (COT)

PN-4COTB (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 494 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4COTE (COT)

PN-4COTE (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
LF0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault condi-
tion.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 495 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4COTF (COT)

PN-4COTF (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 496 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4COTG (COT)

PN-4COTG (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 497 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-6COTJ (COT)

PN-6COTJ (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

LF5
LF4
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-5 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
LF0-5 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault condi-
tion.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 498 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8COTH (COT)

PN-8COTH (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 499 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8COTQ (COT)

PN-8COTQ (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 500 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8COTR (COT)

PN-8COTR (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 501 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8COTS (COT)

PN-8COTS (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 502 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8COTT (COT)

PN-8COTT (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

LF7
LF6
LF5
LF4
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
LF0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault condi-
tion.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 503 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8COTU (COT)

PN-8COTU (COT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 504 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2CSIA (CSI)

PN-2CSIA (CSI)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

OPE

LB

B13
B12
B11
B10
B03
B02
B01
B00

DL1

DL0

– 505 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2CSIA (CSI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
OPE Green Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
LB Red Remains lit when a loopback is in progress.
B13 Red Not used (Flash [60 IPM])
B12 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
B11 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
B10 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
B03 Red Not used (Flash [60 IPM])
B02 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
B01 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

– 506 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2CSIA (CSI)

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
B00 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
DL0
(Rotary SW) 0 For normal operation

0-F
0

1-F Not used

NOTE
DL1
(Rotary SW) 0 For normal operation

0-F
0

1-F Not used

NOTE

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

– 507 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

OPE

LB

B13
B12
B11
SP B10
B03
B02
B01
B00

DL1

DL0

– 508 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
OPE Green Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
LB Red Remains lit when a loopback is in progress.
B13 Red Not used (Flash [60 IPM])
B12 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
B11 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
B10 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
B03 Red Not used (Flash [60 IPM])
B02 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
B01 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

– 509 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
B00 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
DL0
(Rotary SW) 0 For normal operation

0-F
0

1-F Not used

NOTE
DL1
(Rotary SW) 0 For normal operation

0-F
0

1-F Not used

NOTE
SP (jumper SW)
UP For normal operation
1
2
3 Front

DOWN Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

– 510 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2CSIH (CSI)

PN-2CSIH (CSI)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

OPE

LB

B12
B11
B10

B02
B01
B00

– 511 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2CSIH (CSI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
OPE Green ON : For normal operation
LB Red ON : When a loopback is in progress
OFF : For normal operation
B12 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
B11 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
B10 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
B02 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
B01 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

– 512 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2CSIH (CSI)

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
B00 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS (ZT) is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS (ZT) is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 513 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4CSIA (CSI)

PN-4CSIA (CSI)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

OPE
LB1
LB0
BSY32
BSY31
BSY30
BSY22
BSY21
BSY20
BSY12
BSY11
BSY10
BSY02
BSY01
BSY00

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
OPE Green ON : For normal operation
LB0 Red No.0 circuit and No.1 circuit status
ON : When a loopback is in progress
OFF : For normal operation
LB1 Red No.2 circuit and No.3 circuit status
ON : When a loopback is in progress
OFF : For normal operation
Continued on next page

– 514 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4CSIA (CSI)

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BSY32 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
BSY31 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
BSY30 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
BSY22 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
BSY21 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
BSY20 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

– 515 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4CSIA (CSI)

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BSY12 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
BSY11 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
BSY10 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
BSY02 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
BSY01 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
BSY00 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 516 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)

PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

OPE
LB1
LB0
BSY32
BSY31
BSY30
BSY22
BSY21
BSY20
BSY12
BSY11
BSY10
BSY02
BSY01
BSY00

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
OPE Green ON : For normal operation
LB0 Red No.0 circuit and No.1 circuit status
ON : When a loopback is in progress
OFF : For normal operation
LB1 Red No.2 circuit and No.3 circuit status
ON : When a loopback is in progress
OFF : For normal operation
Continued on next page

– 517 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BSY32 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
BSY31 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
BSY30 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 3 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 3 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
BSY22 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
BSY21 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
BSY20 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 2 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 2 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

– 518 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4CSIA-A (CSI)

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BSY12 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
BSY11 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
BSY10 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
BSY02 Red B channel status
ON : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
BSY01 Red B channel status
ON : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
BSY00 Red B channel status
ON : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 519 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4DATC (DAT)

PN-4DATC (DAT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 520 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4DIDA (DIT)

PN-4DIDA (DIT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 521 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 PN-2DITA (DIT)

PN-2DITA (DIT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0, 1 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 522 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4DITB (DIT)

PN-4DITB (DIT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 523 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-DK00 (DK)

PN-DK00 (DK)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

Lamp Indications

This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 524 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2DLCN (DLC)

PN-2DLCN (DLC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

CN0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0, 1 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 525 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4DLCM (DLC)

PN-4DLCM (DLC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 526 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4DLCT (DLC)

PN-4DLCT (DLC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 527 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 PN-4DLCQ (DLC)

PN-4DLCQ (DLC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 528 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8DLCL (DLC)

PN-8DLCL (DLC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 529 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8DLCP (DLC)

PN-8DLCP (DLC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 530 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2ILCA (ILC)

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

ACT1
PAL1
LPB1
B21
B11

ACT0
PAL0
LPB0
B20
B10

SW1

SW0

– 531 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
ACT1 Green No.1 ON: Normally operating.
Circuit OFF: Not operating.
PAL1 Red ON: Line is short-circuiting.
OFF: Normally operating.
LPB1 Red OFF: Not used.
B21 Red ON: B2 channel is in use.
OFF: B2 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B2 channel is in make busy state.
B11 Red ON: B1 channel is in use.
OFF: B1 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B1 channel is in make busy state.
ACT0 Green No. 0 ON: Normally operating.
Circuit OFF: Not operating.
PAL0 Red ON: Line is short-circuiting.
OFF: Normally operating.
LPB0 Red OFF: Not used
B20 Red ON: B2 channel is in use.
OFF: B2 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B2 channel is in make busy state.
B10 Red ON: B1 channel is in use.
OFF: B1 channel is idle.
Flash (60 IPM): B1 channel is in make busy state.

– 532 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
1 OFF Always set to OFF
(Piano Key SW)

OFF 2 OFF Always set to OFF

4
3
2
3 OFF Always set to OFF
1

ON 4 OFF Always set to OFF

SW0 No.0 Terminating register is

ON
(Piano Key SW) Circuit provided.
1 (Receiving) Terminating register is
OFF OFF
not provided.
4
3 No.0 Terminating register is
ON
2 Circuit provided.
1 2 (Sending) Terminating register is
ON OFF
not provided.
No.1 Terminating register is
ON
Circuit provided.
3 (Receiving) Terminating register is
OFF
not provided.
No.1 Terminating register is
ON
Circuit provided.
4 (Sending) Terminating register is
OFF
not provided.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure
and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 533 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)

PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

DC_CONN

SENS

PZ-24IPLA RUN
NOTE
MB

SW0

BUSY
DC
L1
L0
LINK
100M
ACT

LAN

RS

NOTE: Order the PZ-24IPLA card separately.

– 534 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flash (240 IPM): Initializing this card.
Flash (120 IPM): Normal operation.
OFF: Idle/Make Busy.
BUSY Red ON: All channels are busy.
Flash (120 IPM): One or more channels are busy (except for a case
where all channels are busy).
OFF: All channels are idle.
DC Green ON: PZ-24IPLA card already mounted is operating.
OFF: PZ-24IPLA card is not mounted.
L0 Red ON: Disconnection of a link with the IP network has been
detected.
L1 Green ON: G723.1 is enabled.
OFF: G723.1 is disabled.
LINK Green ON: Connected to the IP network.
OFF: Not connected to the IP network.
100M Green ON: Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.
OFF: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
ACT Green ON: Data is sending/receiving to the IP network.
OFF: Data is not sending/receiving to the IP network.

– 535 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 1
SW0
1 OFF Not used
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
2 OFF Not used
4
3
Auto Negotiation OFF
2 ON
1 (100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed)
3
ON NOTE 2 Auto Negotiation ON
OFF (Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change)

4 OFF Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 2: When using the firmware program of SC-3330 IPS IPADT PROG-B1 or later for the PN-8IPLA
card, you may set the Auto Negotiation ON/OFF settings by the SW0-3. When using the firm-
ware program of SC-3213 IPS IPADT PROG-A1 for the PN-8IPLA card, Auto Negotiation
function is always set to ON.

– 536 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)

PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

• PN-32IPLA
PZ-M571 PZ-M572 PN-32IPLA

SUBA
RUN
RUN
MB MB

SW0 SW0
VC3 BL
VC2 LOAD
VC1 PCON
VC0 AUX

VCTB VCTB
VCTA VCTA

SUBB
VCTB/VCTA:
To 16VCT Card VCT1A/ LAN
VCT0A Connector

LAN:
To LAN
MODE

• PZ-M571

NALM
LINK
IPDL
100M
TX
RX
COL

LAN

MODE

– 537 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)

Lamp Indications

• PN-32IPLA

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flash (120 IPM) : This card is operating normally.
OFF : This card is not operating.
BL Red ON : At least one line is busy.
OFF : All lines are idle.
LOAD – Not used
PCON – Not used
AUX – Not used
VC3 – Remains lit when the last 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without
Card No.1 of 16VCT.
VC2 Green Remains lit when Card No. 1 of 16VCT is operating.
VC1 Green Remains lit when the first 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without
Card No.0 of 16VCT.
VC0 Green Remains lit when Card No. 0 of 16VCT is operating.

• PZ-M571

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
NALM – Not used
LINK Green ON : Connected to the IP network.
OFF : Not connected to the IP network.
IPDL – Not used
100M Green ON : Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.
OFF : Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
TX Green ON : Sending IP data
OFF : Not sending IP data
RX Green ON : Receiving IP data
OFF : Not receiving IP data
COL Yellow ON : Detecting IP data collision

– 538 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)

Switch Settings

• PN-32IPLA

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE
SW0 1 OFF Not used
(Piano Key SW)
OFF 2 OFF Not used
4
3 3 OFF Not used
2
1
4 OFF Not used
ON

NOTE: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 539 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-32IPLA (IP-PAD)

• PZ-M571

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
MODE 0-F Auto Negotiation ON
(Rotary SW) 0 (Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change)
Auto Negotiation OFF
3
(10 Mbps [Half-Duplex] fixed)
Auto Negotiation OFF
4
(100 Mbps [Half-Duplex] fixed)
1, 2, 5-F Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 540 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)

PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

• PN-32IPLA-A
PZ-M632 PZ-M633 PN-32IPLA-A

SUBA
RUN
RUN
MB
MB

SW0
SW0
VC3 BL
VC2 LOAD
VC1 PCON
VC0 AUX

VCTB VCTB
VCTA VCTA
MODE
SUBB
VCTB/VCTA:
To 16VCT Card VCT1A/ LAN
VCT0A Connector

LAN:
To LAN

• PZ-M632

NALM
LINK
IPDL
100M
TX
RX
COL

MODE

LAN

– 541 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)

Lamp Indications

• PN-32IPLA-A

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
RUN Green Flash (120 IPM) : This card is operating normally.
OFF : This card is not operating.
BL Red ON : At least one line is busy.
OFF : All lines are idle.
LOAD – Not used
PCON – Not used
AUX – Not used
VC3 – Remains lit when the last 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without
Card No.1 of 16VCT.
VC2 Green Remains lit when Card No.1 of 16VCT is operating.
VC1 – Remains lit when the first 16 channel of IP-PAD is available without
Card No.0 of 16VCT.
VC0 Green Remains lit when Card No. 0 of 16VCT is operating.

• PZ-M632

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
NALM – Not used
LINK Green ON : Connected to the IP network.
OFF : Not connected to the IP network.
IPDL – Not used
100M Green ON : Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.
OFF : Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.
TX Green ON : Sending IP data
OFF : Not sending IP data
RX Green ON : Receiving IP data
OFF : Not receiving IP data
COL Yellow ON : Detecting IP data collision

– 542 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)

Switch Settings

• PN-32IPLA-A

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE
SW0 1 OFF Not used
(Piano Key SW)
OFF 2 OFF Not used
4
3 3 OFF Not used
2
1
4 OFF Not used
ON

NOTE: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 543 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-32IPLA-A (IP-PAD)

• PZ-M632

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
MODE 0-F Auto Negotiation ON
(Rotary SW) 0 (Ethernet 10 Mbps/100 Mbps automatic
change)
Auto Negotiation OFF
1
(100 Mbps [Full-Duplex] fixed) NOTE
Auto Negotiation OFF
3
(10 Mbps [Half-Duplex] fixed)
Auto Negotiation OFF
4
(100 Mbps [Half-Duplex] fixed)
2, 5-F Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE: When using the firmware program of SC-3150 IPS IPPAD PROG-C1 or later for the PN-
32IPLA-A card, you may set the MODE switch to 1 (Auto Negotiation OFF [100 Mbps <Full-
Duplex> fixed]). When using the firmware program of SC-3090 IPS IPPAD PROG-B1 for the
PN-32IPLA-A card, you may not set the MODE switch to 1.

– 544 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PN-4LCC (LC)

PN-4LCC (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 545 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4LCD-A (LC)

PN-4LCD-A (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 546 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4LCE (LC)

PN-4LCE (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 547 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4LCF (LC)

PN-4LCF (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 548 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4LCK (LC)

PN-4LCK (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 549 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4LCL (LC)

PN-4LCL (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 550 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4LCV (LC)

PN-4LCV (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 551 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4LCW (LC)

PN-4LCW (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 552 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8LCAA (LC)

PN-8LCAA (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 553 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8LCAB (LC)

PN-8LCAB (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 554 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8LCAD (LC)

PN-8LCAD (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 555 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8LCAE (LC)

PN-8LCAE (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 556 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8LCAF (LC)

PN-8LCAF (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 557 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-8LCAK (LC)

PN-8LCAK (LC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 558 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
NOVEMBER/15/2006
 PN-2LDTA (LDT)

PN-2LDTA (LDT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0, 1 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 559 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4LDTA (LDT)

PN-4LDTA (LDT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 560 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4LLCB (LLC)

PN-4LLCB (LLC)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

MORVS

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

– 561 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4LLCB (LLC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING

FUNCTION CHECK
NAME NUMBER POSITION
MORVS
(Jumper pin) UP Momentary Open

DOWN Reverse

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 562 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-M10 (M10)

PN-M10 (M10)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

JP3

CK0
CK1
TALM
JP4 RALM

JP1 CN1 To Optical Fiber

JP0 JP2

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
CK0 Green Remains lit when a Digital Trunk Interface is connected to No. 0 circuit
on this card.
CK1 Green Remains lit when a Digital Trunk Interface is connected to No. 1 circuit
on this card.
TALM Red Remains lit when optical output is stopped.
RALM Red Remains lit when optical input is lost or stopped.

– 563 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-M10 (M10)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
JP0, 1 When connected to E1 (2 M) Digital
(Jumper pin) UP Trunk Interface

When connected to T1 (1.5 M) Digital

DOWN Trunk Interface

JP2 (Jumper pin) Line code: B8ZS* is provided

RIGHT (For T1 interface)
*B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution
Line code: B8ZS* is not provide
LEFT (For T1 interface)
*B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution
JP3 (Jumper pin) When connected to E1 (2 M) Digital
RIGHT
Trunk Interface
When connected to T1 (1.5 M) Digital
LEFT
Trunk Interface
JP4 (Jumper pin) When connected to E1 (2 M) Digital
UP
Trunk Interface
When connected to T1 (1.5 M) Digital
DOWN
Trunk Interface

– 564 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-M13 (M13)

PN-M13 (M13)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

LC

TEL

Lamp Indications

This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 565 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2ODTA (ODT)

PN-2ODTA (ODT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0, 1 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 566 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-2ODTB (ODT)

PN-2ODTB (ODT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL1
BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0, 1 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 567 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4ODTA (ODT)

PN-4ODTA (ODT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

JP3

JP2
BL3
JP1 BL2
BL1
BL0
JP0

CN3

To E&M
Connector Pin

CN2

To 2,3 Circuit
CN1 Tx/Rx

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

– 568 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4ODTA (ODT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
JP0-3 (Jumper Pin)
GND

UP Always set to UP

OPEN

– 569 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4RSTF/PN-4RSTF-A (SDT)

PN-4RSTF/PN-4RSTF-A (SDT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 570 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
OCTOBER/31/2005
 PN-4RSTH (SDT)

PN-4RSTH (SDT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 571 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-8RSTG (PBR)

PN-8RSTG (PBR)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

Lamp Indications

This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 572 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-RTA (RTA)

PN-RTA (RTA)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

PWR
SWM ALM
BUSY

PWRSW
L1LNK
L1ACT
L1SPD
L2LNK
L2ACT

LAN2: To 10BASE-T
SUBCONN
LAN1: To 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Console: To Local Console

– 573 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-RTA (RTA)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
PWR Green ON : Operating power is ON.
OFF: Operating power is OFF.
ALM Red Remains lit when a trouble occurs.
BUSY Green Remain lit while writing/reading the data to/from the flash memory.
NOTE 1
L1LNK Green Remains lit while LAN1 port is connected to the network.
L1ACT Green Flashes while LAN1 port is sending or receiving the data.
L1SPD Green Remains lit while LAN1 port is operating at 100 Mbps.
L2LNK Green Remains lit while LAN2 port is connected to the network.
L2ACT Green Flashes while LAN2 port is sending or receiving the data.

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
PWRSW
(Toggle SW) UP Operating power is OFF

DOWN Operating power is ON

NOTE 2
Continued on next page

– 574 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-RTA (RTA)

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SWM
ON Test Mode
(Piano Key SW)
1
OFF OFF For normal operation
4
3
2
ON For aging
1 2
ON OFF For normal operation

3 OFF Not used

ON Super Reset
4
OFF For normal operation

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: Do not turn off the system power and operating power of PN-RTA card while the BUSY lamp is
lit.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the PWRSW switch to UP position (Operating power is off) before
plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

– 575 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-TNTA (TNT)

PN-TNTA (TNT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW

JACK1

JACK0

Lamp Indications

This card has no lamps.

– 576 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-TNTA (TNT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW Volume adjustment for No.0 circuit
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH NUMBER
VOLUME
OFF
1 2
4
3 1, 2 OFF OFF –10 dB
2 ON OFF –7 dB
1
OFF ON –4 dB
ON
ON ON –1 dB

Volume adjustment for No.1 circuit

SWITCH NUMBER
VOLUME
3 4
3, 4 OFF OFF –10 dB
ON OFF –7 dB
OFF ON –4 dB
ON ON –1 dB

– 577 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4VCTI (4VCT)

PN-4VCTI (4VCT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0

SW1

IPTA IPTA/IPT:
To IPT Card VCTA/VCT Connector
or
IPT To Other 4VCT Card EXPA/EXP
Connector
EXPA
EXPA/EXP:
To IPTA/IPT Connector of
EXP Other 4VCT Card

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0-3 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

– 578 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-4VCTI (4VCT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 Set the number per 4VCT card if two or more 4VCT
(Piano Key SW) cards are used. (Maximum four 4VCT cards)
OFF SW No.
Card No.
4
3
1-1 1-2
1, 2
2 OFF OFF 0
1
ON OFF 1
ON
OFF ON 2
ON ON 3

ON
3 Not used
OFF
ON
4 Not used
OFF

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 579 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT)

PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

BL0

SW1

VCT1B VCT1B/VCT0B:
To VCT1A/VCT0A Connector on
Another 16VCT Card
VCT0B

VCT1A VCT1A/VCT0A:
To IP-PAD Card VCTB/VCTA Connector
or
VCT0A To VCT1B/VCT0B Connector on
Another 16VCT Card

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
BL0 Red Remains lit when 0-15 channels are busy.

– 580 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PN-16VCTA/PN-16VCTA-A (16VCT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 Set the number per 16VCT card if two 16VCT cards
(Piano Key SW) are used. (Maximum two 16VCT cards)
OFF
SW No.
4 1, 2 Card No.
3 1-1 1-2
2
1
OFF OFF 0

ON
OFF ON 1

ON
3 Not used
OFF
ON
4 Not used
OFF

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

– 581 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-8PFTB (PFT)

PZ-8PFTB (PFT)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

PFT1

PFT0

Lamp Indications

This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 582 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-M623 (ETHER)

PZ-M623 (ETHER)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

FACE REAR
W1LNK
W1ACT

LAN

CONN

CONN : To SUBCONN Connector on PN-RTA

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
W1LNK Green Remains lit while LAN port is connected to the network.
W1ACT Green Flashes while LAN port is sending or receiving the data.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 583 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-M649 (DTI)

PZ-M649 (DTI)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

FACE REAR
PBXRED W1LNK
PBXYEL W1ACT
PBXBLU
SW

WAN

CONN

CONN : To SUBCONN Connector on PN-RTA

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
W1LNK Green Remains lit while WAN port is connected to the network.
W1ACT Green Flashes while WAN port is sending or receiving the data.
PBXRED Red Remains lit when a trouble occurs in T1 interface for PBX (PCM loss/
Multi Frame loss/Frame loss).
PBXYEL Red Remains lit when a trouble occurs in T1 interface for PBX (PMT
Alarm).
PBXBLU Red Remains lit when a trouble occurs in T1 interface for PBX (AIS
Alarm).

– 584 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-M649 (DTI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW Source clock signal from network is
(Piano Key SW) ON sent to the PLO0 input on MP card
1 (1.5 MHz clock).
ON
NOTE 1
1
NOTE 2 Source clock signal from network is not
2 OFF sent to the PLO0 input on MP card
3
4
(1.5 MHz clock).
Source clock signal from network is
ON sent to the PLO1 input on MP card
2 (1.5 MHz clock).
NOTE 1
NOTE 2 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF sent to the PLO1 input on MP card
(1.5 MHz clock).
3 OFF Not used
WAN port or T1 interface for PBX are
ON
4 available.
OFF Only WAN port is available.

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

– 585 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-M649 (DTI)

NOTE 1: Set SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

DTI0 DTI1 DTI2 ····· DTI7

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
MP card will receive
When one DTI is the clock signal from
ON OFF – – – – – –
provided. DTI0 at its PLO0
input.
MP card will receive
the clock signal from
DTI0 at its PLO0
input, under normal
When more than conditions.
one DTI is pro- ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Should a clock failure
vided. occurs with DTI0, MP
card will automati-
cally switch to the
PLO1 input which
gets clock from DTI1.

NOTE 2: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the DTI cards mounted in
PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 3: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

– 586 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-M650 (DTI)

PZ-M650 (DTI)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

FACE REAR
W1LNK
W1ACT

SW

WAN

CONN

CONN : To SUBCONN Connector on PN-RTA

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
W1LNK Green Remains lit while WAN port is connected to the network.
W1ACT Green Flashes while WAN port is sending or receiving the data.

– 587 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-M650 (DTI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW Source clock signal from network is
(Piano Key SW) ON sent to the PLO0 input on MP card
1 (2.048 MHz clock).
ON
NOTE 1
1
NOTE 2 Source clock signal from network is not
2 OFF sent to the PLO0 input on MP card
3
4
(2.048 MHz clock).
Source clock signal from network is
ON sent to the PLO1 input on MP card
2 (2.048 MHz clock).
NOTE 1
NOTE 2 Source clock signal from network is not
OFF sent to the PLO1 input on MP card
(2.048 MHz clock).
3 OFF Not used
4 ON Fixed

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Continued on next page

– 588 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-M650 (DTI)

NOTE 1: Set SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:

DTI0 DTI1 DTI2 ····· DTI7

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW REMARKS
-1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
MP card will receive
When one DTI is the clock signal from
ON OFF – – – – – –
provided. DTI0 at its PLO0
input.
MP card will receive
the clock signal from
DTI0 at its PLO0
input, under normal
When more than conditions.
one DTI is pro- ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Should a clock failure
vided. occurs with DTI0, MP
card will automati-
cally switch to the
PLO1 input which
gets clock from DTI1.

NOTE 2: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the DTI cards mounted in
PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 3: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

– 589 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10)

PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

• CPU Board (Top Side)

CPU Board (top side) RXD

TXD
MOD
RI

VM00/VM00-M/VM10-M Card COM2

SW1-4
SW1-1
COM1

HDD
BIOS

Internal modem
NOTE: Only the PZ-
VM00 is not
equipped with in-
ternal modem.

• DSP Board (Bottom Side)

VM00/VM00-M/VM10-M Card
DSP Board (bottom side)
BL7

BL0
SWP
MB
DSP
PL3
PL0
RST

CN3
(VM01 Card Slot)

– 590 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
CPU RXD Green Not used
Board TXD Red Not used
MOD Green Not used
RI Red Incoming call
HDD Red Accessing to the HDD
– Built-in hard disk is faulty
BIOS Red BIOS programming is in operation
– DOS mode has been activated
DSP BL0-7 Red • Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
Board • Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy
state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
SWP Red 20 seconds after the MB switch is turned ON (upward) (The circuit
card can be plugged/unplugged while this pilot lamp is on.)
DSP Green/ According to voice mail application program in use.
Flashing
Red/
Flashing
PL0-3 Red DSP circuit operating

– 591 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM00)/PZ-VM10-M (VM10)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP For make-busy
ON

DOWN For normal operation

NOTE 1
RST (Toggle SW) Push when starting up this card, after MB switch is set
to DOWN position.

NOTE 2
SW1 BIOS Redirect Utility (Key board)
ON
(Piano Key SW) 1 NOTE 3
OFF OFF Normal Operation
4 BIOS Redirect Utility (Floppy Drive)
3 ON
2 NOTE 3
2
1 OFF Normal Operation
ON
COM2: Use internal modem for remote
ON
NOTE 2 maintenance
3
COM2: RS-232C (For local direct con-
OFF
nection to maintenance console)
4 OFF Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.
NOTE 2: When SW1 settings have changed, RST switch must be pushed.
NOTE 3: Use BIOS Redirect only when assisted by NEC.

– 592 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PZ-VM01 (VM01)

PZ-VM01 (VM01)

Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

PL7
VM01 Card (on VM00/VM10 DSP Board)
PL4

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
PL4-7 Red DSP circuit operating

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 593 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
JULY/1/2006
 PZ-VM02 (VM02)

PZ-VM02 (VM02)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CPU Board
(top side) SW1
CN3 SW2
(HDD) HDD ALM
SWAP
HDD
Internal BIOS
APL
modem CN7 (COM1)
CN8 (COM2)

CN9 (PARA)
CN14 (MONI)
LINK
100M
CN10 (To LAN)
FAN

CN11 (USB)

CN12 (PS/2)
SW4
SW3
CN15 (FAN)

NOTE: HDD is a local content product.

– 594 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-VM02 (VM02)

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
ALM Red Flashes when this card is operating normally.
Flashes when loading BIOS bootstrap programs (When this card is
HDD Green
starting up), and when accessing the internal HDD.
Lights when BIOS program starts and goes out when OS program
BIOS Green
starts.
SWAP Red Lights when OS is shut down.
APL Green/Red According to application software.
Lights when LAN link pulse is detected.
LINK Green
Flashes when LAN data is transferred and received.
100M Green Indicates LAN is connected in 100 Mbps.

– 595 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-VM02 (VM02)

Switch Settings

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
0 Reset of the VM02 card
(Rotary SW)

0-F 1 Power Button of the VM02 card

2-F Not used

SW2 When rebooting the VM02 card, push

(Push SW) SW2 switch after setting SW1 switch to
0.
When making power of the VM02 card
ON/OFF, push SW2 switch after setting
SW1 switch to 1.
SW3
(Piano Key SW) 1 OFF Not used
OFF

2
1
2 OFF Not used
ON

SW4
ON Not used
(Piano Key SW)
1
OFF
OFF COM2 is used for RS-232C port
2
1
2 OFF Not used
ON

– 596 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

• CPU Board (Top Side)

CPU Board
(top side) SW1
CN3 SW2
(HDD) HDD ALM
SWAP
HDD
Internal BIOS
APL
modem CN7 (COM1)
CN8 (COM2)

CN9 (PARA)
CN14 (MONI)
LINK
100M
CN10 (To LAN)
FAN

CN11 (USB)

CN12 (PS/2)
SW4
SW3
CN15 (FAN)
CN6 (DSP Board)

NOTE: HDD is a local content product.

– 597 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

• DSP Board (Bottom Side)

DSP Board BL7 (15)

(bottom side)
BL0 (8)

SWP

SW5

APP

DSP
CN18
LD7 (15)

LD0 (8)

CN17 CN17 (CPU Board)

SW6

CN18 : To CN20 connector on PZ-VM05/PZ-VM06 card

– 598 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

Lamp Indications

• CPU Board

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
ALM Red Flashes when this card is operating normally.
Flashes when loading BIOS bootstrap programs (When this card is
HDD Green
starting up), and when accessing the internal HDD.
Lights when BIOS program starts and goes out when OS program
BIOS Green
starts.
SWAP Red Lights when OS is shut down.
APL Green/Red According to voice mail application software.
Lights when LAN link pulse is detected.
LINK Green
Flashes when LAN data is transferred and received.
100M Green Indicates LAN is connected in 100 Mbps.

• DSP Board

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
Lights when the corresponding circuit is in use.
BL0-BL7 Red Blink when corresponding circuit is in make busy state or the system
data for the circuit is not assigned.
Lights when OS is shut down. VMS system including PC section can
SWAP Green/Red
be unplugged while this LED lights.
APP Green/Red Lights or flashes according to the VMS application program.
DSP Red Lights when OS is downloaded.
LD0-LD7 Red Lights when the corresponding DSP port is used.

– 599 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

Switch Settings

• CPU Board

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
0 Reset of the VM03 card
(Rotary SW)

1 Power ON of the VM03 card

0-F
F For normal operation

2-E Not used

SW2 Push when starting up the VM03 card,

(Push SW) after the SW1 switch is set to 1 and the
SW5 switch is set to DOWN (MB off)
position.
SW3
(Piano Key SW) 1 OFF Not used
OFF

2
1
2 OFF Not used
ON

SW4
COM2 is used for internal modem
(Piano Key SW) ON
(remote maintenance)
OFF
1
2
COM2 is used for RS-232C port (local
1
OFF direct connection to maintenance con-
ON
sole)

2 OFF Not used

– 600 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-VM03-M (VM03)

• DSP Board

SWITCH SETTING
SWITCH NAME FUNCTION CHECK
NUMBER POSITION
SW5 (Toggle SW)
UP For shut-down (MB on)

DOWN For normal operation (MB off)

NOTE
SW6 SW SW
(Dip SW) 1 6-1 6-2
OFF OFF OFF Voice Mail started in
direct mode (When
SW4-1 is set to OFF.)
ON
OFF ON Voice Mail started in
2 OFF modem mode (When
1 2 3 4
SW4-1 is set to ON.)

3 OFF Not used

4 OFF Not used

The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position of in the SETTING POSITION col-
umn indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

NOTE: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the
circuit card.

– 601 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-VM04 (VM04)

PZ-VM04 (VM04)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

DSP Board BL7 (15)

(put between VM03)
BL0 (8)

CN18
LD7 (15)

LD0 (8)

CN17 CN17 (CPU Board) CN19

(DSP Board)

CN18 : To CN18 connector on PZ-VM05/PZ-VM06 card

Lamp Indications

LAMP
COLOR FUNCTION
NAME
Lights when the corresponding circuit is in use.
BL0-BL7 Red Blink when corresponding circuit is in make busy state or the system
data for the circuit is not assigned.
LD0-LD7 Red Lights when the corresponding DSP port is used.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 602 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm
 PZ-VM05 (VM05)/PZ-VM06 (VM06)

PZ-VM05 (VM05)/PZ-VM06 (VM06)

Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CN20

CN20: To CN18 connector on DSP Board

Lamp Indications

This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings

This card has no switches.

– 603 – NWA-008841-001 Rev.5.0

90ch3004.fm